Home

FrameMaker MIF Reference Guide

1. Example MathFullForm statement acotx lt MathFullForm acot char x gt acothx lt MathFullForm acoth char x gt acscx lt MathFullForm acsc char x gt acschx lt MathFullForm acsch char x gt ZX lt MathFullForm angle char x gt argx lt MathFullForm arg char x gt asecx lt MathFullForm asec char x gt asechx lt MathFullForm asech char x gt asinx lt MathFullForm asin char x gt asinhx lt MathFullForm asinh char x gt x lt MathFullForm ast char x gt atanx lt MathFullForm atan char x gt atanhx lt MathFullForm atanh char x gt x lt MathFullForm box char x gt oe lt MathFullForm box2 char x gt ex lt MathFullForm boxdot char x gt lt MathFullForm bra char x gt x lt MathFullForm ceil char x gt Ax lt MathFullForm change char x gt cosx lt MathFullForm cos char x gt coshx lt MathFullForm cosh char x gt cotx lt MathFullForm cot char x gt cothx lt MathFullForm coth char x gt CSCx lt MathFullForm csc char x gt cschx lt MathFullForm csch char x 1 gt 202 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Example MathFullForm statement Vxx lt MathFullForm curl char x gt xt lt MathFullForm dagger char x gt x l
2. Op code Description of op code Location Ox2C Font style page 293 0x2D Font color page 293 Ox2E Font weight page 293 Ox2F Font angle page 294 0x30 Font variation page 294 0x31 Font horizontal kerning page 294 0x32 Font vertical kerning page 294 0x33 Font word spread value page 295 Object op codes Op code Description of op code Location 0x80 Ellipse page 295 0x81 Polygon page 295 0x82 Polyline page 296 0x83 Rectangle page 296 0x84 Rounded rectangle page 296 0x85 Arc page 297 0x86 Framelmage graphic imported within this graphic page 297 0x87 Beginning of text line page 298 0x88 Text in text line page 298 0x89 End of text line page 299 0x8A Beginning of clipping rectangle page 299 0x8B End of clipping rectangle page 299 0x8C FrameVector graphic imported within this graphic page 299 Data types used in specifications The following table lists the data types used for the specifications in this appendix Type Definition byte unsigned 8 bit integer short unsigned 16 bit integer long signed 32 bit integer unsigned long unsigned 32 bit integer metric signed 32 bit fixed point the first 16 bits represent the digits preceding the decimal the last 16 bits repre sent the digits following the decimal string string of bytes in UTF 8 encoding 286 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 287 MIF Reference Type Definition point 2 metrics interpreted as the
3. lt ElselIf gt Additional statements as needed lt Else gt An optional Else clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 165 gt End of Level Format Rule If Elself and Else statements MIF Reference If ElseIf and Else statements specify clauses within ContextFormatRule and LevelFormatRule state ments In a Context FormatRule statement they specify a context and one or more statements that define how to change formatting when the context applies Ifan If or ElseIf statement does not include a Context or Level statement or the Context or Level statement contains an empty string this indicates that the If or ElseIf statement applies in all contexts In a ContextFormatRule statement If and ElseIf and Else statements take the following form lt If Begin If clause lt Context contextstring gt String specifying a context such as Section lt Section Ifthis context applies to the element the following formatting statements are used to format the element lt Formatting statement gt A statement suchasa FormatTag or FmtChangeListTag state ment that specifies how to change the formatting whenthe Context statement applies see Formatting statements next for a list of format ting statements gt End of If statement lt Elself lt Context contextstring gt lt Formatting statement gt gt Endof ElseIf statement lt Else An optional E
4. Volume Chapter Page Footnote Table Footnote VolumeNumstart ChapterNumStart ContPageNum BFNoteStartNum BTbIFNoteNumStyle VolumeNumStyle ChapterNumStyle PageNumStart BFNoteNumStyle BTbIFNoteLabels VolumeNumText ChapterNumText PageNumStyle BFNoteRestart BTbIFNoteCompute Method VolNumCompute ChapterNumCompute BFNoteLabels Method Method BFNoteCompute Method Documents Because there are new numbering properties for documents and books documents now have new numbering state ments The following table shows the new MIF statements for managing different types of numbering in documents Volume Chapter Page Footnote VolumeNumStart ChapterNumStart ContPageNum DFNoteComputeMethod VolumeNumStyle ChapterNumStyle PageNumStart VolumeNumText ChapterNumText PageNumStyle VolNumComputeMethod ChapterNumComputemethod Changes between version 5 and 5 5 This section describes changes to MIF syntax between versions 5 and 5 5 of FrameMaker ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 258 MIF Reference Asian text processing A section has been added to the MIF Reference to describe the new MIF statements that were added for Asian text in a document See MIF Asian Text Processing Statements for more information MIF file layout A MIF file can now include a CombinedFont Catalog statement that contains CombinedFontDefn statements to define each combined font for the document The combinedFontCatalog statement must occur before the Docu
5. Tables are like paragraphs in that they have a format A table format controls the appearance of a table including the number and width of columns the types of ruling or shading in rows and columns and the table s position in a text column Table formats can be named stored in a Table Catalog and applied to many tables A table format can also be defined locally In a FrameMaker document tables appear where they have been placed in the text flow A table behaves like an anchored frame so a table flows with the surrounding text unless you give it a specific location In a MIF file the document s tables are collected in one place and a placeholder for each table indicates the table s position in the text flow You create a table in a MIF file as follows e Specify the contents of the table by using a Tb1 statement An individual table is called a table instance All table instances are stored in one Tbls statement Assign each table instance a unique ID number e Indicate the position of the table in the text flow by using an ATb1 statement The ATb1 statement is the place holder or anchor for the table instance It refers to the table instance s unique ID e Specify the table format by using a Tb1Format statement Formats can be named and stored in the Table Catalog which is defined by a Tb1catalog statement or locally defined within a table ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 25 MIF Reference Creating a table instance All table in
6. lt MathFullForm int char x gt 207 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 208 MIF Reference Example MathFullForm statement fx lt MathFullForm oint char x gt IT lt MathFullForm prod char x gt 5x lt MathFullForm sum char x gt Expressions with range operands have multiple display formats that change how operands are positioned around the symbol Extended unions and intersections have two display formats The formats are the same for both expressions as an example the following table shows the two display formats for an intersection with three operands Example MathFullForm statement p 7 lt MathFullForm Al bigcap num 1 0 1 num 2 0 2 num 3 0 3 gt 2 31 lt MathFullForm 2 bigcap ili num 1 0 1 num 2 0 2 num 3 0 3 gt Sums products and integrals have three display formats The formats are the same for all of these operators as an example the following table shows the display formats for an integral with three operands Example MathFullForm statement b lt MathFullForm int char x char a char b gt ii lt MathFullForm int ili char x charl a char b gt X f lt MathFullForm int i2i char x char a char b gt Expressions with optional operands Some expressions have optional operands In these expressions the optional operands follow the primary operand The following ta
7. lt DMenuBar string gt Name of the menu bar displayed by an FDK client when the docu ment is opened if an empty string is specified or if the menu bar is not found the standard FrameMaker menu bar is used lt DVoMenuBar string gt Name of the menu bar displayed by an FDK client when the docu ment is opened in View Only mode if an empty string is specified or ifthe menu bar is not found the standard view only menu bar is used Math properties For more information see MIF Equation Statements Structure properties For more information see MIF Statements for Structured Docu ments and Books Document Direction lt DocDir keyword gt Specifies the direction left to right LTR or right to left RTL in which you can author your document The direction of objects which derive their direction from the document is set to LTR or RTL keyword can be one of LTR RTL Miscellaneous properties lt DMagicMarker integer gt Type number of the marker used to represent a delete mark 105 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 106 MIF Reference BookComponent statement BookComponent statements contain the setup information for files that are generated from the document for example a table of contents or an index BookComponent statements must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 These statements are used even if the document does not occur as p
8. lt Variable Embedded variable lt VariableName string gt Variable name see page 86 lt VariableLocked boolean gt Yes means the variable is part of a text inset that obtains its formatting information from the source document gt End of Variable statement lt XRef gt Embedded cross reference see page 87 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 133 MIF Reference lt XRefEnd gt lt ElementEnd gt See MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books gt End of ParaLine statement Usage A typical ParaLine statement consists of one or more String Char ATbl AFrame FNote Variable XRef and Marker statements that define the contents of the line of text These statements are interspersed with statements that indicate the scope of document components such as structure elements and conditional text The VariableLocked statement is used for text insets that retain formatting information from the source document If the lt variableLocked Yes gt statement appears ina specific variable that variable is part of a text inset that retains formatting information from the source document The variable is not affected by global formatting performed on the document If the lt VariableLocked No gt statement appears in a specific variable that variable is not part of a text inset or is part of a text inset that reads formatting information from the current document The
9. 280 Sample unencoded Framelmage facet ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference The sample FrameImage facet in this section describes the following illustration Note that no color map is included in the description because the graphic is in black and white Header Graphic data FrameImage amp SV amp NX amp 59a66a95 amp 00000040 amp 00000010 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000000 amp FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp 80000000FFFFFFFF amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFF00000001 amp FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF amp NX EndInset 281 Sample encoded Framelmage facet ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference The sample Framelmage facet in this section describes the same illustration Note that no color map is included in the description because the graphic is in black and white Unlike the previous file this graphic file is in encoded format Header Graphic data FrameImage SV amp NX amp 59A66A95 amp 00000040 amp 00000010 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000002 amp 00000000 amp 00000000 amp 8007FF amp 8000000000 amp 8003FF amp 8000000000 amp 8003FF amp 8000000000 amp 8003F
10. Amount to stretch or compress superscript where 100 means no change lt DSubscriptStretch percent gt Amount to stretch or compress subscript where 100 means no change A DSmallCapsStretch percent gt Amount to stretch or compress small caps where 100 means no change lt DRubiSize percentage gt The size of the rubi characters proportional to the size of the oyamoji characters see Rubi text on page 227 Reference properties lt DUpdateXRefsOnOpen boolean gt Yes specifies that cross references are automatically updated when the document is opened lt DUpdateTextInsetsOnOpen boolean gt Yes specifies that text insets are automatically updated when the document is opened Acrobat preferences lt DAcrobatBookmarksIncludeTagNames boolean gt Yes specifies that each Acrobat Bookmark title begins with the name of the paragraph tag Document specific menu bars lt DMenuBar string gt Name of the menu bar displayed by an FDK client when the docu ment is opened if an empty string is specified or if the menu bar is not found the standard FrameMaker menu bar is used lt DVoMenuBar string gt Name of the menu bar displayed by an FDK client when the docu ment is opened in View Only mode if an empty string is specified or if the menu bar is not found the standard view only menu bar is used Custom catalogs lt CustomFontFlag boolean gt Yes means
11. Control Multimedia with links You can insert links to interactively control embedded U3D Universal 3D FLV and SWF objects in the PDF output You can insert links to 3D and multimedia objects that control various aspects of these objects You can also create a multimedia links table for the 3d multimedia object of the type View Parts or Animation For example the multimedia links table of the type parts includes links that focus on different parts of the 3D multimedia object In MIF files you can specify support for multimedia links for an imported multimedia object using output but is not included in XML output In a MIF document you can turn on the banner text using the DBannerTexton tag Line Numbers Line numbers in FrameMaker files help you identify particular lines of content Line numbers are set at a document ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 254 MIF Reference level for a fm file and appear before each inserted line in a FrameMaker document In a MIF document you can enable line numbers using the DLinenumShow tag Dictionary Preferences Using the dictionary preferences you can specify Proximity or Hunspell dictionaries for Spelling and Hyphenation for various languages In a MIF file dictionary preferences are set in the Dictionary tag Changes between version 9 0 and 10 0 This section describes changes to MIF syntax between versions 9 0 and 10 0 of FrameMaker Text background color In FrameMaker 10 you can add a backgrou
12. Description of data Style of head cap or line end 0 arrow 1 butt 2 round 3 square Size of data in bytes 1 291 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER Default value 3 square Example 27 00000001 00 for arrow style Tail cap style 0x28 Specification by data type Byte Description of data Style of tail cap or line end 0 arrow 1 butt 2 round 3 square Size of data in bytes 1 Default value 3 square Example 28 00000001 00 for arrow style Smoothed 0x29 Specification by data type Byte Description of data Is the object smoothed 0 no 1 yes Size of data in bytes 1 Default value 0 no Example 29 00000001 00 for an unsmoothed object 29 00000001 01 for a smoothed object Font name 0x2A Specification by data type Byte string string string some strings not used depending on flag Description of data Flag indicating which names are used to identify the font byte 0 family name 1 family and PostScript name 2 family and platform name 3 all three names Family name string PostScript name string Platform name string Size of data in bytes Variable Default value default font name Example 2A 0000000A 00 00 08 43 6F 75 72 69 65 72 00 for a font specified by the family name Courier Font size 0x2B Specification by data type
13. The name of the SGML application associated with the document For information on registering SGML applications see the online manual FrameMaker Structure Application Developer s Guide lt DExclusions gt Lists exclusions inherited when document is included in a struc tured book see ElementDef statement on page 157 lt DInclusions gt Lists inclusions inherited when document is included in a struc tured book see ElementDef statement on page 157 lt DSeparateInclusions boolean gt Yes means structured FrameMaker lists inclusions separately in the element catalog lt DApplyFormatRules boolean gt Yes uses element format rules to reformat document on opening and to remove format overrides for input filters only not gener ated by FrameMaker lt DBookElementHierarchy If the document is in a book list of ancestors of the document s root element lt ElementContext Describes ancestor element of the document s root element lt PrevElement lt ETag tagstring gt Tag of sibling element preceding ancestor element lt Attributes gt lt Element lt ETag tagstring gt Tag of ancestor element lt Attributes gt lt NextElement lt ETag tagstring gt Tag of sibling element following ancestor element lt Attributes gt gt gt End of ElementContext statement gt End of DBookEle
14. 6 0 points long Arrow style 0x07 Specification by data type Byte byte byte byte metric metric Description of data Tip angle in degrees byte between 5 and 85 degrees Base angle in degrees byte between 10 and 175 degrees Arrow type byte O stick 1 hollow 2 filled Scale the arrow byte 0 no 1 yes Length in points metric Scale factor metric Size of data in bytes 12 Default value default arrow style 289 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Example 07 0000000C 10 5A 02 00 000C0000 00004000 for an arrow style with the following specifications tip angle 16 10 base angle 90 5A arrow type filled 02 arrow scaled no 00 length 12 points 000C0000 scale factor 0 25 00004000 Rotation angle 0x20 Specification by data type Metric Description of data Angle in degrees Size of data in bytes 4 Default value 0 Example 20 00000004 00500000 for the rotation angle of 80 Pen pattern 0x21 Specification by data type Byte Description of data Index to pen patterns see Values for Pen and Fill statements on page 112 Size of data in bytes 1 Default value 0 solid Example 21 00000001 00 for a solid pen pattern Fill pattern 0x22 Specification by data type Byte Description of data
15. EE CAD or Other EEE Illustration mg Packages e MIF ASCII text Ta i Database For an example of a database publishing application see Database publishing on page 241 Debugging MIF files When FrameMaker reads a MIF file it might detect errors such as unexpected character sequences In UNIX and Windows versions FrameMaker displays messages in a console window In the Windows version you must turn on Show File Translation Errors in the Preferences dialog box to display messages in a window If FrameMaker finds an error it continues to process the MIF file and reads as much of the document as possible When you are debugging MIF files you should examine the error messages for clues The MIF interpreter reports line numbers for most errors For a description of MIF error messages see MIF Messages In some cases the MIF interpreter reports an invalid opcode message for a statement If the statement seems correct to you check the statements above it A missing right angle bracket can cause the interpreter to parse a statement incorrectly If the MIF interpreter brings up an empty document when it reads your file it has stopped trying to interpret your file and opened an empty custom document instead Close the document and check your MIF file for errors Try adding a Verbose statement to your file to get more complete messages If your MIF statements are syntact
16. Index to pen patterns see Values for Pen and Fill statements on page 112 Size of data in bytes 1 Default value 7 white Example 22 00000001 07 for a white fill pattern Line width 0x23 Specification by data type Metric Description of data Width of line in points Size of data in bytes 4 290 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Default value 1 point Example 23 00000004 00008000 for the line width of 0 5 point Color 0x24 Specification by data type String Description of data Name of color tag Size of data in bytes Variable Default value Black Example 24 00000006 00 06 42 6C 61 63 6B 00 for the color Black Overprint 0x25 Specification by data type Byte Description of data Is the object overprinted 0 no 1 yes Size of data in bytes 1 Default value 0 no Example 25 00000001 00 if not overprinted 25 00000001 01 if overprinted Dashed solid line 0x26 Specification by data type Byte Description of data Is the line dashed 0 no 1 yes Size of data in bytes 1 Default value 0 no Examples 26 00000001 00 for a solid line 26 00000001 01 for a dashed line Note The style of the dashed line is specified by op code 0x06 Head cap style 0x27 Specification by data type Byte
17. gt end of TabStop lt PgfUseNextTag No gt Turn off Next 9 Tag feature lt PgfNextTag gt Next 1 Tag name none The Default Font properties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer Fn omr D mE E Q 5 B m Paragraph Tag Numbered v Fen tne Size 10 0 pt v Overline Angle Regular E Strikethrough Wegt pos Echange eer Variation Regular E Superscipt Color Black smalCaps Spread 0 0 v Pair Kem Stretch 100 0 rl tae Language US Egish asken Ctr Commands Update All Reset 4 e Font properties The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfFont lt FFamily Times gt Family lt FSize 12 0 pt gt Size lt FEncoding gt lt FAngle Regular gt Angle ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 15 MIF Reference In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt FWeight Regular gt Weight lt FLanguage gt Language lt FVar Regular gt Variation lt FColor Black gt Color lt FDW 0 0 pt gt Spread lt FStretch 100 gt Stretch lt FUnderlining NoUnderlining gt Underline lt FOverline No gt Overline lt FStrike No gt Strikethrough lt FChangeBar No gt Change Bar lt FPosition FNormal gt Superscript Subscript lt FCase FAsTyped gt Capitalization
18. A HyphenMinWord integer gt Minimum length of a hyphenated word A PgfLetterSpace boolean gt Spread characters to fill line A PgfMinWordSpace integer gt Minimum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font A PgfOptWordSpace integer gt Optimum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font A PgfMaxWordSpace integer gt Maximum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font MIF Reference 171 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt PgfLanguage keyword gt Language to use for spelling and hyphenation keyword can be one of NoLanguage USEnglish UKEnglish German SwissGerman French CanadianFrench Spanish Catalan Italian Portuguese Brazilian Danish Dutch Norwegian Nynorsk Finnish Swedish A PgfT ropSeparator string gt Name of reference frame from reference page to put above paragraph PgfT TopSepAtIndent boolean gt Yes if the position of the frame specified by the PgfTopS eparator statement is at the current left indent A PgfT TopSepOffset dimension gt Position at which to place the reference frame above the para graph A PgfBotSeparator string gt Name of reference frame from reference page to put below paragraph A PgfBotSepAtIndent boolean gt Yes if the position of the frame specified by the PgfBo
19. fill fill lt PolyLine lt GroupI lt PolyLine lt GroupI lt PolyLine lt GroupI lt PolyLine lt GroupI 0 46 0 46 1 46 0 D 1 gt lt Point lt Point lt Point lt Point D 1 gt 08 2 D 1 gt 58 2 D 1 gt 08 2 D 1 gt 58 2 D 1 gt D 1 gt 46 1 D 1 gt ED 1 gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt Fill 4 gt lt ShapeRect gt lt Rectangle lt ShapeRect gt lt Rectangle lt ShapeRect gt lt Rectangle lt ShapeRect 0 1 1 2 97 L lt GroupID 1 gt 47 Le lt GroupID 1 gt OT Mise lt GroupID 1 gt 247 1 DENS cS1L1 S 51 gt bis 92 gt 42 gt 92 gt 42 gt 10 47 72 OT Axes for the chart lt Fill 15 gt 0 60 0 Tick marks along the y axis 08 gt lt Point 0 60 2 35 gt lt Point ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference 2 35 gt Draw all the gray bars first since they have the same Set the fill for the first bar the others inherit the 60 1 83 gt Point 0 47 1 83 gt 60 1 33 gt Point 0 47 1 33 gt 60 0 83 gt Point 0 47 0 83 gt 60 0 33 gt Point 0 47 0 33 gt X axis labels lt TLAlignment Center gt lt String 1986 lt TLAlignment Center gt lt String 1987 lt TLAlignment Center gt lt String 1988 lt TLAlignment Center gt lt String 1989 Y axis labels lt
20. lt MathFullForm rparen i2i char x gt secx lt MathFullForm sec char x gt sechx lt MathFullForm sech char x gt x lt MathFullForm semicolon char x gt sgnx lt MathFullForm sgn char x gt sinx lt MathFullForm sin char x gt sinhx lt MathFullForm sinh char x gt tanx lt MathFullForm tan char x gt tanhx lt MathFullForm tanh char x gt Xx lt MathFullForm therefore char x gt xX lt MathFullForm ucomma char x gt x lt MathFullForm uequal char x gt x lt MathFullForm upbrace char x gt aS dx lt MathFullForm var char x gt Binary operators Binary operators have two operand expressions One of the binary operators sn scientific notation has two display formats The following table contains an example of each binary operator with char x as a sample operand Example MathFullForm statement 2 x lt MathFullForm acmut char x char x gt xex lt MathFullForm bullet char x char x gt 204 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Example MathFullForm statement x x lt MathFullForm bket char x char x gt i lt MathFullForm choice char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm cmut char x char x gt 5 XXX lt MathFullForm cross char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm div char x char x gt X x lt
21. lt Separation 13 gt Light Salmon lt Separation 14 gt Olive lt Separation 15 gt Salmon Version 4 and later versions of FrameMaker read separation statements and convert them to the equivalent color statements FrameMaker writes both color statements and separation statements for backward compatibility For the reserved default colors FrameMaker writes the equivalent separation value For custom colors FrameMaker writes the separation value 5 Cyan so that you can easily find and change custom colors If your application creates files that will be read by both older before version 4 and newer after version 4 FrameMaker product versions include both color and separation statements in the MIF files otherwise use only the color statements Math statements The following table lists the changes for math statements MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 DMathItalicFunctionName DMathFunctions DMathItalicOtherText DMathNumbers DMathStrings DMathVariables In addition the diacritical expression defines new diacritical marks see Using char and diacritical for diacritical marks on page 200 The diacritical expression is not backward compatible Character format statements The following table lists the changes in Font and PgfFont statements MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt FUnderline boolean gt lt FUnderlining FSingle gt lt FDoubleUnderline boolean gt lt FUnderlining FDouble gt lt FNumericUnderline
22. x lt MathFullForm atop char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm approx char x char x gt xAX lt MathFullForm cap char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm cdot char x char x gt x xX lt MathFullForm comma char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm cong char x char x gt xUX lt MathFullForm cup char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm equal char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm equiv char x char x gt x gt x lt MathFullForm geq char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm gg char x char x gt x gt x lt MathFullForm greaterthan char x char x gt rex lt MathFullForm in char x char x gt xOx lt MathFullForm jotdot char x char x gt xex lt MathFullForm leftarrow char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm Leftarrow char x char x gt x lt x lt MathFullForm leq char x char x gt x lt x lt MathFullForm lessthan char x char x gt x lt MathFullForm list char x char x gt X X lt MathFullForm 11 char x char x gt xox lt MathFullForm lrarrow char x char x gt xx lt MathFullForm LRarrow char x char x gt x3x lt MathFullForm ni char x char x gt xzx lt MathFullForm notequal char x char x gt 206 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Example MathFullForm s
23. 170 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER Pagination properties lt PgfPlacement keyword gt Vertical placement of paragraph in text column keyword can be one of Anywhere ColumnTop PageTop LPageTop RPageTop lt PgfPlacementStyle keyword gt Placement of side heads run in heads and paragraphs that straddle text columns keyword can be one of Normal RunIn SideheadTop SideheadFirstBaseline SideheadLastBaseline Straddle StraddleNormalonly A PgfRunInDefaultPunct string gt Default punctuation for run in heads A PgfWithPrev boolean gt Yes keeps paragraph with previous paragraph A PgfWithNext boolean gt Yes keeps paragraph with next paragraph lt PgfBlockSize integer gt Widow orphan lines Numbering properties lt PgfAutoNum boolean gt Yes turns on autonumbering A PgfNumFormat string gt Autonumber formatting string A PgfNumberFont tagstring gt Tag from Character Catalog lt PgfNumAtEnd boolean gt Yes places number at end of line instead of beginning Advanced properties A PgfHyphenate boolean gt Yes turns on automatic hyphenation A HyphenMaxLines integer gt Maximum number of consecutive lines that can end ina hyphen A HyphenMinPrefix integer gt Minimum number of letters that must precede hyphen A HyphenMinSuffix integer gt Minimum number of letters that must follow a hyphen
24. 23 to represent the character Zero value hex codes 00 are illegal For more information see PDF Document Info on page 88 104 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt Value string gt A string of up to 255 ASCII characters that represents the value of a Document Info field because a single MIF string contains no more than 255 ASCII characters you can use more than one Value state ment for a given Key A Value can include Unicode characters represent Unicode charac ters via amp x HHHH where amp x opens the character code the character closes the character code and HHHH are as many hexadecimal values as are required to represent the character For more information see PDF Document Info on page 88 gt End of PDFDocInfo statement lt DocFilelnfo gt Specifies the same information that appears in lt PDFDocInfo gt exceptit expresses these values as encoded data You should not try to edit this data DocFilelnfo also represents the values of the default fields for Creator Creation Date andMetaData Date For more information see Document File Info on page 88 lt encoded gt XMP information as encoded data which is generated by FrameMaker This information corresponds to the values set in the File Info dialog box For any document there can be an arbitrary number of XMP statements gt End of DocFilelnfo statement Document specific menu bars
25. ArrowStyle statement on page 115 lt RunaroundGap dimension gt Space between the object and the text flowing around the object must be a value between 0 0 and 432 0 points lt Angle integer gt Angle of rotation in degrees 0 90 180 270 lt OffsetTop dimension gt Offset from top lt OffsetLeft dimension gt Offset from left lt SizeWidth dimension gt Width of text lt SizeHeight dimension gt Height of text lt AFrameDir keyword gt Controls the direction of the anchored frame keyword can be one of LTR Set the direction for the anchored frame to left to right RTL Set the direction for the anchored frame to right to left INHERITLTR Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to left to right then INHERITLTR is assigned to AFrameDir INHERITRTL Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to right to left then INHERITRTL is assigned to AFrameDir lt TFrameNumColumns inte ger gt Number of columns in the text frame 1 10 MIF Reference ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 72 MIF Reference lt TFrameColumnGap inte Space between columns in the text frame 0 50 ger gt lt TFrameShRoom boolean gt Yes gives room for side heads lt TFrameShWidth Side head width dimension gt lt TFrameShGap dimension gt Gap between side head and body text areas lt TFrameAutoconnect Yes adds text frames as nee
26. Equation Variables lt a gt lt at gt Position b Start of Paragraph Commands Update All Reset App The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfAutoNum Yes gt Turn on Autonumber lt PgfNumFormat lt n gt t gt Autonumber Format a number followed by a period and a tab lt PgfNumberFont gt Character Format Default 1 Format lt PgfNumAtEnd No gt Position Start of Paragraph MIF Reference ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 17 MIF Reference The Advanced properties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer Paragraph Designer AERO S ni Paragraph Tag Numbered gt Automatic Hyphenation Max Adjacent 2 Shortest Prefix 5 Shortest Word 7 Shortest Suffix 5 Hyphenate Word Spacing of Standard Space Minimum 75 0 Optimum 100 0 Maximum 125 0 Standard Space 0 28 em _ Allow Automatic Letter Spacing Fane Above Pot home Pf Box Nane Boon Pat None Commands z Beset App Advanced properties The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfHyphenate Yes gt Automatic Hyphenation on lt HyphenMaxLines 2 gt Max Adjacent lt HyphenMinWord 5 gt Shortest Word lt HyphenMinPrefix 3 gt Shortest Prefix lt HyphenMinSuffix 3 gt Shortest Suffix lt PgfMin
27. Matrices MIF Reference The matrix expression defines a matrix The first operand is the number of rows in the matrix the second operand is the number of columns Subsequent operands are expressions representing the elements of the matrix The elements are listed from left to right and from top to bottom The matrix expression has an alternate display format The following table shows examples of matrix Example MathFullForm statement lt MathFullForm matrix 1 1 char x gt x x lt MathFullForm matrix i1i 1 1 char x gt r lt MathFullForm 123 matrix 2 3 num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 num 4 4 num 456 5 5 num 6 6 gt r lt MathFullForm 12 matrix 3 2 num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 num 4 4 num 34 5 5 num 6 6 gt 15 6 Custom operators The following expressions allow you to use custom operators that have been defined on a math reference page Expression Definition newinfix x y Inserts custom infix operator newprefix x Inserts custom prefix operator newpost fix x Inserts custom postfix operator newfunction x Inserts custom function operator newlarge x y z Inserts custom large element newdelimiter x Inserts custom delimiter newlimit x y Inserts custom limit function newvlist x y z Inserts custom vertical list The expressions that insert new custom operators must
28. Metric Description of data Point size of font MIF Reference 292 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Size of data in bytes 4 Default value default font size Example 2B 00000004 000C0000 for a 12 point font Font style 0x2C Specification by data type Unsigned long Description of data Described by 14 bits where bit 0 is the least significant bit Bit 0 bold equivalent to setting the font weight to bold Bit 1 italic equivalent to setting the font angle to italic Bits 2 4 underline style 0 no underline 1 single 2 double 3 numeric bit 4 is not currently used Bit 5 overline Bit 6 strikethrough Bit 7 superscript Bit 8 subscript Bit 9 outline Bit 10 shadow Bit 11 pair kern Bits 12 13 case 0 as is 1 small caps 2 lower case 3 upper case Size of data in bytes 4 Default value default font style Example 2C 00000004 00000043 for a font with bold italic and strikethrough styles Font color 0x2D Specification by data type String Description of data Name of color tag Size of data in bytes Variable Default value Black Example 03 0000001B 00 OB 53 61 67 65 20 47 72 65 65 6E 00 for a font in the color Sage Green Font weight 0x2E Specification by data type String Descri
29. S35 EE Qn wD YW ded od O a pov oma E MA V O Hd B GG 0 2900 HH GH BG H H Q b MO v M OUUU BAH DBD Ag HF E Q S U fA HH OAH HTD aT OHHH G G 6 NMnUAM BoA NM Tt A A V U O U U 0 FOHO U HN GF Gea 00000 A A A U VA n 0 U GGU 0 vop 4 0 0 HH YH HY MT A UGH 220 VAN GH WD EH E E H YH GB WB 6006 of O 3 00 ON BHerA YD 00 JIE O OMN M AGA MH Zz a0O0AZAaNnNn nmo0omam 40 manna nnunua da lt BegParentheses Lu E de LET ME SE EEE EGET ENES EE lt EndParentheses Ly Lo sr od GE BA EE ENTER Ee Me OME EEE EE gt end of ExtraSpaceTable In the preceding example a extra space is not allowed between a character in the EndParentheses class anda character in the CenteredPunct class because the value 1 Extra space is not allowed is in the fifth position which is the column position for the CenteredPunct class of characters Rubi text Rubi text is a Japanese system for representing the pronunciation of words as a string of phonetic characters hiragana directly above the word in question oyamoji A MIF file includes document level statements that describe the settings made in the Rubi Properties dialog box as well as MIF statements for a rubi composite A rubi composite includes both oyamoji text and rubi text If the document is structured the rubi composite contains an object tagged RubiGroup the oyamoji text an element tagged Rubi and the rubi text Document statement In addition to document preferences see Docume
30. Text Roman 8 TANS Text ANSI TASC Text ASCII TSJS Shift JIS TBG5 Big5 TGB GB 2312 TKOR Korean TUT8 UTF 8 TU1B UTF 16BE TULL UTF 16LE TU3B UTF 32BE TU3L UTF 32LE Note that this is not a comprehensive list of codes Codes may be added to this list by Adobe or by developers at your site platformisa code specifying the platform on which the filter was run The code is a string of four characters The following table lists some of the possible codes Code Description WINT Windows NT WIN3 Windows 3 1 WIN4 Windows 95 UNIX Generic X 11 Sun HP filter versisa string of four characters identifying the version of the filter on that platform For example version 1 0 of a filter is represented by the string 1 0 filter_name is a text string less than 31 characters long that describes the filter TiApiClient statement The TiApiClient statement defines a text inset created and maintained by an FDK client application Syntax lt TiApiClient i lt TiClientName string gt Specifies the name used to register the FDK client application with FrameMaker et lt TiClientSource string gt Specifies the location of the source file for the text inset f lt TiClientType string gt Specifies the type of the source file lt TiClientData string gt Specifies additional
31. The MIF default for computing a cell s width is Tb1Columnwidtha However if any cells in the column have lt CellAffectsColumnWidthA Yess then only those cells affect the computed column width Usage of MIF statements to calculate the width of a column is described in the following sections Determining table width When FrameMaker writes MIF files it uses Tb1ColumnWidth in the Tb1 statement to specify column width However filters that generate MIF files can use other statements to determine the table width This method Uses these statements To do this Fixed width Tb1ColumnWidth Give a fixed value for column s width see page 76 Shrink wrap TblColumnWidthA Fit a column within minimum and maximum values see page 76 Restricted TblColumnWidtha and Cellaf Use particular cells to determine column width see page 80 fectsColumnWidtha Proportional Tb1ColumnWidthP Create a temporary value for a column width when filtering propor tional width columns from another application the MIF interpreter converts the value to a fixed width see page 76 and Calculating propor tional width columns next Equalized EqualizeWidths and Apply the width of the widest column to specified columns in the same TbiColumnNum table see page 78 The table example in Creating an entire table on page 238 shows several ways to determine column width Calculating proportional width columns MIF uses this formula to
32. combact COFFEE SYSTEMS Darrell Dexter GREEN COFFEE IMPORTERS Sales Representative SINCE 1828 Primo Coffee Distributors 800 555 1212 Offerings as of August 12 1992 The data from the database is published as a FrameMaker table The database procedure makes one pass through the records in the database and writes the contents of each record in a row of the table The procedure then creates a TextFlow statement that contains the text that appears above the table and creates an ATb1 statement to refer to the table instance You can set up a report generator like the previous example by following these general steps 1 Create the template for the final report in FrameMaker Design the master pages and body pages for the document and create paragraph and character formats You can include graphics such as a company logo on the master page 2 Create a table format for the report Specify the table position column format shading and title format Store the format in the Table Catalog 3 When the document has the appearance you want save it as a MIF file 4 Edit the MIF file to create a MIF template that you can include in your generated MIF file see Including template files on page 44 The MIF template used for this example is in the sample file coffee mif 5 Use your database to create any custom dialog boxes or report generating procedures 6 Create a database query or procedure
33. keyword can be one of Continue default Restart ReadFromFile Paragraph numbering lt PgfNumbering keyword gt Paragraph numbering keyword can be one of Continue default Restart ReadFromFile Footnote numbering lt BFNoteStartNum integer gt Starting number for footnote numbering lt BFNoteNumStyle keyword gt Style of footnote numbering keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt BFNoteLabels string gt When BFNoteNumStyle is set to Custom this is the string to use 152 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt BFNoteComputeMethod keyword gt Footnote numbering keyword can be one of Cont inue continue numbering from previous component in book Restart restart numbering typically to restart per flow according to BFNoteRestart setting Per Page restart footnote numbering for each page overrides BFNoteRestart setting ReadFromFile use numbering set for the component s document lt BFNoteRestart keyword gt When to restart numbering if BFNoteComput eMethod is set to Restart keyword can be one of PerFlow restart footnote numbering for each flow in the document Per Page restart footnote numbering for each page Table footnote numbering lt BTblFNoteNumStyle keywords Style of table fo
34. lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt String This appears on a body page within a text flow gt lt String tagged A gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 35 MIF Reference Why one body page The method you use to create body pages is different from the method that FrameMaker uses when it writes a MIF file When FrameMaker writes a file it knows where each page break occurs in the file so it creates a series of Page statements that each contain the text and graphics located on that page When you are importing a document you do not know where page breaks will fall so you cannot break the document into a series of Page statements Instead you simply create one text flow for the entire document and link it to a single empty body page When the MIF inter preter reads the file it creates as many pages as the document requires and gives each page the background specified by the master page Creating a double sided custom layout If you import a two sided document you might need to specify different page layouts for right and left pages For example a document might have a wider inside margin to allow extra room for binding You can do this in a MIF file by creating and linking a second master page and a second body page As with a single sided layout all the document s text is in one text flow When the MIF interpreter reads the file it adds alternate left and right body pages to th
35. remove the mif file suffix and replace it with a different suffix or no suffix If you use FrameMaker to edit a MIF file you must prevent it from interpreting MIF statements when you open the file by holding down a modifier key and clicking Open in the Open dialog box In this version Use this modifier key UNIX Shift Windows Control or Shift Save the edited MIF file as a text file by using the Save As command and choosing Text Only from the Format pop up menu Give the saved file the suffix mif When you save a document as Text Only FrameMaker asks you where to place carriage returns For a MIF file choose the Only between Paragraphs option ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 10 MIF Reference In UNIX versions FrameMaker saves a document in text format in the ISO Latin 1 character encoding You can change the character encoding to ASCII by changing the value of an X resource See the description of character encoding in the online manual Customizing FrameMaker In the Windows version press Esc F t c to toggle between FrameMaker s character encoding and ANSI for Windows Importing MIF files You can use the File menu s Import gt File command to import MIF files into an existing document but you must make sure that the imported statements are valid at the location where you are importing them A MIF file can describe both text and graphics make sure that you have selected either a place in the text flow if you are importing text or
36. 39 points 0027 width 124 points 007C height 140 points 008C start angle 0 arc angle length 90 Framelmage graphic imported wi thin this graphic 0x86 Specification by data type Rectangle byte bitmap Description of data Position and size of the bounding rectangle in points rectangle Is the object flipped left right byte 0 no 1 yes Framelmage data bitmap Size of data in bytes Variable MIF Reference 297 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER Example 86 00000035 00F 20000 00740000 00080000 00080000 00 59A66A95 00000008 00000008 00000001 00000000 00000002 00000000 00000000 80 OE FF 20 for an imported bitmap graphic of a black square with the following specifications x position 242 points y position 116 points width 8 points height 8 points flipped left right no Note The bitmap is scaled to the size of the bounding rectangle Beginning of text line 0x87 Specification by data type Point byte Description of data Baseline origin of the text line in points point Text line alignment byte O left 1 center 2 right Size of data in bytes 9 Example 87 00000009 017A0000 002D0000 00 for a text line with the following specifications x position 378 points 017A y position 45 points 002D alignment left Note The specification of the start of a tex
37. ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt DPDFOpenFit string gt A string to specify how to fit the PDF document into the Acrobat application window when it opens can be one of Default Page Width Height orNone Anyother string value resolves to Default Use None in conjunction with DPDFOpenZoom lt DPD FOpenPage string gt A string for the page number for the page at which you want the PDF file to open lt DPD FOpenZoom number gt A number to specify the zoom percentage when opening the PDF document To use this setting DPDFOpenPage must either be absent or set to None otherwise FrameMaker ignores this setting lt DPD FPageHeight number gt A number for the page width to use this setting DPDFPageSiz eSet must be set to Yes lt DPD FPageSizeSet boolean gt A statement to indicate whether to use the values in DPDFPage Width and DPDFPageHeight when distilling the document When set to No FrameMaker ignores the width and height settings lt DPD FPageWidth number gt A number for the page height to use this setting DPDFPage SizeSet must be set to Yes lt DPD FRegMarks string gt A string specifying which registration marks to use Can be one of None Western or Tombo any other string resolves to None lt DPD FSaveSeparate Yes No gt A setting that specifies whether to save a book as one PDF file or as a collection of separate PDF f
38. AFrames statement Using the technique described in the previous section you would insert the code for the tables in the Tbls mif file the graphics in the AFrames mif file and the main text flow in the main text file You use an include statement to read in the AFrames mif file Note Remember to assign unique ID numbers in the Tb11D statement for each table and the ID statement for each frame 248 Chapter 9 MIF Messages When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it might detect errors such as unexpected character sequences In UNIX versions the MIF interpreter displays messages in a console window In the Windows versions you must turn on Show File Translation Errors in the Preferences dialog box to display messages in a window a console window in the Windows version If the MIF interpreter finds an error it continues to process the MIF file and reads as much of the document as possible General form for MIF messages The general form of all MIF messages is MIF Line LineNum Message The LineNum may be approximate because it represents the absolute line number in the file after all macros in the file have been expanded In addition if you open the MIF file in Adobe FrameMaker lines are wrapped and the line numbers may change The Message portion consists of one of the messages in the following table Italicized words characters for example n indicate variable words or values in a message List of MIF messages Th
39. Autonumber formatting string lt PgfNumberFont tagstring gt Tag from Character Catalog lt PgfNumAtEnd boolean gt Yes places number at end of line instead of beginning Advanced properties lt PgfHyphenate boolean gt Yes turns on automatic hyphenation lt HyphenMaxLines integer gt Maximum number of consecutive lines that can end in a hyphen lt HyphenMinPrefix integer gt Minimum number of letters that must precede hyphen lt HyphenMinSuffix integer gt Minimum number of letters that must follow a hyphen lt HyphenMinWord integer gt Minimum length of a hyphenated word lt PgfLetterSpace boolean gt Spread characters to fill line lt PgfMinWordSpace integer gt Minimum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font lt PgfOptWordSpace integer gt Optimum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font lt PgfMaxWordSpace integer gt Maximum word spacing as a percentage of a standard space in the paragraph s default font ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 64 MIF Reference lt PgfLanguage keyword gt Language to use for spelling and hyphenation Note that FrameMaker writes this statement so MIF files can be opened in older versions of FrameMaker However the language for a paragraph format or char acter format is now properly specified in the Pgf Font and Font statements see page 66 keyword can be one of NoLanguage
40. Body of page SEND PACKET vDoc lt TextFlow lt TFTag A gt lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PofTag Heading gt lt ParaLine lt TextRectID 8 gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt String GREEN COFFEE PRICE LIST gt lt AFrame 1 gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PofTag Prepared gt lt ParaLine lt String To order contact gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt String 1 gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag Body2 gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Sales Representative gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag Body2 gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Primo Coffee Distributors gt gt gt CR Joss ae SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PofTag Body2 gt lt ParaLine CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt String String Num 2 gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ATbl 2 gt gt gt gt CR Send the anchor for the table CLOSE DOCUMENT vDoc ALERT Your MIF file is awaiting your attention Creating several tables The previous example illustrates how to use a database to create one table instance Both the Tbls and the Text Flow statements are written to a single text file This approach however is limited to this simple case If the document contains several tables it may be more convenient to use the database to write the Tb1s statement to a separa
41. Changes between version 11 0and 12 0 vavenenuanenenenenneneneneneneenenenenenuenene 253 Changes between version 9 0 and 10 0 arauenunnenenenenennenenenenennenenenenennenene 254 MIF syntax changes in FrameMaker 8 oo eee eee eee nent entre ene ean eneene 254 Changes between version 6 0 and 7 0 avananenunnenenenenennenenenennenenenenenennenene 255 Changes between version 5 5 and 6 0 aranenunnenenenenennenenenennnnenenenenennenene 256 Changes between version 5 and 5 5 avananenuanenenenenennenenenenennenenenenennnnene 257 Changes between versions4and5 sanananenunnenenenenennenenenenennenenenenenennene 259 Changes between versions 3and4 sananunenunnenenenenennenenenenennenenenenenennene 262 Chapter 11 Facet Formats for Graphics Facets for imported graphics ravennnnnnanenenennnnenenenennenenenenenenneneneneneen Basic facet format ccs ie cicei seh cites oe cea emne eden ce ace me keep sne Ene Vaasa neues Graphic insets UNIX versions rnuanenenenennenenenenenenenenenennenenenenenennene General rules for reading and writing facets Chapter 12 EPSI Facet Format Specification oftan EPSI facet ic acesfie a ave OREA ERNES aca ee ceaa oe aueea GE Example of an EPSIfacet Siva eiee eanais Gel kirkens Beha eee Vea ead eee bate nad Chapter 13 Framelmage Facet Format Specification of aFramelmage facet avanananunnenenenennenenenenennnnenenenenenennene Specification of Framelmage data vanenanenunnenenenenennenene
42. Document Info contents as a series of Value statements each one 255 ASCII characters long or less e It uses special codes to indicate Unicode characters that are outside the standard ASCII range Mif represents gt Unicode characters as amp xHHHH where amp x opens the character code the character closes the character code and HHHH are as many hexadecimal values as are required to represent the character Note that each Unicode representation of a character uses up to seven ASCII characters For example a string of 255 Unicode characters could require as many as 1785 ASCII characters For example The following MIF statements show three possible Document Info fields lt PDFDocInfo lt Key Author gt lt Value Thomas Aquinas gt lt Key Title gt lt Value That the Soul Never Thinks Without an Image gt lt Key Subject gt lt Value Modern translation of the views of T A concerning cognition It is gt lt Value impossible for our intellect in its present state of being joined t gt lt Value o a body capable of receiving impressions actually to understand gt gt end of PDFDocInfo ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 89 MIF Reference Syntax lt Document Document properties lt DNextUnique ID gt Refers to the next object witha lt Unique ID gt statement gener ated by FrameMaker and should not be used by filters Window properties lt DViewRect X Y W H gt Position and size of doc
43. FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Differences between monochrome and color There are two types of Framelmage files monochrome and pseudocolor Monochrome images monochrome graphic has the following header properties Property Value ras depth 1 ras_maptype RMT_NONE ras_maplength 0 An example of the header for a monochrome graphic is shown below amp 59a66a95 amp 00000040 amp 00000040 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000000 A monochrome graphic has no color map Each data byte represents eight pixels and the most significant bit is the leftmost pixel Graphic data bytes are hex values that represent bit patterns of black and white For example hex 55 represents binary 01010101 which produces a gray shade hex FF represents binary 11111111 which produces black and hex 00 represents binary 00000000 which produces white Pseudocolor and gray images A pseudocolor or gray graphic has the following header properties Property Value ras_depth 8 ras_maptype RMT_EQUAL RGB or RMT_RAW ras_maplength 300 An example of the header for a color graphic is shown below amp 59a66a95 amp 00000040 amp 00000040 amp 00000008 amp 00000000 amp 00000001 amp 00000002 amp 00000300 Each graphic data byte represents one pixel of a particular color The value of a data byte is an index to a color stored in the color map See Color map on page 279
44. HotspotCmdStr String gt When you click on the hotspot you can execute a command When executed the command takes the user to a URL or a named destination Example syntax message URL http www adobe com Or gotolink linkname lt HotspotTitle string gt The tooltip text string lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of object before rotation in page or graphic frame coordinates ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt FrameType keyword gt Whether graphic frame is anchored and if anchored the position of the anchored frame keyword can be one of Below Top Bottom Inline Left Right Inside Outside Near Far RunIntoParagraph NotAnchored lt AnchorDirection keyword gt Controls the direction of the anchored frame keyword can be one of LTR Set the direction for the anchored frame to left to right RTL Set the direction for the anchored frame to right to left INHERITLTR Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to left to right then INHERITLTR is assigned to AnchorDirection INHERITRTL Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to right to left then INHERITRTL is assigned to AnchorDirection lt Tag tagstring gt Name of graphic frame lt Float boolean gt Yes floats graphic frame to avoid large white space that results when anchored frame and the line containing it are moved to the next page lt NSOffset dimension gt
45. MAGIC 0x59a66a95 Sun supported ras type s define RT STANDARD 1 Raw image in 68000 byte order define RT BYTE ENCODED 2 Run length compression of bytes Sun registered ras maptype s define RMT RAW 2 Sun supported ras maptype s define RMT NONE 0 ras maplength is expected to be 0 define RMT EQUAL RGB 1 red ras maplength 3 green blue For more information see the usr include rasterfile h header file and the Sun man page on rasterfile ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 279 MIF Reference Color map The optional color map defines colors used for the imported graphic It consists of 256 bytes of red followed by 256 bytes of green followed by 256 bytes of blue Each byte contains an intensity value for a color FF is the maximum intensity and 00 is the minimum none Color 05 bright red FF red 00 green 00 blue lt array of 256 red levels 00 0C A2 0F C5 F6 D7 256 bytes Red level FF array of 256 green levels OA A1 B3 03 OC E6 F7 256 bytes Green level 00 array of 256 blue levels FF EE AA 11 DD 66 77 256 bytes Blue level 00 The color map defines 256 colors Each color contains a red green and blue level of intensity The values of the first red byte first green byte and first blue byte define the first color in the map the values of the second red green and blue bytes define the second color a
46. MIF file Creating and applying paragraph formats In a FrameMaker document paragraphs have formatting properties that specify the appearance of the paragraph s text A paragraph format includes the font family and size indents tab stops the space between lines in a paragraph the space before and after a paragraph and the direction of the text The text direction can be either left to right for languages like English and German or right to left for languages like Arabic and Hebrew In a FrameMaker document the end of a paragraph is denoted by a single carriage return You control the amount of space above and below the paragraph by modifying the paragraphs format not by adding extra carriage returns In a FrameMaker document you store paragraph formats in a Paragraph Catalog and assign a tag name to the format You can then apply the same format to many paragraphs by assigning the format tag to the paragraphs You can also format a paragraph individually without storing the format in the Paragraph Catalog Or you can assign a format from the Paragraph Catalog and then override some of the properties within a particular paragraph Formats that are not stored in the Paragraph Catalog are called local formats Creating a paragraph In a MIF file paragraphs are defined by a Para statement A Para statement contains one or more ParaLine state ments that contain the lines in a paragraph the actual text of the line is enclosed in one or more St
47. Para end of CellContent end of Cell end of Row end of TblH Table body Begin row First cell in row gt lt TblBody lt Row lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt lt ParaLine lt String Brazil Santos gt HH HGH HE end of Para end of CellContent end of Cell Second cell in row gt lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt lt ParaLine lt String 455 00 gt HH H OH end of Para end of CellContent end of Cell end of Row end of TblBody gt end of Tbl gt end of Tbls Vv HHH HH H A table cell is a text column that contains an untagged text flow not connected to any other flows You can put any kind of text or graphics in a table cell The cell automatically grows vertically to accommodate the inserted text or graphic however the width of the column remains fixed Adding a table anchor To indicate the position of a table in the text flow you must add an ATb1 statement The ATb1 statement refers to the unique ID specified by the Tb11D statement in the table instance For example to insert the table defined in the previous example you would add the following statements to the minimal MIF file lt Para lt ParaLine lt String Coffee prices for January gt lt ATbl 1 gt Matches table ID in Tbl statement gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 27 MIF Reference This example is in the sample file table mif If you o
48. Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Portions of Adobe Acrobat include technology used under license from Autonomy and are copyrighted Adobe Systems Incorporated 345 Park Avenue San Jose California 95110 USA Notice to U S government end users The software and documentation are Commercial Items as that term is defined at 48 C F R 82 101 consisting of Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 as applicable Consistent with 48 C F R 12 212 or 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 as applicable the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U S Government end users a only as Commercial items and b with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States For U S Government End Users Adobe agrees to comply with all applicable equal opportunity laws including if appropriate the provisions of Executive Order 11246 as amended Section 402 of the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Assistance Act of 1974 38 USC 4212 and Section 503 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 as amended and the regulations at 41 CFR Parts 60 1 through 60 60 60 250 and 60 741 The affirmative action
49. Regardless of the color model used to define a new color colors are stored in a MIF file in CMYK You can define a color as a tint of an existing color Tints are colors that are mixed with white A tint is expressed by the percentage of the base color that is printed or displayed A tint of 100 is equivalent to the pure base color and a tint of 0 is equivalent to no color at all You can specify overprinting for a color However if overprinting is set for a graphic object the object s setting takes precedence When a graphic object has no overprint statement the overprint setting for the color is assumed You can set up color views to specify which colors are visible in a document The color views for a document are specified in the views statement The current view for the document is identified in a Dcurrent View statement The color of a FrameMaker document object is expressed in a property statement for that object In this manual the syntax description of a FrameMaker document object that can have a color property includes the appropriate color property substatement ColorCatalog statement The ColorCatalog statement defines the contents of the Color Catalog A document can have only one Color Catalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 FrameMaker automatically generates new colors while specific operations are performed For example FrameMaker generates new colors
50. String Change gt gt gt gt For shrink wrap lt CellAffectsColumnWidthA Yes gt A gt end of Cell gt end of Row gt end of TblH lt TblBody The body lt Row The first body row lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine lt String Ace Aluminum gt gt gt gt gt end of Cell lt Cell lt CellContent lt PgfTag CellBody lt ParaLine lt String gt lt Cell lt CellContent lt PgfTag CellBody lt ParaLine lt String gt gt lt Row lt Cell lt CellContent lt ParaLine lt String lt Cell lt CellContent A A ParaLine lt String lt Cell lt CellContent A lt ParaLine lt String gt gt lt Row lt Cell lt CellContent lt ParaLine lt String lt Cell lt CellContent lt PgfTag CellBody PgfTag CellBody PgfTag CellBody lt PgfTag CellBody lt Para gt 24 00 gt gt gt gt end lt Para a 3 50 gt gt gt gt end end The lt Para gt Forces lookup of Cell Forces lookup of Cell of Row second body row Forces lookup Streck Metals gt gt gt gt end lt Para 27 25 gt gt gt gt end lt Para gt 42 75 gt gt gt gt end end The lt Para a of Cell Forces lookup of Cell Forces lookup of Cell of Row third body row Forces lookup Linbrech Al
51. TLAlignment Right gt lt String 25 lt TLAlignment Right gt lt String 50 lt TLAlignment Right gt lt String 75 lt TLAlignment Right gt lt String 100 pattern 05131 1425 5 0 13 0 88 gt 0 13 0 63 gt 0 13 0 38 gt 234 fill fill lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt Fill 1 gt lt ShapeRect gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt ShapeRect gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt ShapeRect gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt ShapeRect easier document lt Group lt ID 1 gt pr Pie chart example BLOG 1 60 2 210 2 60 La 1 T 0 97 72 22 85 137 13 sd 13 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Now draw all the black bars since they have the same Set the fill for the first bar the others inherit the pattern 38 gt 63 gt 13 gt 50 gt Define the group for all the objects to make the chart to manipulate after it s imported into a FrameMaker When the MIF in this sample is imported into a page or graphic frame in a document FrameMaker centers the chart in the page or graphic frame This example is in the file piechart mif lt MIFFile 2015 gt lt Units Upt gt lt Pen 0 gt Generated by xyzgrapher 3 5 identifies this as a MIF file All dimensions are in points Set the current pen pattern width and fill pattern 235 lt
52. TblH Table heading rows omit if no table headings lt Row gt See Row statement next lt Row gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Tb1H statement lt TblBody Table body rows lt Row gt See Row statement next lt Row gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Tb1Body statement lt TblF Table footing rows omit if no table footing lt Row gt See Row statement next lt Row gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Tb1F statement gt End of Tb1 statement Usage The table column statements specify the actual width of the table instance columns They override the column widths specified in the Tb1Format statement Row statement A Row statement contains a list of cells It also includes row properties as needed The statement must appear in a Tb1 statement Syntax lt Row lt Conditional gt Specifies conditional row row is unconditional if the statement is omitted lt RowWithNext boolean gt Keep with next body row lt RowWithPrev boolean gt Keep with previous body row lt RowMinHeight dimension gt Minimum row height lt RowMaxHeight dimension gt Maximum row height ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 80 MIF Reference lt RowHeight dimension gt Row height lt RowPlacement keyword gt Anywhere ColumnTop LPageTop RPageTop PageTop Row placement keyword can be one of lt Cell gt ment next Each Row
53. The 16 most significant bits of a metric value represent the digits before the decimal the 16 least significant bits represent the digits after the decimal Therefore 1 point is expressed as hexadecimal 0x10000 or decimal 65536 The following table shows how to convert met ric values into equivalent measurement units To get this unit Divide the metric value by this number point 65536 inch 4718592 millimeter 185771 centimeter 1857713 pica 786432 didot 6997 cicero 839724 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 7 MIF Reference Character set in strings MIF string data uses the FrameMaker character set see the Quick Reference for your FrameMaker product MIF strings must begin with a left quotation mark ASCII character code 0x60 and end with a straight quotation mark ASCII character code 0x27 Within a string you can include any character in the FrameMaker character set However because a MIF file can contain only standard ASCII characters and because of MIF parsing requirements you must represent certain characters with backslash sequences Character Representation Tab t gt gt q Q nonstandard ASCII xnn Note The xnn character is supported only for legacy MIF files All FrameMaker characters with values above the standard ASCII range greater than x7 are represented in a string by using xnn notation where nn represents the hexadecimal code for the
54. The MIF file contains a graphic inset but the MIF interpreter can t store the graphic inset in the document There might be an error inthe MIF syntax or there might not be enough temporary disk space available In UNIX versions try to increase the space available in your home directory or the usr tmp directory and try again In the Windows versions try quitting other appli cations and closing other open windows then start FrameMaker again Char out of range character_value A character in a Char statement or a character expressed using x ina string is out of range Condition settings must not change between lt XRef gt and lt XRefEnd gt You cannot change a condition tag setting in the middle of a cross reference Make sure the entire cross reference is contained in one condition setting DashedPattern statement has no DashedSegment state ments ADashedPattern statement gives DashedStylea value of Dashed but has no DashedSegment statements to define the dashed pattern Empty group ID N The group ID specified in a Group statement has no corre sponding defined objects with a matching group ID Expected comma identifier left parenthesis right paren thesis right quote The MIF file contains a syntax error Following lt TabStop gt statements will determine actual number of tabs The PgfNumTabs statement is present in MIF for use by other programs that read MIF files it is not used by the M
55. a tip angle of 16 and a base angle of 120 amp 070000000C1078 The arrow style is defined so that the arrow is filled and is scaled as it gets wider The length of the arrow is 12 points If the line is widened the arrow head also is widened by a corresponding factor of 0 25 0201000C00000004000 e The style of the head cap of the polyline is arrow amp 270000000100 e The polyline consists of two points amp 820000001400000002 The positions of the two points are 114 points 85 points and 51 points 85 points 00720000005500000033000000550000 The rest of the styles are inherited from previous objects Specification of the arc The arc in this example has the following specifications e The fill pattern of the arc is none OF amp 22000000010F The style of the head cap of the arc is square amp 270000000103 The position of the arc is 4 points 43 points amp 850000001800040000002B0000 The size of the arc is 43 points by 40 points 002F0000002C0000 e The start angle of the arc is 90 and the arc angle length is 90 005A0000005A0000 The rest of the styles are inherited from previous objects Specification of the end of the FrameVector graphic The following record specifies the end of the FrameVector graphic amp FF00000000 The x characters specify the end of data in hexadecimal format
56. after rotation For any object rotated at any other angle the BRect value is the position and size of the object before rotation which is the same as the ShapeRect value Device independent pathnames The following codes for pathname components in a device independent pathname are obsolete and are ignored by the MIF interpreter Code Meaning A Apollo dependent pathname D DOS dependent pathname M Macintosh dependent pathname U UNIX dependent pathname For information about valid codes see Device independent pathnames on page 7 Document statements The following changes have been made to Document statements MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt DCollateSeparations boolean gt lt DNoPrintSepColor gt and lt DPrintProcessColor gt In addition the Document statement has a number of new property statements that set options for View Only documents see page 92 set options for structured documents and define custom math operators see page 190 Page statement The following change has been made to the Page statement MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt PageOrientation keyword gt lt PageAngle gt and lt DPageSize gt A pages size and orientation landscape or portrait is determined by the PageAngle statement and the Document substatement DPageSize FrameMaker writes the Pageorientation statement for backward compatibility MIF generators should use the PageAngle statement instead of PageOr
57. body page will use the page layout defined for the body page To create the text flow for the master page The text flow for the master page is not contained in the Page statement instead it is contained in a Text Flow statement that is linked to the text frame on the master page The Page statements must come before any Text Flow statements Link the text flow to the master page s text frame by using the TextRect ID statement to refer to the text frame s unique ID lt Text Flow lt TFTag A gt The text flow must be tagged lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt Autoconnect must be turned on lt Para lt ParaLine lt TextRectID 1 gt Refers to text frame ID on master page gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow The text flow for the master page must be empty Be sure to give the text flow the same flow tag that you give the text flow for the body page and to turn on the autoconnect feature To create the text flow for the body page The text flow for the body page is contained in a separate Text Flow statement that is linked to the body page s text frame The text flow contains the actual text of the document in one or more Para statements If text overflows the first text frame the MIF interpreter creates another body page with a layout that matches the right master page and pours text into the body page s text frame lt Text Flow lt TFTag A gt lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt lt Para lt TextRectID 2 gt
58. boolean gt lt FUnderlining FNumeric gt lt FSupScript boolean gt lt FPosition FSuperscript gt lt FSubScript boolean gt lt FPosition FSubscript gt If your application only reads or writes files for version 4 or later versions of FrameMaker use only the 4 00 state ments If your application reads or writes files for version 3 or previous versions of FrameMaker use only the 3 00 statements Do not use both statements The MIF interpreter always reads the MIF 3 00 statements It writes both 3 00 and 4 00 statements for backward compatibility 264 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 265 MIF Reference Object statements The following table lists the changes in graphic object statements see Graphic objects and graphic frames on page 110 MIF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt Angle 0 90 180 270 gt lt Angle degrees gt lt BRect gt lt ShapeRect gt Text lines text frames imported graphics table cells and equations that are rotated at an angle of 90 180 or 270 degrees retain rotation in earlier versions If these objects are rotated at any other angle they are rotated back to 0 degrees in the earlier version All other objects are rotated back to 0 degrees FrameMaker writes both BRect and ShapeRect values for backward compatibility For text lines text frames imported graphics table cells and equations that are rotated at an angle of 90 180 or 270 degrees the BRect value is the position and size of the object
59. bottom Cintegerc Character case DintegerD Double underline 0 no underline 1 underline ADOBE FRAMEMAKER Format code Meaning fstringf Font family for example f Times f iintegeri Display format number 0 1 2 jintegerj Alignment for vertical lists and matrices 0 center 1 left 2 right 3 at equal symbol 4 left of equal symbol lmetricl Extra space to left of expression corresponds to Spacing values in the Position Settings dialog box M In a matrix makes all column widths equal boolean m In a matrix makes all row heights equal boolean n No automatic parentheses boolean NintegerN Numeric underline 0 no underline 1 underline ointegero Outline 0 no outline 1 outline OintegerO Overline 0 no overline 1 overline qstringq Color name for example Red rmetricr Extra space to right of expression corresponds to Spacing values in the Position Settings dialog box RintegerR Shadow 0 no shadow 1 shadow sdecimals Character size in points for example s12 00s Sintegers Strikeout 0 no strikeout 1 strikeout tmetrict Extra space at top of expression corresponds to Spacing values in the Position Settings dialog box TstringT Name of custom element from reference page frame u Manual line break to left boolean UintegerU Underline 0 no underline 1 underline v Manual line break to right boolean vVstringV Fon
60. calculate the width of proportional width columns n i PTotzl x PWidth ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 82 MIF Reference The arguments have the following values n Value of Tb1ColumnWidthP PTotal Sum of the values for all Tb1ColumnWidthP statements in the table PWidth Available space for all proportional columns Tb1Width the sum of fixed width columns For example suppose you want a four column table to be 7 inches wide but only the last three columns to have proportional width The columns have the following widths Column 1 has a fixed width value of 1 lt Tb1Columnwidth 1 gt Column 2 has a proportional value of 2 lt Tb1ColumnWidthP 2 gt Column 3 has a proportional value of 1 lt Tb1ColumnWidthP 1 gt Column 4 has a proportional value of 1 lt Tb1ColumnWidthP 1 gt e Available width for proportional columns PWidth is 7 1 or 6 e Sum ofall proportional values PTotal is2 1 1or4 e Width for Column 2 is 2 PTotal x PWidth 2 4 x 6 or 3 e Width for Column 3 or Column 4 is 1 PTotal x PWidth 1 4 x 6 or 1 5 RulingCatalog statement The RulingCatalog statement defines the contents of the Ruling Catalog which describes ruling styles for tables A document can have only one RulingCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt RulingCatalog lt Ruling gt Defines ruling style see Ruling statement on
61. char x 0 3 0 0 0 lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 1 0 0 lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 2 0 0 lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 3 0 0 lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 0 1 0 lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 0 0 1 lt MathFullForm char x 0 0 0 0 2 The char expression can also describe composite diacritical marks The following table contains examples Example MathFullForm statement ley lt MathFullForm char x 1 0 0 0 2 gt lt MathFullForm char x 3 1 0 0 2 gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 201 MIF Reference The diacritical expression places diacritical marks around multiple operands and describes two additional diacritical marks The diacritical expression describes the same marks that the char expression describes but it can take multiple operands In addition the diacritical expression describes two forms of diacritical mark not described by the char expression The following table shows examples of diacritical expressions Example MathFullForm statement 2 lt MathFullForm diacritical 4 0 0 0 0 char x gt lt MathFullForm diacritical 5 0 0 0 0 char x gt gt lt MathFullForm AB diacritical 4 0 0 0 0 times char A char B gt Note The diacritical expression is not backward compatible When an earlier version previous to 4 x of FrameMaker reads a MIF file saved in version 4 or later of
62. clause and regulations contained in the preceding sentence shall be incorporated by reference Contents Chapter 1 Introduction WhyuseMIF2 sasdussed an as eee Ar ae SAT eaten teenies 1 Usingthismanual s u tvspserdle kaserne atenerne tee biaj phon coeds 1 Style conventions ascccscacss ce cakes BERGAN NA des dark dekade 2 Overview of MIF statements aaannannannnnvnnvnnvnnennennenuennenuenenauenennennennene 2 MIF st tement syntax susurrmistarnsdkea de rare debet anek kokes e end et dies 4 Chapter 2 Using MIF Statements Working with MIF files accu seve cates poker pk dear a EE A a 9 Creating a simple MIF file for FrameMaker avanananunnenenenenennenenenenenennenenener 11 Creating and applying character formats 00 secre cece een reece cent eee n ee eenees 23 Creating and formatting tables nuanananennenenenenennenenenenenneneneneneneenenener 24 Specifying page layout 2s sicsiw ia kennel named daa sae os Seen 31 Creating markers aids ulsusicenest iadeg cared nda dag as ab oka ea ark sabe ied adsense 36 Creating cross references J suitdimid daded edad cds A awa NRE EA TAEA eadaareuee damier 36 Creating Variables sr usridessr r raske dalaadisas ab oad aae aude eda ag eda ee cain as 38 Creating conditionalitext eiea erinin eked eda dea ek dais EA TAEL REE De PARKENE DEERE ie 40 Creating filters see isenana aa n eiker hadde een ss 43 Includingitemplate files stesa a sikkert Pad enced aars headet 44 Sett
63. data that can be used by an FDK client for example SQL query information 140 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference gt End of TiApiClient statement Usage When updating text insets the FDK client can use the TiclientName substatement to determine if it should update a given text inset If the FDK client requires additional information the client can store the information in the TiclientData substatement For example if the FDK client queries a database for text the SQL query can be stored in the Ticli entData substatement TiFlow statement The TiFlow statement defines a text flow that is imported by reference from a FrameMaker document or a MIF file The statement also defines imported text from other formatted documents that FrameMaker can filter for example a Microsoft Word document Syntax lt TiFlow lt TiFormatting keyword gt Specifies which document formats are used for the text inset keyword can be one of TiSource TiEnclosing TiPlainText lt TiMainFlow boolean gt Yes specifies that the text inset is imported from the main flow of the source document No specifies that the text inset is imported from a different flow lt TiPageSpace keyword gt If the text inset is not imported from the main flow specifies whether the text inset is imported from a flow in the body page or the reference page of the source document keyword can be one of BodyPage ReferencePa
64. direction of the table is set to left to right RTL The direction of the table is set to right to left INHERITLTR Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to left to right then INHERITLTR is assigned to Tb1Dir INHERITRTL Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to right to left then INHERITRTL is assigned to TblDir Ruling properties lt TblColumnRuling tagstring gt Ruling style for most columns value must match a ruling style name specified in the RulingCatalog statement lt TblXColumnNum integer gt Number of column with a right side that uses the Tb1XColumnRuling statement lt TblXColumnRuling tagstring gt Ruling style for the right side of column Tb1XColumnNum lt TblBodyRowRuling tagstring gt Default ruling style for most body rows lt TblXRowRuling tagstring gt Exception ruling style for every nth body row lt TblRulingPeriod integer gt Number of body rows after which Tb1XRowRul ing should appear lt TblHFRowRuling tagstring gt Ruling style between rows in the heading and footing lt TblSeparatorRuling tagstring gt Ruling style for rule between the last heading row and first body row and also between the last body row and the first footing row lt TblLRuling tagstring gt Left outside table ruling style lt TblBRuling tagstring gt Bottom outside table ruling style lt TblRRuling tagstring gt Right outside table
65. e Line style dash or solid Color Text line alignment and character format Because the interpreter also provides default objects for a document the current state of an object may be deter mined by a default object For example if a document does not provide any paragraph formats the interpreter applies a set of default paragraph properties to the first paragraph Subsequent paragraphs use the same properties unless otherwise specified How FrameMaker identifies MIF files A MIF file must be identified by a MIFFile or Book statement at the beginning of the file otherwise FrameMaker simply reads the file as a text file All other statements are optional that is a valid MIF file can contain only the MIFFile statement Other document objects can be added as needed FrameMaker provides a set of default objects ifa MIF file does not supply them MIF statement syntax The statement descriptions in this manual use the following conventions to describe syntax lt token data gt token data where token represents one of the MIF statement names such as Pgf listed in the MIF statement descriptions later in this manual and data represents one or more numbers a string a token or nested statements Markup statements are always delimited by angle brackets lt gt macro statements are not For the syntax of macro statements see Macro statements on page 55 A token is an indivisible group of characters that identify a reserved wor
66. edit this data BookFilelnfo also represents the values of the default fields for Creator Creation Date andMetaData Date For more information see Document File Info on page 88 lt encoded gt XMP information as encoded data which is generated by FrameMaker This information corresponds to the values set in the File Info dialog box For any book there can be an arbitrary number of XMP statements gt End of BookFilelnfo XML book statements In versions 7 0 and later FrameMaker supports XML import and export The following statements store information necessary to properly save a book as XML Syntax lt BXmlVersion string gt The XML version that was specified in the XML declaration when the XML file was opened lt BXmlEncoding string gt The XML encoding parameter that was specified in the XML declara tion when the XML file was opened lt BXmlStandAlone int gt The XML standalone parameter that was specified in the XML declara tion when the XML file was opened determines whether or not the XML document requires a DTD 146 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt BXmlStyleSheet string gt The path or URI to the stylesheet that was specified for the XML file plus the type parameter specifying the type of stylesheet View only book statements MIF Reference In versions 6 0 and later a book can be View Only The following statements indicate whether the book is View Only and how
67. file tree When you specify a device independent pathname in a MIF string you must precede any right angle brackets gt with backslashes as shown in the syntax above Absolute pathnames An absolute pathname shows the location of a file beginning with the root directory volume or drive The following table specifies device independent absolute pathnames for the different versions of FrameMaker In this version The pathname appears as this MIF string UNIX lt r gt lt c gt MyDirectory lt c gt MySubdirectory lt c gt Filename Windows lt v gt e lt c gt mydir lt c gt subdir lt c gt filename Relative pathnames A relative pathname shows the location of a file relative to the current directory In all FrameMaker versions the device independent relative pathname for the same file is lt c gt Filename Chapter 2 Using MIF Statements MIF statements can completely describe any Adobe FrameMaker document no matter how complex As a result you often need many MIF statements to describe a document To learn how to use MIF statements it helps to begin with some simple examples This chapter introduces you to MIF beginning with a simple MIF example file with only a few lines of text Additional examples show how to add common document objects such as paragraph formats a table and a custom page layout to this simple MIF file The examples in this chapter are also provided in onl
68. for more information about the commands file in UNIX versions Applications of MIF You can use MIF files any time you need access to FrameMaker s formatting capabilities This section provides some examples of how MIF can be used and some tips on minimizing MIF statements You can use MIF to Share files with earlier versions of FrameMaker e Perform custom document processing Write import and export filters for FrameMaker documents e Perform database publishing Sharing files with earlier versions FrameMaker automatically opens documents created with an earlier version of FrameMaker 2 0 or higher ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 48 MIF Reference To use an earlier version of FrameMaker such as 5 5 to edit a document created with a later version of FrameMaker such as 7 0 1 Use the newer FrameMaker product version to save the document in MIF 2 Open the MIF file with the earlier version of FrameMaker Note Earlier versions of FrameMaker do not support all MIF statements in the current version For example when you use version 5 5 6 or earlier of FrameMaker to open a document created in version 6 0 or later MIF statements specifying optimized PDF size are skipped You can ignore the related error messages However to regain the optimized PDF size you will need to use the Optimize Pdf Size command For a description of the differences between MIF 7 0 and previous versions see MIF Compatibility Modifying documents You c
69. graphics or an anchored frame if you are importing graphics For example to import a MIF file that describes a graphic first create an anchored frame in a document select the frame and then import the MIF file see Bar chart example on page 232 When you import or include MIF files make sure that object IDs are unique in the final document and that refer ences to object IDs are correct see Generic object statements on page 111 The object IDs must be unique for all objects TextRect TblId Group and AFrame use the ID for identification in the document Editing MIF files You normally use a text editor to edit a MIF file If you use FrameMaker to enter text into a MIF file be sure to open the MIF file as a text file and turn off Smart Quotes If you leave Smart Quotes on you must use a key sequence to type the quotation marks that enclose a MIF string To enter a left quotation mark type Control To enter a straight quotation mark type Control Although MIF statements are usually generated by a program while you learn MIF or test and debug an application that generates MIF you may need to manually generate MIF statements In either case you can minimize the number of MIF statements that your application needs to generate or that you need to type in The following suggestions may be helpful when you are working with MIF statements Edita MIF file generated by FrameMaker e You can edit a MIF file generate
70. gt Tbl1TRuling Medium gt blColumnRuling Thin gt Tb1XColumnRuling Thin gt blBodyRowRuling Thin gt Tb1XRowRuling Thin gt TblHFRowRuling gt TblSeparatorRuling Medium gt Tb1XColumnNum 1 gt TblRulingPeriod 4 gt TblLastBRuling No gt blTitlePlacement InHeader gt b1TitlePgf1 lt PgfTag TableTitle gt b ae Y b 3 2 i 3 k 3 A 4 y X JH 2 KA RMR BBR AR A AAN KKAM MRK KM SAR RMR RR AO AN A gt lt TblTitleGap 6 0 pt gt lt TblInitNumColumns 2 gt lt TblInitNumHRows 1 gt lt TblInitNumBodyRows 4 gt lt TblInitNumFRows 0 gt lt TblNumByColumn No gt gt Fe OD GE SE HH OH HH HH HHHH HHH H ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 29 MIF Reference end of TblColumn Second column Width of second column end of TblColumn pt gt These are exactly like paragraph format properties No fill for heading row Use 10 gray fill for main body rows Shade by row not by column Shade every other row No fill for alternate rows Color for alternate rows Use thin left outside rule Use thin bottom outside rule Use thin right rule U rule U outside se medium top outside se thin rules between columns thin rules between rows No rules between heading rows Use medium rule after heading row Place title above table Paragraph format for first paragraph in title end of TblTitlePgf1 Gap bet
71. gt lt AttributeValue val2 gt gt end of DefAttrValues lt DefAttrValues lt AttributeTag B gt lt AttributeValue val3 gt lt AttributeValue val4 gt gt end of DefAttrValues gt end of DefAttrValuesCatalog The following statements create a catalog of attributes without values lt DefAttrValuesCatalog gt end of DefAttrValuesCatalog ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 44 MIF Reference Including template files When you write an application such as a filter or a database publishing application to generate a MIF file you have two ways to include all formatting information in the file e Generate all paragraph formats and other formatting information directly from the application e Create a template document in FrameMaker save it as a MIF file and include the template file in your generated MIF file It s usually easier to create a template in FrameMaker than it is to generate the formatting information directly To create the template as a MIF file do the following 1 Create the template in FrameMaker and save it as a MIF file 2 Edit the MIF file to preserve the formatting catalogs and the page definitions and delete the text flow 3 Generate the text flow for your document and use the include statement to read the formatting information from the template Creating the template Create the template document in FrameMaker Define the paragraph and character formats table formats variable and cross reference forma
72. in the following sections Locked fonts and text insets The FLocked statement does not correspond to any setting in the Character Designer The statement is used for text insets that retain formatting information from the source document If the lt FLocked Yes gt statement appears in a specific character format that character format is part of a text inset that retains formatting information from the source document The character format is not affected by global formatting performed on the document If the lt FLocked No gt statement appears in a specific character format either that character format is not part of a text inset or that character format is part of a text inset that reads formatting information from the current document The character format is affected by global formatting performed on the document For more information about text insets see Text insets text imported by reference on page 137 Font name When a PgfFont or Font statement includes all of the family angle weight and variation properties FrameMaker identifies the font in one or more of the following ways The statement FPlatformName specifies a font name that uniquely identifies the font on a specific platform The statements FFamily FAngle FWeight and Fvar specify how FrameMaker stores font information inter nally The statement FPostScriptName specifies the name given to a font when it is sent to a PostScript printer specif ically
73. inset and data link statements In previous versions Macintosh versions of FrameMaker allowed you to import text by reference with the Publish and Subscribe mechanism The MIF DataLink statement described text that was published or subscribed In version 5 the capability to import text by reference which creates a text inset is available on all platforms As a result of this new feature the new Text Inset statement replaces the DataLink statements for subscribers Note that the DataLink statements for publishers are still used The following table lists the old DataLink statements and the new Text Inset statements that replace them MIF 4 00 MIF 5 00 lt DataLink gt lt TextInset gt lt DLSource pathname gt lt TiSrcFile pathname gt lt DLParentFormats Yes gt lt TiFormatting TiEnclosing gt lt DLParentFormats No gt lt TiFormatting TiSource gt lt OneLinePerRec boolean gt lt EOLisEOP boolean gt lt MacEdition integer gt lt TiMacEditionId integer gt lt DataLinkEnd gt lt TextInsetEnd gt If you open a 5 00 MIF file with text insets in a version 4 FrameMaker product the older version of the product will strip out the text inset MIF statements The text inset becomes plain text that cannot be updated For more information about the MIF syntax for text insets see Text insets text imported by reference on page 137 For information about the MIF syntax for publishers see If t
74. insets that retain formatting information from the source document If the lt TblLocked Yes gt statement appears in a specific table that table is part of a text inset that retains formatting information from the source document The table is not affected by global formatting performed on the document If the lt TblLocked No gt statement appears in a specific table that table is not part of a text inset or is part of a text inset that reads formatting information from the current document The table is affected by global formatting performed on the document For details about text insets see Text insets text imported by reference on page 137 Tbis statement The Tb1s statement lists the contents of each table in the document A document can have only one Tb1s statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 78 MIF Reference Syntax lt Tbls Beginning of tables list lt Tbl gt Defines a table instance see Tbl statement next lt Tblu gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Tbls statement Tbl statement The Tb1 statement contains the contents of a table instance It must appear in a Tbls statement Each Tb1 statement is tied to a location in a text flow by the ID number in a Tb11D statement Each Tb1 statement has an associated ATb1 statement within a ParaLine statement that inserts the table in the flow T
75. is added to Tb1Cel1Margins No means right cell margin overrides Tpb1CellMargins ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 65 MIF Reference lt PgfCellBMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means bottom cell margin is added to Tb1CellMargins No means width of bottom cell margin overrides Tpb1CellMargins Miscellaneous properties lt PgfLocked boolean gt Yes means the paragraph is part of a text inset that obtains its format ting properties from the source document See page 65 lt PgfAcrobatLevel integer gt Level at which the paragraph is shown in an outline of Acrobat Book marks 0 indicates that the paragraph does not appear as a bookmark Usage Within a PgfCatalog statement the PgfTag statement assigns a tag to a paragraph format To apply a paragraph format from the Paragraph Catalog to the current paragraph use the PgfTag statement in a ParaLine statement If the Pgf Tag statement within a text flow does not match a format in the Paragraph Catalog then the pgf statement makes changes to the current paragraph format That is a Pgf statement after PgfTag specifies how the paragraph differs from the format in the catalog Ifa document has side heads indents and tabs are measured from the text column not the side head In a table cell tab and indent settings are measured from the cell margins not the cell edges Usage of some aspects of the Pgf statement is described in the following sections Paragraph placement across text col
76. is assignedto TLineDir lt ATheta dimension gt Start angle lt ADTheta dimension gt Arc angle length lt InsetScaling Scaling of the inset dimension gt lt EquationBreak Set line width after which the equation breaks to the next line dimension gt lt MathMLStyleDpi Scaling value using which bitmap file is imported integer gt lt MathMLStyleComposeDpi Scaling value using which bitmap file is created integer gt lt MathMLStyleFontSize Font size of the MathML to which the style is applied dimension gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 73 MIF Reference lt MathMLStyleInline bool Yes places the equation inline with the paragraph text ean gt Line numbers FrameMaker documents can have the line numbers displayed for assisting in the reviewing process Multiple contributors to the document can refer to the content using the Page number and then line number The following are the statements relevant to line numbers Syntax lt DLineNumGap dimension gt The width of the line number field lt DLineNumRestart boolean gt Setting this property to Yes restarts the line numbering to 1 for each page of a document lt DLineNumShow boolean gt Setting this property to Yes displays the line numbers lt DLineNumFontFam string gt Name of the font family for the line numbers lt DLineNumSize dimension gt Size of the line number text in points lt DLineNumColor tagstring gt Color o
77. it is the first child of a Heading element Another clause could specify that a Para element has the Body paragraph format in all other contexts A level rule contains clauses that specify an element s formatting on the basis of the level to which it is nested within specific types of ancestor elements For example one clause of a level rule could specify that a Para element appears in 12 point type if it has only one Section element among its ancestors Another clause could specify that a Para element appears in 10 point type if there are two Section elements among its ancestors Element definitions contain format rules grouped into the following statements EDTextFormatRules EDObjectFormatRules EDPrefixRules EDSuffixRules EDStartElementRules EDEndElementRules EDTextFormatRules statement The EDTextFormatRules statement defines the formatting properties to be applied to a container table table child or footnote element in different contexts It must appear in an ElementDef statement An EDText FormatRules statement can contain zero or more substatements describing level and context format rules Syntax lt EDTextFormatRules Any combination of level and context format rules lt LevelFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 164 lt ContextFormatRule gt A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 164 lt ContextFormatRule gt Ad
78. keyword gt Style of chapter numbering keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt ChapterNumText string gt When ChapterNumStyle is set to Custom this is the string to use lt ChapterNumComputeMethod keyword gt Chapter numbering keyword can be one of StartNumbering restart numbering ContinueNumbering continue numbering from previous compo nent UseSameNumbering use the same numbering as previous compo nent ReadFromFi le use numbering set for the component s document Section numbering lt SectionNumStart integer gt Starting section number lt SectionNumStyle keyword gt Style of section numbering keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt SectionNumText string gt When SectionNumSty1e is set to Custom this is the string to use MIF Reference 150 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt SectionNumComputeMethod keyword gt Section numbering keyword can be one of StartNumbering restart numbering ContinueNumbering continue numbering from previous compo nent UseSameNumbering use the same numbering as previous compo
79. language lt DLanguage keyword gt Hyphenation and spell checking language for text lines for allowed keywords see Pgf Language on page 64 Color printing lt DNoPrintSepColor tagstring gt Tag name of color not to print any color not included here is printed If you have multiple colors you don t want to print use multiple state ments lt DPrintProcessColor tagstring gt Tag name of process color to print as separation A DPrintSeparations boolean gt Yes prints separations A DTrapwiseCompatibility boolean gt When printing to a PostScript file Yes generates postscript opti mized for use with the TrapWise application lt DPrintSkipBlankPages boolean gt Yes skips blank pages when printing Superscripts and subscripts lt DSuperscriptSize percent gt Scaling factor for superscripts expressed as percentage of the current font size A DSubscriptSize percent gt Scaling factor for subscripts expressed as percentage of current font size A DSmallCapsSize percent gt Scaling factor for small caps expressed as percentage of current font size A DSuperscriptShift percent gt Baseline offset of superscripts expressed as percentage of current font size lt DSubscriptShift percent gt Baseline offset of subscripts expressed as percentage of current font size ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 94 MIF Reference A DSuperscriptStretch percent gt
80. lt DashedStyle lt NumSegments lt DashSegment lt DashSegment lt DashSegment lt DashSegment gt Dashed gt 4 gt 10pt gt 10pt gt 0 5pt gt 10pt gt lt HeadCap Round gt lt TailCap Round gt lt NumPoints 2 gt Point 1 0 1 Point 7 5 1 gt WS ws This is a sparse dot dash line end of DashedPattern end of PolyLine This is a very sparse dotted line lt PolyLine lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle Dashed gt lt NumSegments 2 gt lt DashSegment 0 5pt gt lt DashSegment 20pt gt from lt NumPoints 2 gt Point 1 0 2 gt Point 7 5 2 gt gt lt PolyLine lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle Dashed gt NumSegments 8 gt DashSegment 4pt gt DashSegment 8pt gt DashSegment 12pt gt DashSegment 16pt gt DashSegment 20pt gt DashSegment 24pt gt DashSegment 20pt gt DashSegment 16pt gt DashSegment 12pt gt DashSegment 8pt gt NAD NA KR DIN R gt lt HeadCap Butt gt lt TailCap Butt gt lt NumPoints 2 gt lt Point 1 0 3 gt lt Point 7 5 3 gt first points lt PolyLine lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle Dashed gt lt DashSegment 10pt gt lt NumPoints 2 gt Point 1 0 4 gt Point 7 5 4 gt lt PolyLine lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle Dashed gt lt DashSegment lpt gt lt DashSegment lpt gt gt He He He He end of DashedPattern ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference The polyline inherits round head
81. lt FBold Yes gt lt FDX 0 gt lt FDY 0 gt lt FDAX 0 gt lt FNoAdvance No gt gt lt TLOrigin 1 85 0 21 gt lt TLAlignment Center gt lt String Market Shares gt gt end of TextLine Boxes for Brand F and Brand I legends lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt Fill 1 gt lt ShapeRect 1 36 0 33 0 38 0 13 s gt lt Rectangle lt GroupID 1 gt lt Fill 4 gt lt ShapeRect 1 36 0 54 0 38 0 13 gt Text lines for Brand F and Brand I legends lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt Font lt FSize 12 gt lt FPlain Yes gt gt lt TLOrigin 1 80 0 46 gt lt TLAlignment Left gt lt String Brand F gt Second text line inherits the current font from the preceding text line lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt TLOrigin 1 80 0 67 gt lt TLAlignment Left gt lt String Brand I gt Reset the current pen pattern and pen width for subsequent objects lt Pen 0 gt lt PenWidth 0 500 gt 233 lt PolyLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt NumPoints 3 gt lt Point lt NumPoints 2 lt NumPoints 2 lt NumPoints 2 lt NumPoints 2 lt TextLine lt Group lt TLOrigin 1 gt lt TextLine lt Group lt TLOrigin 1 gt lt TextLine lt Group lt TLOrigin 2 gt lt TextLine lt Group lt TLOrigin 2 lt TextLine lt Group lt TLOrigin 0 gt lt TextLine lt Group lt TLOrigin 0 gt lt TextLine lt Group lt TLOrigin 0 gt lt TextLine lt Group lt TLOrigin
82. lt FPairKern Yes gt Pair Kern lt FTsume No gt Tsume Asian systems only gt end of PgfFont The Pagination properties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer Widow Orphan Lines 3 Paragraph Designer m aA a0 ME Paragraph Tag Numbered Stat Anywhere v Keep With _ Next Pgf Format In Column Run In Head Default Punctuation Side Head Alignment Across All Columns C Across All Columns and Side Heads J As Is Commands Update Al Reset Apply Pagination properties ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 16 The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfPlacement Anywhere gt Start lt PgfWithNext No gt Keep With Next Pgf lt PgfWithPrev No gt Keep With Previous Pgf lt PgfBlockSize 1 gt Widow Orphan Lines lt PgfPlacementStyle Normal gt Format paragraph placement lt PgfRunInDefaultPunct t gt Run in Head Default Punctuation a period followed by an em space The Numbering properties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer Numbering properties guoa mae 0O ses m Paragraph Tag Numbered X V Autonumber Format N lt n gt t Building Blocks Character Format s a Default fl Font Nt pa aut Y Font lt n gt Emphasis n 1 gt
83. lt Otherss In the following tables the 12th column position corresponds to the lt Others gt class If you are using Asian system software you can enter the characters for each class directly in a text file Example The following is an example of a portion of a CharClass statement lt CharClass lt BegParentheses LIM gt lt EndParentheses gt 71lktHu gt lt NoLineBeginChar gt Y DSigkgvWahr4ortvraisannt gt gt end of CharClass SqueezeTable statement The SqueezeTable statement defines how to compress the space surrounding characters of each class Note that each character is rendered within a specific area For Asian characters this area is the same for each character These rules determine how to compress this area for optimum line rendering Syntax lt SqueezeTable lt SqueezeHorizontal numerals gt Defines how to squeeze horizontal text lt SqueezeVertical numerals gt Defines how to squeeze vertical text gt End of SqueezeTable statement The possible values for numerals are No squeeze Half squeeze from top or left Half squeeze from bottom or right Quarter squeeze from all sides Same as 3 but do not apply vertical squeeze to a semicolon This character pair should not have occurred nNBWNr SO 1 Usage ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference The SqueezeHorizontal and SqueezeVertical statements include 25 numerical values one for each character class The valu
84. name as it appears in the Marker Type popup menu of the Marker dialog box gt end of MarkerTypeCatalog End of MarkerTypeCatalog statement Marker statement The Marker statement inserts a marker It must appear in a ParaLine statement For version 5 5 of MIF and later markers are identified by their names If you open an earlier version MIF file that uses markers of type 11 through type 25 the document will show those marker numbers as the marker names For MIF version 5 5 or later MType numbers are still assigned for backward compatibility but the assignment of numbers is fairly arbitrary If the document includes more than 15 custom markers Type 11 through Type 25 then the extra custom markers will be assigned lt MType 25 gt Syntax lt Marker lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters lt MType integer gt Marker type number for list of allowed values see Usage next Marker type numbers are not used for the current versions of FrameMaker but they are included for backward compatibility lt MTypeName string gt Marker name as it appears in the Marker Type popup menu of the Marker dialog box lt MText string gt Marker text string lt MCurrPage integer gt Current page of marker assigned when FrameMaker generates a file ignored when FrameMaker reads or im
85. objects A FrameMaker document always has a certain set of default objects formats and preferences even when you create a new document When you create a MIF file you usually provide the objects and properties that your document needs However if you don t provide all the objects and properties required in a FrameMaker document the MIF interpreter fills in a set of default objects and document formats The MIF interpreter normally provides the following default objects e Predefined paragraph formats for body text headers and table cells e Predefined character formats A right master page for single sided documents and left and right master pages for double sided documents e A reference page e Predefined table formats e Predefined cross reference formats e Default pen and fill values and dash patterns for graphics e Default colors Default document preferences such as ruler settings e Default condition tags Although you can rely on the MIF interpreter to provide defaults the exact properties and objects provided may vary depending on your FrameMaker configuration The MIF interpreter uses default objects and properties that are specified in setup files and in templates In UNIX versions these templates are ASCIITemplate and NewTemplate You can modify these default objects and document formats by creating your own version of ASCIITemplate or NewTemplate or by modifying your setup files For more information about modify
86. of the setting within a dialog box The following examples show the property dialog boxes from the Paragraph Designer with the related Pgf substatements Suppose you have created a paragraph format for a numbered list item with Basic properties defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer AED fos Bs a Paragraph Tag Numbered X Indents and Spacing First Above Pgf v Tab Stops 00 00 Below Pgf onde 0 25 3 0pt v Right Line Space 0 0 13 0pt v V Fixed Alignment Ned Paf Tag Commands Update Al Reset Apply Basic properties The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfTag Numbered gt Paragraph Tag lt PgfFIndent 0 0 gt First Indent lt PgfLIndent 0 25 gt Left Indent lt PgfRIndent 0 0 gt Right Indent lt PgfAlignment Left gt Alignment lt PgfSpBefore 0 0 pt gt Space Above 1 lt PgfSpAfter 0 0 pt gt Space Below 1 lt PgfLeading 2 0 pt gt Line Spacing leading is added to font size ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 14 MIF Reference In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfLineSpacing Fixed gt Line Spacing fixed lt PgfNumTabs 1 gt Number of tab stops lt TabStop Begin definition of tab lt TSX 0 25 gt Tab position lt TSType Left gt Tab type lt TSLeaderStr gt Tab leader none
87. page 82 lt Ruling gt Additional statements as needed gt End of RulingCatalog statement Ruling statement The Ruling statement defines the ruling styles used in table formats It must appear within the RulingCatalog statement Syntax lt Ruling lt RulingTag tagstring gt Ruling style name an empty string indicates no ruling style lt RulingPenWidth dimension gt Ruling line thickness lt RulingGap dimension gt Gap between double ruling lines ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 83 MIF Reference lt RulingColor tagstring gt Color of ruling line see ColorCatalog statement on page 83 lt RulingSeparation integer gt Color of ruling line no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for back ward compatibility see Color statements on page 263 lt RulingPen integer gt Pen pattern 0 through 7 or 15 see page 112 lt RulingLines integer gt 0 none 1 single or 2 double ruling lines gt End of Ruling statement Color You can assign colors to text and objects in a FrameMaker document A FrameMaker document has a set of default colors you can also define your own colors and store them in the document s Color Catalog A FrameMaker document has three color models you can use to create colors CMYK RGB and HLS You can also choose inks from installed color libraries such as PANTONE In a MIF file colors are defined by a Color statement within a ColorCatalog statement
88. position of the point in x and y coordinates rectangle 4 metrics interpreted as the position of the rectangle in x and y coordinates and the size of the rectangle in width and height All integer values are stored in big endian order The x and y coordinates are relative to the rectangle bounding the vector graphics The origin of the coordinate system is the upper left corner of this rectangle For the specifications of angles positive values are measured clockwise from 0 the x axis and negative values are measured counterclockwise Specifications of definition op codes This section describes each definition op code Op codes are listed by number and description The op code number is shown in parentheses Version number 0x01 Specification by data type Byte Description of data Bits 7 4 major version number Bits 3 0 minor version number Size of data in bytes 1 Example 01 00000001 50 representing version 5 0 Note This must be the first op code for a FrameVector graphic Bounding rectangle 0x02 Specification by data type Metric metric metric metric Description of data Position of graphic metric metric Width of graphic metric Height of graphic metric Size of data in bytes 16 Example 02 00000010 00000000 00000000 020A0000 00BD0000 for a graphic with the following specifications x position 0 points 0000 y pos
89. provides support for MathML which is an XML application for representing mathematical notation This support is provided through out of the box integration with MathFlow Editor by Design Science FrameMaker includes 30 day trial licenses of two MathFlow editors Style Editor and Structure Editor In a MIF file the MathML tag contains the various tags that hold MathML properties and data Paragraph box properties You can set background color for paragraphs Ina MIF file you can use the PgfBoxColor tag to set the background color of a paragraph Hotspot A hotspot is an active area in a document that you can link to different areas of the document to another document or to a URL You can apply hotspots to various objects such as graphics images and anchored frames In a MIF file you can make an object a hotspot using the IsHot spot boolean tag Using the Hot spot cmdstr tag you can specify the target URL or bookmark the user will go to after clicking the hotspot Object Style You can save your frequently used object properties as a style You can apply these object styles to various objects such as images anchored frames and text frames for consistent size and appearance For example you can create and apply an object style to all the anchored frames in a document or across documents to make them of the same size In MIF files the stylecatalog tag contains the object styles and you can specify an object style using the Style tag
90. ruling style lt TblTRuling tagstring gt Top outside table ruling style lt TblLastBRuling boolean gt Yes means draw bottom rule on the last sheet only No means draw rule on the bottom of every sheet Shading properties lt TblHFFill integer gt Default fill pattern for table heading and footing see page 112 lt TblHFColor tagstring gt Default color for table heading and footing see page 84 lt TblHFSeparation integer gt Default color for table heading and footing no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 263 lt TblBodyFill integer gt Default fill pattern for body cells see page 112 lt TblBodyColor tagstring gt Default color for body cells see page 84 lt TblBodySeparation integer gt Default color for body cells no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 263 lt TblShadeByColumn boolean gt Yes specifies column shading No specifies body row shading lt TblShadePeriod integer gt Number of consecutive columns rows that use Tpb1BodyFill ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 76 MIF Reference A TblXFill integer gt Exception fill pattern for columns or body rows see page 112 lt TblXColor tagstring gt Exception color for columns or body rows see page 84 lt TblXSeparation integer gt Exception color for columns or body rows no longer use
91. state ments under the Text Rect statement will be used Note that the existence of side heads in a text flow is still specified by the TFsideheads statement which is under the Text Flow statement For more information about the MIF syntax for text frames see TextRect statement on page 128 For more infor mation about the MIF syntax for text flows see Text flows on page 129 Graphic frame statements In version 5 graphic frames can be anchored inside or outside text frames Graphic frames can also be aligned along the inside or outside edge of a text frame in relation to the binding of a book Finally graphic frames can be anchored outside the entire text frame or one column in the text frame As a result the following changes to 4 00 MIF have been made The FrameType statement now supports the additional keywords Inside Outside and RunIntoParagraph e The AnchorAlign statement now supports the additional keywords Inside and outside Version 5 introduces the new AnchorBeside statement to indicate whether the graphic frame is anchored outside the entire text frame Text Frame or outside one column in the text frame Column When editing FrameMaker document files from previous versions FrameMaker assumes that this statement has the value lt AnchorBeside Column gt For more information about the MIF syntax for graphic frames see Frame statement on page 116 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 262 MIF Reference Text
92. statement contains one Cel 1 statement for each column see Cell state lt Cell gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Row statement Usage Each Row statement contains a Ce11 statement for each column in the table even if a straddle hides a cell Extra Ce11 statements are ignored too few Ce11 statements result in empty cells in the rightmost columns of the row When you rotate a cell to a vertical orientation the width of unwrapped text affects the height of the row You can use RowMaxHeight and RowMinHeight to protect a row s height from extremes caused by rotating cells containing multiline paragraphs or to enforce a uniform height for the rows FrameMaker writes out the RowHeight statement for use by other programs It is not used by the MIF interpreter Even if the statement is present the MIF interpreter recalculates the height of each row based on the row contents and the RowMinHeight and RowMaxHeight statements Cell statement A Ce11 statement specifies a cell s contents It also includes format straddle and rotation information as needed The statement must appear in a Row statement Syntax lt Cell lt CellFill integer gt Fill pattern for cell 0 15 see page 112 lt CellColor tagstring gt Color for cell see ColorCatalog statement on page 83 lt CellSeparation integer gt Color for cell no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for back w
93. statements have been added under the Textrect statement to specify multicolumn text frames e lt TRNumColumns integer gt e lt TRColumnGap dimension gt lt TRColumnBalance boolean gt When reading 5 00 MIF files previous versions of FrameMaker will remove these statements and assume that the text frame is actually a single text column When reading MIF files from previous versions FrameMaker in version 5 will convert multiple text columns on a page into a single multicolumn text frame To represent each text column as a separate text frame include the MIF statement lt TRNumColumns 1 gt in the description of each TextRect statement Side head layout information has been transferred from the Text Flow statement to the TextRect statement The following statements which appeared under the Text Flow statement in previous versions are replaced by corre sponding statements under the TextRect statement in 5 00 MIF 4 00 MIF 5 00 lt TFSideheadWidth dimension gt lt TRSideheadWidth dimension gt lt TFSideheadGap dimension gt lt TRSideheadGap dimension gt lt TFSideheadPlacement keyword gt lt TRSideheadPlacement keyword gt If FrameMaker in version 5 finds the Text Flow MIF statements for side heads FrameMaker will convert these state ments to the equivalent statements under the TextRect statement If these types of statements are found under both the Text Rect statement and the Text Flow statement the
94. styles used for the runaround properties of objects Ifthe RunaroundType statement is set to Contour text flows around objects in the shape of the contours of the objects The RunaroundGap statement specifies the distance between the objects and the text that flows around them e Ifthe RunaroundType statement is set to Box text flows around objects in the shape of boxes surrounding the objects The RunaroundGap statement specifies the distance between the objects and the text that flows around them e Ifthe RunaroundType statement is set to None text doesn t flow around objects and the value specified by the RunaroundGap statement is ignored 113 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Objects inherit the values of these statements from previous objects Since these statements are used only to change the inherited value from a previous object the statements are not needed for every object For example if you write out a MIF file not all objects will contain these statements If these statements do not appear in an object or MIF file the following rules apply e Ifan object does not contain the RunaroundType statement or the RunaroundGap statement FrameMaker uses the values from the previous RunaroundType and RunaroundGap statements e Ifno previous RunaroundType and RunaroundGap statements exist in the MIF file FrameMaker uses the default values lt RunaroundType None gt and lt RunaroundGap 6 0 gt e For example if the lt RunaroundGa
95. tSeparator statement is at the current left indent A PgfBotSepOffset dimension gt Position at which to place the reference frame below the para graph MIF Reference 172 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER Table cell properties lt PgfCellAlignment keyword gt Vertical alignment for first paragraph in a cell keyword can be one of Top Middle Bottom A PgfCellLMargin dimension gt Left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell A PgfCellLMarginChange dimension gt Change to left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell A PgfCellBMargin dimension gt Bottom cell margin for first paragraph in a cell A PgfCellBMarginChange dimension gt Change to bottom cell margin for first paragraph in a cell A PgfCellTMargin dimension gt Top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell A PgfCellTMarginChange dimension gt Change to top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell A PgfCellRMargin dimension gt Right cell margin for first paragraph in a cell A PgfCellRMarginChange dimension gt Change to right cell margin for first paragraph in a cell A PgfCellLMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means the left cell margin is fixed A PgfCellTMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means the top cell margin is fixed A PgfCellRMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means the right cell margin is fixed A PgfCellBMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means
96. table a unique ID number e Make sure that each Tb1 statement has only one corresponding ATb1 statement and that each ATb1 statement has a corresponding Tb1 statement e Make sure that each ATb1 statement matches the ID of its corresponding table instance Specifying page layout FrameMaker documents have two kinds of pages that determine the position and appearance of text in the document body pages and master pages Body pages contain the text and graphics that form the content of the document Master pages control the layout of body pages Each body page is associated with one master page which specifies the number size and placement of the page s text frames and the page background such as headers footers and graphics Untagged background text frame On body pages you type in a Tagged template column of a tagged text frame text frame Untagged background text frame Master page Body page ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 32 MIF Reference Text frames define the layout of the document s text on a page A text frame can arrange text in one or more columns In MIF a text frame is represented by a Text Rect statement The dimensions of the text frame and the number of columns in the text frame are specified by substatements under the TextRect statement A text flow describes the text contained in one or more text frames In MIF a text flow is rep
97. tag see ColorCatalog statement on page 83 lt CSeparation integer gt Color for condition tag no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 263 lt CBackgroundColor tag Background color of the conditional tag s text string gt gt End of Condition statement Conditional and Unconditional statements The Conditional statement marks the beginning of conditional text and the Unconditional statement marks the end These statements must appear in a Row or ParaLine statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 58 MIF Reference Syntax lt Conditional Begin conditional text lt InCondition tagstring gt Specifies condition tag from Condition Catalog lt InCondition tagstring gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Conditional statement lt Unconditional gt Returns to unconditional state System generated colors FrameMaker will automatically generate new colors when multiple tags are applied on text The colorTag tag that is generated is named with the fm gen prefix and appended with a system generated integer Boolean expressions A Boolean expression is defined in a Boolcond statement BoolCondCatalog statement You can create Boolean expressions by linking different conditional tags using Boolean operators In a MIF file Boolean condition expressions are defined using a BoolCond statement The Boolean expressions for a document are stor
98. that extracts data from the database and writes it out into a MIF file Use a MIF include statement to include the document template in the new document The database user can now open a fully formatted report 242 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 243 MIF Reference The code for the procedure that extracts information from the database and outputs the MIF strings is shown in this appendix This procedure is written in the ACIUS 4th DIMENSION command language You could use any database query language to perform the same task The procedure does the following 7 Creates a new document 8 Sends the MIFFile identification line 9 Uses include to read in the formatting information stored in the template coffee mif 10 Sends the MIF statements to create a table instance 11 In each body cell sends a field that includes the information extracted from the database 12 Creates a text flow that uses the TextRect ID from the empty body page in the coffee mif template 13 Includes the Atb1 statement that places the table instance in the document text flow 14 Closes the document In the following example database commands are shown like this SEND PACKET Comments are preceded by a single back quote Local variables are preceded by a dollar sign This procedure first gets the information entered by the user and stores it in local variables 1 Name of sales representative a 2 Phone number 3 Discount CR char 13 carriage retur
99. the XRef statement to apply a format to the text of the cross reference The XRefDef statement supplies the cross reference format definition which is a string that contains text and cross reference building blocks For more information about cross references and their building blocks see your user s manual or the online Help system Global document properties A FrameMaker document has properties that specify the document page size pagination style view options current user preferences and other global document information The user sets these properties by using various commands such as the Document command the View command the Normal Page Layout command and others In a MIF file global document properties are specified as substatements in a Document statement If you do not provide these property statements the MIF interpreter assumes the properties specified in NewTremplate For infor mation on defaults specified in templates see page 3 The BookComponent statement specifies setup information for files generated from the document The Dictionary statement contains the user s list of allowed words for the document Document statement The Document statement defines global document properties A document can have only one Document statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 A Document statement does not need any of these property substatements which can occur in an
100. the bottom cell margin is fixed Endof FmtChangeList statement Elements ElementBegin and ElementEnd statements MIF Reference The ElementBegin and ElementEnd statements indicate where a structural element begins and ends These state ments must appear in a ParaLine statement see page 182 or in a BookElements statement see page 185 Syntax lt ElementBegin Begin element lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the API and should not be used by filters ElementReferenced boolean gt Yes means the element is marked as a PDF named destination for cross references hypertext markers or bookmarks version 6 0 or later lt ETag tagstring gt Tag name of element from Element Catalog lt Collapsed boolean gt Collapse element in structure view lt SpecialCase boolean gt Treat element as a special case for validation lt ENamespace lt The element s namespace declarations a declaration consists of one lt ENamespacePrefix gt and one lt ENamespacePath gt 173 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt ENamespacePrefix string gt The prefix that identifies the namespace lt ENamespacePath string gt The system path or URI to the DTD or schema that defines the namespace Additional pairs of prefix and path statements as needed gt End of Namespace statement lt BannerTextProce
101. the name that would be passed to the PostScript FindFont operator before any font coordination opera tions The PostScript name is unique for all PostScript fonts but may not be available for fonts that have no PostScript version For complete font specifications FrameMaker always writes the FFamily FAngle FWeight FVar and FPost ScriptName statements In addition the Windows version of FrameMaker also writes the FPlat formName statement A UNIX version of FrameMaker ignores FPlat formName When FrameMaker reads a MIF file that includes more than one way of identifying a font it checks the font name in the following order 1 Platform name 2 Combination of family angle weight and variation properties 3 PostScript name If you are writing filters to generate MIF you do not need to use all three methods You should always specify the PostScript name if it is available You should use the platform name only if your filter will be run on a specific platform A filter running on a specific platform can easily find and write out the platform name but the name cannot be used on other platforms Font encoding The lt FEncoding gt statement specifies which encoding to use for a font The default is Roman or standard 7 bit encoding If this statement is not included for a font 7 bit encoding is assumed ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 70 MIF Reference This statement takes precedence over all other font attributes For example if the document
102. to display and print the graphic For more information about facets see Facet Formats for Graphics In a MIF file the Framelmage facet is contained in the ImportObject statement For more information about the statement see ImportObject statement on page 119 Specification of a Framelmage facet A Framelmage facet begins with the following facet name and data type lines FrameImage amp SV When importing a graphic with a Framelmage display and print facet FrameMaker prompts the user to specify the graphic inset s print resolution in the Imported Graphic Scaling dialog box The print resolution determines the size of the imported graphic Specification of Framelmage data A description of a graphic in FrameImage format consists of three parts A header which describes the dimensions and other characteristics of the graphic An optional color map included only if the graphic uses colors Data describing the bitmap of the imported graphic The description is written as integer values in hexadecimal format Each line is preceded by an ampersand amp The data section begins with the sv characters which indicate that the FrameImage data is represented as unsigned bytes The beginning and end of the data are bracketed by the symbol x which indicates that the data is in hexadecimal format Header The header describes properties of the imported graphic These properties are described by eight 32 bit integer values su
103. variable is affected by global formatting performed on the document For more information about text insets see Text insets text imported by reference on page 137 Char statement The Char statement inserts an extended ASCII character in a ParaLine statement It must appear in a ParaLine TextLine or BookXRef statement Syntax lt Char keyword gt Preset name for special character for allowed keyword values see Usage next Usage To include an extended ASCII character in a ParaLine statement use the Char statement with a predefined character name For example you can represent the pound sterling character with the statement lt Char Pound gt as shown in the following example lt Para lt ParaLine lt String the pound sterling gt lt Char Pound gt lt String symbol gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para lt Para lt ParaLine lt String the pound sterling xa3 symbol gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para You can use the lt Char HardReturn gt statement to insert a forced return in a paragraph The lt char HardReturn gt statement must be the last substatement in a ParaLine statement lt Para lt ParaLine lt String string 1 gt lt Char HardReturn gt gt end of ParaLine lt ParaLine lt String string 2 gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference For a list of character codes see the Quick Reference for your Fra
104. with special MIF statements to indicate that these formats should not be affected by global updates These statements are PgfLocked FLocked Tb1 Locked VariableLocked and XRefLocked respectively The MIF statements appear under the descriptions of these formats Plain text formatting can also be used if the TiFormatting statement is set to TiPlainText TiText statement The TiText statement defines a text file imported by reference It appears in a Text Inset statement Syntax lt TiText lt TiEOLisEOP boolean gt Yes specifies that the end of the line marks the end of a paragraph No specifies that a blank line identifies the end of a paragraph lt TiTxtEncoding keyword gt Specifies the text encoding for the source file keyword can be one of TiIsoLatin TiASCII TiANSI TiJIS TiShiftJIS TiEUC TiBig5 TIEUCCNS TiGB TiHZ TiKorean iUTF8 iUTF16BE iUTF16LE iUTF32BE iUTF32LE gt End of TiText statement TiTextTable statement The TiTextTable statement defines imported text formatted as a table It appears in a Text Inset statement Syntax lt TiTextTable lt TiTblTag string gt Specifies the name of the table format used for the table lt TiTblIsByRow boolean gt Yes specifies that each paragraph in the imported text is converted to a row of table cells No specifies that each paragraph in the imported text is converted to a table cell ADOBE FR
105. your user s manual Syntax lt ArrowStyle lt TipAngle integer gt Arrowhead tip angle in degrees lt BaseAngle integer gt Arrowhead base angle in degrees lt Length dimension gt Arrowhead length lt HeadType keyword gt Arrowhead type keyword can be one of Stick Hollow Filled lt ScaleHead boolean gt Yes scales head as arrow line gets wider lt ScaleFactor dimension gt Scaling factor for arrowhead as line gets wider 115 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 116 MIF Reference gt End of ArrowStyle statement Ellipse statement The Ellipse statement describes circles and noncircular ellipses It can appear anywhere at the top level or ina Frame or Page statement Syntax lt Ellipse Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 111 lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of object s bounding rectangle before rotation in the page or graphic frame coordinates gt End of Ellipse statement Frame statement Usually a Frame statement contains a list of Object and Frame statements that define the contents of the graphic frame and are listed in the draw order from back to front The Frame statement can appear at the top level or in a Page Frame or AFrame statement Syntax lt Frame Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 111 lt IsHotspot boolean gt Whether or not the object is a hotspot lt
106. 15 6 8 gt gt End of ImportObject statement Usage The Importobject statement describes the imported graphic s position size and angle If the graphic is imported by reference the statement describes the path to the graphic file If the imported graphic is copied into the document the statement contains the data describing the graphic Data describing the graphic is stored in one or more facets If the graphic is linked with an application through FrameServer or an FDK client the statement also describes the path to the application used to edit the graphic Usage of some of the aspects of the Importobject statement is described in the following sections Graphic file formats You can import different types of graphic files into a FrameMaker document Bitmaps The term bitmap graphics also called raster graphics refers to graphics represented by bitmap data Graphics file formats recognized by FrameMaker include Framelmage Sun rasterfile xwd TIFF PCX and GIF files Vector The term vector graphics also called object oriented graphics refers to graphics represented by geometric data Graphics file formats recognized by FrameMaker include FrameVector CGM Corel Draw Micrografx Drawing Format DXF EPS GEM HPGL IGES PICT WME and WPG Note that some of these graphic file formats can also contain bitmap data Size position and angle of imported graphics When you import a MIF file FrameMaker determines th
107. 7 Font language lt FLanguage keyword gt Language to use for spelling and hyphenation keyword can be one of NoLanguage USEnglish UKEnglish German SwissGerman French CanadianFrench Spanish Catalan Italian Portuguese Brazilian Danish Dutch Norwegian Nynorsk Finnish Swedish Japanese TraditionalChinese SimplifiedChinese Korean Arabic Hebrew Font encoding lt FEncoding keyword gt Specifies the encoding for this font This is to specify the encoding for a double byte font If not present the default is Roman keyword can be one of these FrameRoman JISX0208 ShiftJIS BIG5 GB2312 80 EUC KSC5601 1992 Font size color and width lt FSize dimension gt Size in points only or in Q on a Japanese system lt FColor tagstring gt Font color see ColorCatalog statement on page 83 lt FSeparation integer gt Font color no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 263 lt FStretch percent gt The amount to stretch or compress the font where 100 means no change lt FBackgroundColor tagstring gt Background color of the paragraph text Font style lt FUnderlining keyword gt Turns on underlining and specifies underlining style keyword can be one of FNoUnderlining FSingle FDouble FNumeric MIF Reference ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 68 lt FOverline bool
108. ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 2015 release AT Adobe O 2015 Adobe Systems Incorporated and its licensors All rights reserved MIF Reference Online Manual If this guide is distributed with software that includes an end user agreement this guide as well as the software described in it is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license Except as permitted by any such license no part of this guide may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Adobe Systems Incorporated Please note that the content in this guide is protected under copyright law even if it is not distributed with software that includes an end user license agreement The content of this guide is furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Adobe Systems Incorporated Adobe Systems Incorporated assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in the informational content contained in this guide Please remember that existing artwork or images that you may want to include in your project may be protected under copyright law The unauthorized incorporation of such material into your new work could be a violation of the rights of the copyright owner Please be sure to obtain any permission requir
109. AMEMAKER MIF Reference A riTblNumCols num gt If each paragraph is converted to a separate cell specifies the number of columns in the table a riTblSep string gt If each paragraph is converted to a row of cells specifies the character used to indicate the contents of each cell riTblNumSep num gt If characters are used to indicate the contents of each cell specifies the number of these characters used as a single divider A riTblNumHdrRows num gt Specifies the number of heading rows in the table riTblHeadersEmpty boolean gt Yes indicates that the imported text is not inserted in the heading rows iTblTxtEncoding keyword gt Specifies the text encoding for the source file keyword can be one of TiIsoLatin TiASCII TiANSI TiJIS TiShiftJIS TiEUC TiBig5 TIEUCCNS TiGB TiHZ TiKorean TiUTF8 TiUTF16BE TiUTF16LE TiUTF32BE TiUTF32LE End of TiText Table statement Usage When imported text is converted to a tabular format each paragraph can be converted into either a cell or a row of cells e Ifeach paragraph is converted to a table cell the TiTblIsByrow substatement is set to No The number of columns in the table is specified by the TiTb1NumCols substatement e Ifeach paragraph is converted to a row of cells the TiTblIsByrow substatement is set to Yes The character used in the imported text to delimit the contents of each cell is specif
110. AU KEOM M Znvwanwaannnnn lt BegParentheses 100040 0000000 1000002120000 0281 4 2 5 5 lt EndParentheses de ee cal 45 dy GA G OR le GEM PE A oe SL Oh 4 4 0 5 gt end of SpreadTable In the preceding example no spread occurs between a character in the BegParentheses class and a character in the Quest ionBang class because the value 0 No spread is in the fourth position which is the column position for the Quest ionBang class of characters LineBreakTable statement The LineBreakTable statement defines how to break lines between characters There are 25 statement rows in this table each corresponding to the 25 character classes respectively There are 25 numeric values in each statement row Each value corresponds to one of the 25 character classes respec tively These values specify how to break a line after a character of the class identified by the row statement when followed by a character of the class identified by the column position Syntax lt LineBreakTable lt BegParentheses numerals gt lt EndParentheses numerals gt lt NoLineBeginChar numerals gt lt QuestionBang numerals gt lt CenteredPunct numerals gt lt PeriodComma numerals gt lt NonSeparableChar numerals gt lt PrecedingSymbol numerals gt lt SucceedingSymbol numerals gt lt AsianSpace numerals gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt Hiragana numerals gt lt Others gt l
111. Alignment within the text column keyword can be one of LeftRight Left Center Right lt PgfDir keyword gt Direction of the paragraph keyword can be one of LTR The direction of the paragraph is set to left to right RTL The direction of the paragraph is set to right to left INHERITLTR Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to left to right then INHERITLTR is assigned to PgfDir INHERITRTL Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to right to left then INHERITRTL is assigned to PgfDir lt PgfSpBefore dimension gt Space above paragraph lt PgfSpAfter dimension gt Space below paragraph ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 62 MIF Reference lt PgfLineSpacing keyword gt Amount of space between lines in paragraph measured from baseline to baseline keyword can be one of Fixed default font size Proportional largest font in line lt PgfLeading dimension gt Space below each line in a paragraph lt PgfNumTabs integer gt Number of tabs in a paragraph The statement is not required for input files the MIF interpreter calcu lates the number of tabs If it does appear it must appear before any TabStop statements otherwise the MIF interpreter ignores the tab settings lt TabStop Begin definition of tab stop the following property statements can appear in any order but must appear within a TabStop statement lt TSX dimension gt Horizontal po
112. BE FRAMEMAKER 270 MIF Reference To set up a live link between a graphic application and a FrameMaker document you need to add functions to your application to write out graphic data as a graphic inset A graphic inset consists of an Importobject statement that contains one or more facets for display and print If your application requires additional information not supported by the display and print facet the graphic inset also needs one or more application specific facets to store this additional information The two types of graphic insets are internal graphic insets and external graphic inset files Each type results in a slightly different type of integration between FrameMaker and your application You can choose the type of graphic inset that your application supports In most cases one format is adequate but you might want to give users more than one option Both types require a display and print facet External graphic insets An external graphic inset file remains independent of the FrameMaker document The FrameMaker document contains only a pathname for the graphic inset file Because the graphic inset data is not contained in the FrameMaker document users can access the graphic inset data from FrameMaker from your application or from another application To edit an external graphic inset from FrameMaker users must open FrameMaker document select the graphic inset and choose the Graphic Inset command from the Special menu Fra
113. Catalog and AttrCondExpr statements All MIF 8 documents contain a catalog of predefined filters The catalog is empty if a filter is not defined in a struc tured document A filter comprises a tag called attrcondExprTag the expression tag AttrCondExprStr and the state of the filter which is stored in the attrcondstate tag The state of the filter indicates whether the filter is active in the document Although the catalog can have several filters only one filter must be active at any time To create filters use the AttrCondExprCatalog statement as illustrated in the following example where two filters are created lt AttrCondExprCatalog lt AttrCondExpr lt AttrCondExprTag NewExprl1 gt lt AttrCondExprStr A vall OR A valll AND B val2 OR B val22 gt lt AttrCondState Inactive gt gt end of AttrCondExpr lt AttrCondExpr lt AttrCondExprTag NewExpr2 gt lt AttrCondExprStr A val4 OR A val44 OR B val3 OR B val33 gt lt AttrCondState Active gt gt end of AttrCondExpr gt end of AttrCondExprCatalog The following statements create an empty filter catalog lt AttrCondExprCatalog gt end of AttrCondExprCatalog All MIF 8 documents contain attribute value pairs To create a catalog of attributes with values use the DefAttrValuesCatalog statement as illustrated in the following example lt DefAttrValuesCatalog lt DefAttrValues lt AttributeTag A gt lt AttributeValue vall
114. Catalog and apply the formats to text selec tions Creating and applying character formats is very similar to creating and applying paragraph formats as described in the previous section Because the two methods are similar this section just summarizes how to create and apply character formats Ina MIF file the Character Catalog is contained in a Font Catalog statement The Font Catalog statement contains named character formats in a list of Font statements A Font Catalog statement looks like this lt FontCatalog lt Font gt Describes a character format lt Font gt Describes a character format gt end of FontCatalog A Font statement specifies the properties of a character format these are the same properties specified in the Character Designer The Font statement is just like the PgfFont statement that you use to define the default font in a paragraph format See PgfFont and Font statements on page 66 for a complete description of a Font statement To apply a predefined character format to text use the FTag statement lt MIFFile 2015 gt Hand generated lt FontCatalog lt Font lt FTag Emphasis gt lt FAngle Italic gt gt end of Font gt end of FontCatalog lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt String You can format characters within a paragraph by gt lt Font lt FTag Emphasis gt gt end of Font lt String applying gt lt Font lt FTag gt gt end of Font lt St
115. Color Red gt gt end of Condition gt end of ConditionCatalog To mark conditional and unconditional passages within document text use Conditional and UnConditional statements as shown in the following example lt Para lt ParaLine lt String Our company makes a full line of gt Unconditional text lt Conditional Begin conditional text lt InCondition Winter gt Specifies condition tag gt end of Conditional lt String warm and soft sweaters gt Conditional text lt Conditional Begin conditional text lt InCondition Summer gt Specifies condition tag gt end of Conditional lt String cool and comfortable tank tops gt lt Unconditional gt lt String for those gt Unconditional text gt end of ParaLine lt ParaLine lt Conditional ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 41 MIF Reference lt InCondition Winter gt gt end of Conditional lt String chilly winter gt lt Conditional lt InCondition Summer gt gt end of Conditional lt String hot summer gt lt Unconditional gt lt String days gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para You can apply multiple condition tags to text by using multiple Incondition statements lt Conditional lt InCondition Winter gt lt InCondition Summer gt gt end of Conditional Showing and hiding conditional text using Boolean expressions You can also use Boolean expressions to show or hide conditional text Boolean cond
116. Copyright 1984 William Collins Sons amp Co Ltd Copyright 1988 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd Copyright 1990 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1997 Van Dale Lexicografie bv Copyright 1997 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1984 Editions Fernand Nathan Copyright 1989 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1983 S Fischer Verlag Copyright 1997 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1989 Zanichelli Copyright 1989 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1989 IDE a s Copyright 1989 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1990 Espasa Calpe Copyright 1990 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1989 C A Stromberg AB Copyright 1989 All rights reserved
117. EUC using a Japanese text conversion utility The MIF encoding statement is converted along with the text in the MIF file To determine which encoding was used each MIF file that contains Japanese text must include a MIFEncoding statement near the beginning of the file It must appear before any Japanese text in the file The string value in the MIFEncoding statement is the Japanese spelling of the word Nihongo which means Japanese FrameMaker reads this fixed string and determines what the encoding is for it From that FrameMaker expects the same encoding to be used for all subsequent 8 bit text in the document To see the characters spelling the word Nihongo you must view the MIF file on a system that is enabled for Japanese character display When the MIF is displayed on a Roman system the characters appear garbled Syntax HTH aa lt MIFEncoding oo gt originally written as Japanese Shift JIS lt MIFEncoding H oo gt originally written as Japanese EUC MIFEncoding statement for Chinese FrameMaker recognizes three encoding schemes for Chinese Big5 and CNS for Traditional Chinese and GB2312 80 for Simplified Chinese The Windows versions of FrameMaker write Big5 for Traditional Chinese text and the UNIX versions of FrameMaker write out CNS for Traditional Chinese text All platform versions of FrameMaker write GB2312 80 for Simplified Chinese ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 214 MIF Reference To determine which encod
118. ElementBegin ElementEnd and ElementDefCatalog statements ElementDefCatalog statement The ElementDef Catalog statement defines the contents of the Element Catalog A document or book file can have only one ElementDefCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 10 Syntax lt ElementDefCatalog Begin Element Catalog lt ElementDef gt Defines an element see ElementDef statement next lt ElementDef gt Additional statements as needed gt End of ElementDefCatalog statement ElementDef statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference The ElementDef statement creates an element definition which specifies an element s tag name content rules and optional format rules It must appear within an ElementDefCatalog statement Syntax lt ElementDef Begin element definition lt EDTag tagstring gt Element tag name A EDObject keyword gt Type of formatter object represented by the element keyword can be one of DContainer DEquation DFootnote DGraphic DMarker DTable DTblTitle DTblHeading DTblBody DTblFooting DTblRow DTblCell DSystemVariable DXRef Homo EAEARA AE EDContainer identifies a container element all other values identify object non container elements A EI DValidHighestLevel boolean gt Yes indicates element can be used as the highest level element for a flow only a container el
119. F amp 8000000000 amp 8003FF amp 8000000000 amp 8003FF amp 8000000000 amp 8003FF amp 8000000000 amp 8007FF amp 00000001 282 Graphic data ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference amp 8003FF amp 00000001 amp 8003FF amp 00000001 amp 8003FF amp 00000001 amp 8003FF amp 00000001 amp 8003FF amp 00000001 amp 8003FF amp 00000001 amp 8007FF amp NX EndInset 283 284 Chapter 14 FrameVector Facet Format FrameVector is a format for vector graphics that is recognized by Adobe FrameMaker on all platforms The speci fication of the FrameVector format is documented in this appendix Imported graphics can contain graphic data in FrameVector format This data is called the FrameVector facet of the graphic FrameMaker can use this facet to display and print the graphic For more information about facets see Facet Formats for Graphics In a MIF file the FrameVector facet is contained in the Importobject statement For more information about the statement see ImportObject statement on page 119 Specification of a FrameVector facet A Frame Vector facet begins with the following facet name facet data type and version number lines FrameVector amp SV amp lt MakerVectorXXX gt In the version number line XXX is a three character string identifying the version of FrameMaker For example the character string lt MakerVector 0 gt identifies an imported graph
120. F Reference lt DMathNewType keyword gt Specifies custom math element type for a list of types see the chapter on creating equations in your user s manual keyword can be one of Atom Delimiter Function Infix Large Limit Postfix Prefix VerticalList lt DMathOpTLineOverride boolean gt No uses default glyph for operator Yes looks up operator on text line in reference frame lt DMathOpPositionA integer gt Position of first operand expressed as a percentage of equation font size lt DMathOpPositionB integer gt Position of second operand lt DMathOpPositionc integer gt Position of third operand gt End of DMat hNew statement gt End of DMathCatalog statement Usage You can define new math elements or redefine math elements that appear on the Equations palette To create a custom math element add the element s name and type to the DMathCatalog statement On a reference page with a name beginning with the word FrameMath define the math element in a named unanchored graphic frame In the frame called a reference frame create a text line that contains one or more characters that represent the math symbol you can apply specialized math fonts and change the position of the characters to get the appearance you want You can use custom elements in equations by including them in a MathFullForm statement For example to create a symbol for the set of real numbers add the new e
121. FrameMaker any equations that contain diacritical expressions are lost You should edit any MathFullForm statements that contain diacritical expressions before opening the file in earlier versions of FrameMaker For more information see Math statements on page 264 dummy The dummy expression describes a dummy variable that you can use as a placeholder in equations For example in the following equation i is a dummy variable 4 i 2 3 4 x l x x x x i 0 The dummy expression has the same syntax as the char expression and can contain the same character symbols or names Example MathFullForm statement x lt MathFullForm dummy x gt Operator expressions Operator expressions take at least one expression as an operand There are no restrictions on the complexity of operator expressions and they are not restricted by any concepts of domain or typing Unary operators Unary operators have one expression as an operand Three of the unary operators id lparen and rparen have multiple display formats The following table contains an example of each unary operator in all of its display formats with char x as a sample operand Example MathFullForm statement x lt MathFullForm abs char x gt acosx lt MathFullForm acos char x gt acoshx lt MathFullForm acosh char x gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference
122. IF interpreter When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it counts the number of TabStop statements to determine the number of tabs stops in a paragraph Frames are nested too deeply over 10 skipping statement There are too many nested frames The maximum nesting depth is 10 Graphic frame has an invalid lt Angle gt attribute An invalid value is specified by the Angle statement for a graphic frame Insufficient memory FrameMaker cannot allocate enough memory for one of its work buffers In UNIX versions try to free some swap space and restart FrameMaker In the Windows versions try quitting other applications and closing other open windows then start FrameMaker again Invalid opcode Op code The MIF file contains a syntax error Macro IncludeFile nesting too deep The define or include statements specify too many nested levels of statements Missing dimension A necessary dimension value was not found in a MIF statement No name was given for the cross reference format format_definition The XRefName statement is not specified for a cross reference format No name was given for the variable definition vari able_definition The VariableName statement is not specified for a variable Object ignored must come before lt TextFlow gt statements All object statements must come before the first Text Flow statement in a MIF file Processing opcode Op code Frame
123. InitialAutoNums Provides a starting value for the autonumber series in a book lt FlowTag string gt Specifies flow that the book uses to number the series lt Series string gt Specifies autonumber series lt NumCounter integer gt Initializes autonumber counter lt NumCounter gt Additional statements as needed gt End of AutoNumSeries statement Folder or group properties lt ComponentApplication string gt Name of the application for a folder template or XML file lt ComponentTemplateFilePath string gt The path and filename of the folder template Book conditional tags lt AllConditionTags Container object that contains objects of type TagName lt TagName string gt Name of the managed condition tag End of Al 1ConditionTags statement lt ShownConditionalTags Container object that contains objects of type TagName lt TagName string gt Name of the managed condition tag End of ShownConditionalTags statement End of BookComponent statement 154 BookXRef statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER The BookxRef statement defines the cross reference formats for the book Syntax lt BookXRef lt XRefDef string gt Cross reference format definition lt XRefSrcText string gt Text for which to search lt XRefSrcIsElem boolean gt Yes means the source of the cross reference is an element from a structure
124. Integer whose range depends on the associated statement name ID Integer that specifies a unique ID An ID can be any positive integer between 1 and 65535 inclu sive A statement that refers to an ID must exactly match the ID dimension Decimal number signifying a dimension You can specify the units such as 1 11 72 pt and 8 3 cm lf no units are specified the default unit is used degrees A decimal number signifying an angle value in degrees You cannot specify units any number is interpreted as a degree value percentage A decimal number signifying a percentage value You cannot specify units any number is inter preted as a percentage value metric A dimension specified in units that represent points where one point is 1 72 inch see Math values on page 6 Only used in MathFullForm statements WH Pair of dimensions representing width and height You can specify the units XY Coordinates of a point Coordinates originate at the upper left corner of the page or graphic frame You can specify the units LTRB Coordinates representing left top right and bottom indents You can specify the units LTWH Coordinates representing the left and top indents plus the dimensions representing the width and height of an object You can specify the units ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 6 MIF Reference This term or symbol Means XY WH Coordinates of a point on the physical screen repres
125. MIFFile Labels the file as a MIF document file The MIFFi le statement is required and must be the first statement in the file Control statements Establish the default units ina Units statement the debugging setting ina Verbose statement and comments in a Comment statement These statements can appear anywhere at the top level as well as in some substatements Macro statements Define macros with a def ine statement and read in files with an include statement These statements can appear anywhere at the top level ColorCatalog Describes document colors The ColorCatalog statement contains Color state ments that define each color and tag ConditionCatalog Describes condition tags The ConditionCatalog statement contains Condition statements that define each condition tag and its properties BoolCondCatalog Describes Boolean Condition Expressions The Bool CondCatalog statement contains BoolCond statements that define each Boolean condition expression with its show hide properties CombinedFontCatalog Describes combined fonts The CombinedFont Catalog statement contains CombinedFontDe fn statements that define each combined font and its component fonts PgfCatalog Describes paragraph formats The Pgf Catalog statement contains Pgf statements that define the properties and tag for each paragraph format ElementDefCatalog Defines the contents of the Element Catalog for a structured document For more infor mati
126. Maker is currently processing the specified opcode Skipped string The MIF file contains a syntax error MIF Reference 249 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER This message Means String too long over 255 or 1023 characters overflow ignored The maximum length for most lt UserString gt strings is 1023 characters The maximum length for all other strings is 255 char acters Structured MIF statement ignored This FrameMaker is set to use the unstructured program inter face and so it does not support structured MIF statements Syntax error in lt MathFullForm gt statement The MIF file contains a syntax error ina MathFul1Formstate ment Unable to start new object FrameMaker cannot allocate memory for a new object In UNIX versions try to free some swap space and restart FrameMaker In the Windows versions try quitting other applications and closing other open windows then start FrameMaker again Unable to store marker The marker table is full In UNIX versions FrameMaker is prob ably running out of swap space Try to free some swap space and restart FrameMaker In the Windows versions try quitting other applications and closing other open windows then start FrameMaker again Unbalanced right angle bracket A right angle bracket gt was found that has no corresponding left angle bracket lt Unexpected opcode A statement was found in a context where it is no
127. MathFullForm fract char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm function char x char x gt Ox lt MathFullForm function oppartial char x char x gt Ox dx lt MathFullForm function optotal char x char x gt dx x x lt MathFullForm inprod char x char x gt b limx lt MathFullForm lim char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm over char x char x gt X x lt MathFullForm power char x char x gt X x lt MathFullForm sn char x char x gt xx10 lt MathFullForm sn ili char x char x gt xEx a Partial and full differentials are a special case of function N ary operators N ary operators have two or more operand expressions When one of these operators has more than two operands FrameMaker displays an additional operand symbol for each operand expression For example the following table shows several forms of plus plus num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 num 4 Example MathFullForm statement 1 2 lt MathFullForm plus num 1 1 num 2 2 gt 14243 lt MathFullForm plus num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 gt 1 2 3 4 lt MathFullForm 4 1 gt 205 The following table contains an example of each n ary operator Each example shows two operands ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Example MathFullForm statement
128. Near side offset lt BLOffset dimension gt Baseline offset lt AnchorAlign keyword gt Alignment of anchored frame keyword can be one of Left Center Right Inside Outside lt AnchorBeside keyword gt Whether the graphic frame is anchored outside of a text frame or a column in a text frame keyword can be one of Column TextFrame lt Cropped boolean gt Yes clips sides of graphic frame to fit column lt Frame gt Other graphic frames within this frame Graphic object statements Objects in the graphic frame see page 110 End of Frame statement Usage Unless the generic object data indicates otherwise the MIF interpreter assumes that each graphic frame inherits the properties of the current state 117 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 118 MIF Reference Frame statement that is contained within an AFrames statement defines an anchored frame Any other Frame statement defines an unanchored frame The assumed value for FrameType is NotAnchored For anchored frames an AFrame statement that refers to the frame ID indicates where the anchored frame appears within the text flow see ParaLine statement on page 132 Specifications for the position and alignment of anchored frames are described in the following sections Position of anchored frames The AnchorBeside statement determines whether the graphic frame is anchored to a text column Column ora text frame Text Fram
129. NumStyle DFNoteNumStyle e DTb1FNoteNumStyle At the book level the following properties of the BookComponent statement can be configured to use the new numbering styles e VolumeNumStyle ChapterNumStyle e SectionNumStyle e SubSectionNumStyle PageNumStyle BFNoteNumStyle e BTb1FNoteNumStyle ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 252 MIF Reference Document direction The Docpir property defines the direction left to right LTR or right to left RTL in which you can author your document The objects that inherit their direction property from the Document would get affected ifthe DocDir property is changed Text flow direction The FlowDir property controls the direction of the child objects that derive their direction from the flow For example a text frame can derive its direction from the text flow object You can also change the style of a text frame in which case the StyleCatalog statement would contain a property named TFrameDir This property controls the direction of all text frames created using the same style Paragraph direction You can set the direction of a paragraph by using the PgfDir property You can either change the direction of a single paragraph Para statement or a paragraph format Pgf statement Table direction You can set the direction of a table by using the Tb1Dir property You can either change the direction ofa single table Tb1 statement or a table format Tb1Formt statement Text line Direct
130. PenWidth 5 gt lt Fill 0 gt same same lt Arc lt GroupID lt ArcRect lt Arc lt Fill 5 gt lt ArcRect gt lt Arc lt Fill 2 gt lt ArcRect gt lt Arc lt Fill 4 gt lt ArcRect gt lt Arc lt Fill 6 gt lt ArcRect easier lt Group lt ID 1 gt Custom dashed lines LS 12 11 144 144 lt GroupID 1 gt 12 11 144 144 lt GroupID 1 gt 12 11 144 144 lt GroupID 1 gt 12 11 144 144 lt GroupID 1 gt 12 11 144 144 lt ArcTheta 135 gt lt ArcDT lt ArcTheta 243 gt lt ArcDT lt ArcTheta 309 gt lt ArcDT Draw the black arc All arcs are part of the same circle ArcRect All objects in the chart are grouped Group ID lt ArcTheta 0 gt lt ArcDTheta 58 gt Continue clockwise around the chart lt ArcTheta 58 gt lt ArcDTheta 77 gt Theta 108 gt Theta 66 gt Theta 51 gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 236 MIF Reference so they have so they have the the Define the group for all the objects to make the chart to manipulate after it s imported into a FrameMaker document FrameMaker provides eight predefined dashed line options You can define a custom pattern for dashed lines by using the DashedPattern statement within an Object statement This example is in the file custdash mif lt MIFFile 2015 gt lt PolyLine lt Pen 0 gt lt Fill 15 gt lt PenWidth 4pt lt ObColor Bla gt ck gt lt DashedPattern
131. RAMEMAKER 255 MIF Reference Filter By Attribute Elements in a structured document can have one or more attributes associated with them Using structured FrameMaker you can filter a structured document based on the value of these attributes The Filter by Attribute feature simplifies the task of filtering a structured document for complex output scenarios You create a filter using the De fAttrValuesCatalog DefAttrValues AttrCondExprCatalog and AttrCondExpr statements Track edited text FrameMaker documents sent for review can be edited with the Track Text Edit feature enabled In a MIF file the Track Text Edit feature is enabled using the DTrackChangeson Boolean statement Before you accept all text edits you can choose to preview the final document with all the text edits incorporated in the document Alternatively you can preview the original document without the text edits incorporated in the document You use the DTrackChangesPreviewState statement to preview the document Boolean condition expression You can build Boolean expressions with complex combinations of condition tags and Boolean operators to generate conditional output In a MIF file Boolean condition expressions are defined using a Bool Cond statement The BoolCond statement defines a new Boolean condition expression which is used to evaluate the show hide state of conditional text This statement appears in the BoolCondCatalog statement New Book and Document re
132. Ref Number gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell vFill lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String InventoryJName gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag CellBody gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Beans Description gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell vFill lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag DEE EE aa es Tepe ek RR ope ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 245 MIF Reference Number gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String String Inventory Bags gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell vFill lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Inventory Status gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell vFill lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag Number gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt Conditional lt InCondition Retail gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt String String Inventory Price per Bag 00 gt SEND PACKET vDoc lt Conditional lt InCondition Discount gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt String String vDiscPrice 00 gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Unconditional gt gt gt gt gt gt CR MESSAGE Generating MIF for InventoryJName Status Inventory Status NEXT RECORD Inventory End for SEND PACKET vDoc gt gt gt CR End of table
133. Section numbering keyword can be one of StartNumbering restart numbering Cont inueNumbering continue numbering from previous component UseSameNumber ing use the same numbering as previous component ReadFromFi le use numbering set for the component s docu ment Sub section numbering lt SubSectionNumStart integer gt Starting Sub section number lt SubSectionNumStyle keyword gt Style of Sub section numbering keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt SubSectionNumText string gt When SubSectionNumStyle issetto Custom this is the string to use lt SubSectionNumComputeMethod keyword gt Sub section numbering keyword can be one of StartNumbering restart numbering Cont inueNumbering continue numbering from previous component UseSameNumber ing use the same numbering as previous component ReadFromFi le use numbering set for the component s docu ment Page numbering ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 99 MIF Reference lt DPageNumStyle keyword gt Page numbering style keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha ZenLCAlpha ZenUCAlpha KanjiNumeric KanjiKazu BusinessKazu lt DPagePointStyle keyword gt Point pag
134. Slastpagenum gt gt gt end of VariableFormat System variables contain building blocks that provide certain information to FrameMaker These building blocks are preceded by a dollar sign and can only appear in system variables Some system variables have restrictions on which building blocks they can contain These restrictions are discussed in your user s manual and in the online Help system You can add any text and character formatting to any system variable Inserting variables To insert a user variable or a system variable in text use the variable statement The following example inserts the system variable Page Count into a paragraph lt Para lt ParaLine lt String This document has gt lt Variable lt VariableName Page Count gt gt end of Variable lt String pages gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para The variableName string must match the name of a variable format defined in the variableFormats statement Variables are subject to the following restrictions e You cannot place any variable in a tagged text flow on a master page e The system variable current Page and the system variables for running headers and footers can only appear in untagged text flows on a master page e The system variables Table Continuation and Table Sheet can only appear in tables ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 40 MIF Reference Creating conditional text You can produce several slightly different versions of a document f
135. Symbol 1 0 G O g od o G H U A z H oO aq Go U H oA B 8 HM TU a4 06 MOM HuxoHAH NM qaqa 00000 0 09 H H H HH E E 4 4 00068106 000 AAAAA K AANU 1 11 3 00000 0 00100000 225 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 226 MIF Reference In the preceding example a line break can occur between a character in the EndParentheses class and a character in the NonSeparableChar class because the value o Line break is allowed is in the seventh position which is the column position for the NonSeparableChar class of characters ExtraSpaceTable statement The ExtraSpaceTable statement defines how to add extra space between characters when needed for full justifi cation There are 25 statement rows in this table each corresponding to the 25 character classes respectively There are 25 numeric values in each statement row Each value corresponds to one of the 25 character classes respec tively These values specify how to add space after a character of the class identified by the row statement when followed by a character of the class identified by the column position Syntax lt ExtraSpaceTable lt BegParentheses numerals gt lt EndParentheses numerals gt lt NoLineBeginChar numerals gt lt QuestionBang numerals gt lt CenteredPunct numerals gt lt PeriodComma numerals gt lt NonSeparableChar numerals gt lt PrecedingSymbol numerals gt lt SucceedingSymbol numeral
136. USEnglish UKEnglish German SwissGerman French CanadianFrench Spanish Catalan Italian Portuguese Brazilian Danish Dutch Norwegian Nynorsk Finnish Swedish Japanese TraditionalChinese SimplifiedChinese Korean Arabic Hebrew A PgfTopSeparator string gt Name of reference frame from reference page to put above paragraph lt PgfTopSepAtIndent boolean gt Used for structured documents only lt PgfTopSepOffset dimension gt Used for structured documents only PgfBoxColor string gt The background color for the entire box that surrounds a paragraph A PgfBotSeparator string gt Name of reference frame from reference page to put below paragraph A PgfBotSepAtIndent boolean gt Used for structured documents only A A PgfBotSepOffset dimension gt Used for structured documents only Table cell properties PgfCellAlignment keyword gt Vertical alignment for first paragraph in a cell A keyword can be one of Top Middle Bottom PgfCellMargins L T R B gt Cell margins for first paragraph in a cell A PgfCellLMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means left cell margin is added to To1CellMargins No means left cell margin overrides Tp1CellMargins A PgfCellTMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means top cell margin is added to To1CellMargins No means top cell margin overrides Tpb1CellMargins A A PgfCellRMarginFixed boolean gt Yes means right cell margin
137. ViewRect takes precedence over DWindowRect lt DWindowRect X Y W H gt Position and size of document window based on the containing window including the title bar etc lt DViewScale percentage gt Current zoom setting ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 96 MIF Reference Column properties lt DMargins LTR B gt Not generated by FrameMaker but used by filters to specify text margins ignored unless DColumns is specified lt DColumns integer gt Not generated by FrameMaker but used by filters to specify number of columns lt DColumnGap dimension gt Not generated by FrameMaker but used by filters to specify column gap lt DPageSize W H gt Document s default page size and orientation if W is less than H the document s orientation is portrait otherwise it is landscape Volume chapter and page numbering properties Volume numbering lt VolumeNumStart integer gt Starting volume number lt VolumeNumStyle keyword gt Style of volume numbering keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt VolumeNumText string gt When VolumeNumsStyle is set to Custom this is the string to use lt VolNumComputeMethod keyword gt Volume numbering keyword can be one of StartNumbering restart numbering ContinueNumbering co
138. WordSpace 90 gt Minimum Word Spacing lt PgfOptWordSpace 100 gt Optimum Word Spacing lt PgfMaxWordSpace 110 gt Maximum Word Spacing lt PgfLetterSpace Yes gt Allow Automatic Letter Spacing lt PgfTopSeparator gt Frame Above 1 lt PgfBotSeparator gt Frame Below 1 The Asian properties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer m Ae oe S Paragraph Tag Numbered Westem Asian Spacing of Font Size Minimum 0 0 Optimum 25 0 Maximum 50 0 Asian Character Spacing of Font Size Minimum 0 0 Optimum 0 0 Maximum 10 0 Asian Punctuation Squeeze as Necessary Use Asian Composer Asian properties Commands Update Al Reset The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 18 MIF Reference In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfMinJRomanLetterSpace percentage gt Minimum Western Asian Spacing lt PgfOptJRomanLetterSpace percentage gt Optimum Western Asian Spacing lt PgfMaxJRomanLetterSpace percentage gt Maximum Western Asian Spacing lt PgfMinJLetterSpace percentage gt Minimum Asian Character Spacing lt PgfOptJLetterSpace percentage gt Optimum Asian Character Spacing lt PgfMaxJLetterSpace percentage gt Maximum Asian Character Spacing lt PgfYakumonoType string gt Asian Punctuation The Table Cell proper
139. _type amp path for facet file EndInset For example the following lines describe the remote facet described in the application data file diagrams BlockDiagram application name facet amp amp V amp diagrams BlockDiagram EndInset Example of graphic inset file The following example is the external graphic inset file generated by the fmbitmap program which is shipped with the UNIX version of the FDK The graphic inset file is named tmp default fi The application specific facet for this graphic inset the file generated by the fmbitmap program is stored in a remote facet in the file tmp default ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 274 MIF Reference Note that although the fmbitmap program writes out the ImportobFile statement this statement is obsolete and is only used with older versions of FrameMaker When defining a function to write a graphic inset file use the ImportObFileDI statement and specify a device independent pathname For more information on device independent pathnames see Device independent pathnames on page 7 lt MIFFile 2015 gt Generated by fmbitmap lt ImportObject lt ImportObFile tmp default fi gt lt ImportObEditor fmbitmap gt BitmapFile facet amp SV amp tmp default Data facet amp i amp 64 amp 64 amp 1 amp 1 FrameImage amp SV amp X amp ia amp NX EndInset To see more examples of the graphic inset format you can import a graphic into a FrameMaker document im
140. a gt lt String text flow tagged A gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow End of MIFFile A text flow must be tagged and it must include lt TFAutoConnect Yes otherwise when the user adds text to the document FrameMaker wont create additional pages and text frames to hold the added text Creating a simple page layout If you want some control of the page layout but do not want to create master pages you can use the Document substatements DPageSize DMargins and DColumns to specify the page size margins and number of columns in the text frame in the document The MIF interpreter uses this information to create master pages and body pages These statements correspond to the Normal Page Layout options The following example is in the sample file columlay mif lt MIFFile 2015 gt Hand generated lt Document lt DPageSize 7 5 9 0 gt Set the page size lt DMargins 2 1 5 5 gt Set the margins lt DColumns 1 gt Set the number of columns in the default text frame lt DTwoSides No gt Set document to single sided gt end of Document lt TextFlow Document text is in this text flow lt TFTag A gt Make this a tagged text flow lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt Automatically connect text frames lt Para ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 33 MIF Reference lt ParaLine lt String This paragraph appears on a body page within a gt lt String text flow tagged A gt end of Pa
141. able formats in the Table Catalog Table instances can always override the applied format The Tb1NumColumns statement specifies the number of columns in the table instance It is required in every table The Tb1H Tb1Body and Tb1F statements contain the table heading body and footer rows If a table does not have a heading or footing omit the statements Here s an example of a simple table that uses a default format from the Table Catalog The table has one heading row one body row and no footing rows Coffee Price per Bag Brazil Santos 455 00 You can use the following MIF statements to create this simple table lt MIFFile 2015 gt lt Tbls lt Tbl lt TblID 1 gt ID for this table lt TblTag Format A gt Applies format from Table Catalog lt TblNumColumns 2 gt Number of columns in this table lt TblColumnWidth 2 0 gt Width of first column lt TblColumnWidth 1 5 gt Width of second column lt TblH Begin table heading lt Row Begin row lt Cell First cell in row lt CellContent lt Para Cells can contain paragraphs lt PgfTag CellHeading gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt ParaLine ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 26 MIF Reference lt String Coffee gt Text in this cell end of Para end of CellContent end of Cell Second cell in row lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt lt ParaLine lt String Price per Bag gt HH H OH end of
142. ags bool Yes displays descriptive text against elements in the element ean gt catalog for the document lt DAttributeDisplay keyword gt Default attribute display setting for document keyword can be one of AllAttributes display all attributes ReqAndSpec display required and specified attributes None don t display attributes lt DAttrEditor keyword gt When Edit Attributes dialog box appears for new elements keyword can be one of Never never Always always WhenRequired when there are required attributes lt DElementBordersOn boolean gt Yes turns on element borders in document window This state mentand DElementTags are mutually exclusive If both state ments appear ina MIF file the later statement overrides the earlier one lt DElementTags boolean gt Yes turns on element tags in document window This statement and DElementBordersOn are mutually exclusive If both statements appear in a MIF file the later statement overrides the earlier one lt DBannerTextOn boolean gt Yes turns on banner text for tags in document window lt DUseInitStructure boolean gt Yes means structured FrameMaker inserts initial structure for new elements ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt DUseInitStructureRecursively bool ean gt True means inserting an element in a structured document will allow its child element or elements with their hierarchy to be inserted as defined in the EDD lt DSGMLAppName string gt
143. ains a record to identify the filter that was used to import the graphic by reference FrameMaker uses the record to find the correct filter to reimport the graphic when a user opens the document again Note that for graphics imported by copy FrameMaker uses the facet name stored with the graphic The ImportHint statement is not written for graphics imported by copy The record specified by the ImportHint statement uses the following syntax record vers vendor format id platform filter vers filter name Note that the fields in the record are not separated by spaces For example 0001PGRFPICTMAC61 0 Built in PICT reader The rest of this section describes each field in the record record versis the version on the record for example 0001 vendor is a code specifying the filter s vendor The code is a string of four characters The following table lists some of the possible codes Code Description PGRF Built in FrameMaker filters FAPI External FDK client filter FFLT External FrameMaker filters IMAG External ImageMark filters XTND External XTND filters Note that this is not a comprehensive list of codes Codes may be added to this list by Adobe or by developers at your Site format_id is a code specifying the format that the filter translates The code is a string of four characters The following table lists some of the possible codes Code Description PICT Q
144. al statements as needed gt End of Attributes statement lt UserString string gt A string in which clients can store private data can be up to 1023 char acters in length End of ElementBegin statement lt ElementEnd tagstring gt End of specified element MIF Reference 174 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 175 MIF Reference Usage FrameMaker writes out the tagstring value in an ElementEnd statement for use by filters Your application does not need to supply the tagstring value when it writes MIF files If the interpreter reads unbalanced ElementBegin and ElementEnd statements it ignores superfluous element ends and closes all open elements at the end of a Text Flow statement If the interpreter reads a flow that does not have an element enclosing all of the flow s contents it creates a highest level element with the tag NoName ElementBegin and ElementEnd statements are nested within ParaLine and BookElements statements The following example shows how FrameMaker writes an UnorderedList element lt Para lt PgfTag Bullet gt The autonumber contains a bullet and a tab lt PgfNumString e t gt lt ParaLine Note that the ElementBegin statement is nested inside both the Para and ParaLine statements lt ElementBegin lt ETag UnorderedList gt lt Collapsed No gt lt SpecialCase No gt gt end of ElementBegin lt ElementBegin lt ETag Item gt lt Collapsed No gt lt SpecialC
145. allowed in document lt PgfLIndent dimension gt Minimum left indent allowed in document lt PgfRIndent dimension gt Minimum right indent allowed in document lt PgfSpBefore dimension gt Minimum space before allowed in document lt PgfSpAfter dimension gt Minimum space after allowed in document lt PgfLeading dimension gt Minimum leading allowed in document lt FSize dimension gt Minimum font size allowed in document lt FDW dimension gt Minimum character spread allowed in document lt TSX dimension gt Minimum horizontal position of tab stop lt PgfCellLMargin dimension gt Minimum left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellBMargin dimension gt Minimum bottom cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellTMargin dimension gt Minimum top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellRMargin dimension gt Minimum right cell margin for first paragraph in a cell Endof DFCLMinimums statement lt WEBDAV lt DocServerUrl string gt URL of the MIF file on the WEBDAV Server Any HTTP path is valid Example lt DocServerUrl http mikej xp joewebdav myfile mif gt http mikej xp joewebdav is the path of the server MIF Reference 180 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt DocServerState gt Valid values Checkedout if checked out CheckedIn if not checked out gt End of WEBDAV Document statement g
146. ame amp data type amp facet data EndInset gt A MIF ImportObEditor statement names the main editor for application specific facets in the graphic inset file A MIF ImportObFileDI statement specifies the device independent pathname for the graphic inset file For more information on device independent pathnames see the section Device independent pathnames on page 7 Internal graphic insets An internal graphic inset is entirely contained within FrameMaker document file Once the link is established the graphic inset data exists only in FrameMaker document Users can access the graphic only through FrameMaker To edit an internal graphic inset users must open FrameMaker document select the graphic inset and choose the Graphic Inset command from the Special menu FrameMaker writes the graphic inset to a temporary file and instructs your application to edit it Your graphic application FrameMaker document with internal graphic inset Internal graphic insets are best suited for environments in which portability of FrameMaker document across different types of systems is most important When FrameMaker creates temporary files for internal graphic insets the temporary files have the following format lt MIFFile 2015 gt lt ImportObject lt ImportObEditor inset editor name gt lt ImportObFile 2 0 internal inset gt facet name amp data type amp facet data facet
147. ameter that was specified in the XML declara tion when the XML file was opened determines whether or not the XML document requires a DTD A DXmlStyleSheet string gt lt BXmlStyleSheet string gt The URI for the stylesheet associated with the imported XML docu ment DXmlUseBOM int gt lt BXmlUseBOM int gt A The Byte Order Mark that was specified in the imported XML docu ment DXmlWellFormed int gt lt BXmlWellFormed int gt A Indicates whether the XML document was wellformed or not lt DXmlVersion string gt lt BXmlVersion string gt The XML version that was specified in the XML declaration when the XML file was opened 177 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 178 MIF Reference Preference settings for structured documents Document statement In addition to document preferences for standard FrameMaker documents see Document statement on page 87 the MIF Document statement describes preferences for structured FrameMaker documents Syntax lt Document See page 87 lt DElementCatalogScope keyword gt Validation scope keyword can be one of Strict Loose Children All CustomList lt DCustomElementList List of tags to display when DElementCatalogScope spec ifies CustomList A EDTag string gt Element definition name A EDTag string gt Additional statements as needed gt Endof DCustomElementList statement lt DShowElementDescriptiveT
148. an be nested within one another the MIF interpreter examines all characters following an angle bracket until it finds the corresponding angle bracket that ends the comment lt Comment The following statements define the paragraph formats gt lt Comment lt These statements have been removed lt Font lt FBold gt lt FItalic gt gt gt gt The MIF interpreter processes number signs within Comment statements as normal comments ignoring the remainder of the line lt Comment When a number sign appears within a lt Comment gt statement the MIF interpreter ignores the rest of the characters in that line including angle brackets lt gt gt End of lt Comment gt Statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 55 MIF Reference Macro statements MIF has two statements that allow you to define macros and include information from other files Although these statements usually appear near the beginning of a MIF file you need not put them in that position However the MIF interpreter does not interpret a macro that occurs before its definition define statement The define statement creates a macro When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it replaces the macro name with its replacement text A define statement can appear anywhere in a MIF file however the macro definition must appear before any occurrences of the macro name Syntax define name replacement Creates a macro Usage Once a macro has been defined you can
149. an use MIF to perform custom document processing For example you can create a program or write a series of text editor macros to search for and change paragraph tags in a MIF file You can also edit a MIF book file to easily add or change document names in a book For an example of using MIF to easily update the values in a table see Updating several values in a table on page 240 Writing filters MIF allows you to write filters to convert data from other formats to FrameMaker format and to convert a MIF file to another document format While FrameMaker will change in future versions MIF will always remain compatible with earlier versions so your filters can continue to write MIF files Import filters MIF statements can completely describe a FrameMaker document or book file Because documents created with most word processors and text editors have fewer features than a FrameMaker document your import filters normally use only a subset of MIF statements To write an import filter first determine which MIF statements describe the format of the input file Then write a program to translate the file from its original file format to MIF If the imported document doesn t use sophisticated formatting and layout features don t include the corresponding MIF statements in your filter For example if the file was created by a word processor your filter should convert document text to a single TextFlow statement Ignore line and page breaks e
150. and lt DViewOnlySelect Useronly gt is specified clicking a cross reference does not highlight the marker However the user can select text in the locked document When cross references are active and lt DViewOnlySelect No is specified clicking a cross reference does not highlight the marker The user cannot select text in the locked document By default clicking a cross reference does not highlight the marker associated with the destination text but the user can select text in the locked document Disabling commands You can disable specific commands in a View Only document For example a hypertext author might disable copy and print commands for sensitive documents To disable a command you must supply the hex code called an fcode that internally represents that command in FrameMaker For example you can disable printing copying and unlocking the document by supplying the following statements lt DViewOnlyNoOp 0x313 gt Disable printing lt DViewOnlyNoOp 0x322 gt Disable copying lt DViewOnlyNoOp 0xF00 gt Disable unlocking the document The following table lists the files where you can find fcodes for commands For this version Look here UNIX FMHOME fminit language configui Commands where language is the language in use Such as usenglish Windows install dir fminit configui cmds cfg where install diris the directory where FrameMaker is installed See the online manual Customizing FrameMaker
151. ank tops gt lt Unconditional gt gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow This text flow contains the hidden conditional text lt Text Flow lt TFTag HIDDEN gt lt Para lt PgfEndCond Yes gt lt ParaLine lt Marker lt MType 10 gt This marker shows the beginning of hidden text Its ID matches the marker ID in the body text flow lt MText 88793 gt lt MCurrPage 0 gt gt end of Marker lt Conditional lt InCondition Winter gt gt end of Conditional Here s the hidden text lt String chilly winter gt lt Marker lt MType 10 gt This marker shows the end of hidden text It must match the marker that begins with a minus sign lt MText 88793 gt lt MCurrPage 0 gt gt end of Marker p gt f end of Para gt end of TextFlow ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 43 MIF Reference Creating filters Structured FrameMaker allows specific components in a structured document to be processed differently to generate different output formats Consider a case where you want some text in a document to be included in the Print output but not in the HTML Help output You can create a filter based on the values of the attributes of elements and process only those elements in the document that match the filter and include such elements in the Print output Ina MIF file you create a filter required for generating the output of a structured document using the DefAttrval uesCatalog DefAttrValues AttrCondExpr
152. ard compatibility see Color statements on page 263 lt CellLRuling tagstring gt Left edge ruling style from Ruling Catalog lt CellBRuling tagstring gt Bottom edge ruling style lt CellRRuling tagstring gt Right edge ruling style lt CellTRuling tagstring gt Top edge ruling style lt CellColumns integer gt Number of columns in a straddle cell lt CellRows integer gt Number of rows in a straddle cell lt CellAffectsColumnWidthA boolean gt Yes restricts column width to cell width ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 81 MIF Reference lt CellAngle degrees gt Angle of rotation in degrees 0 90 180 or 270 lt CellContent Cell s content lt Notes gt Footnotes for cell see page 130 lt Para gt Cell s content represented in one or more Para statements see page 131 lt Para gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Cel 1Content statement gt End of Ce11 statement Usage You can use the Rotate command on the Graphics menu to change the cellangle but it does not affect the location of cell margins cellangle affects only the orientation and alignment of the text flow When cellangle is 90 or 270 degrees use PgfCellAlignment to move vertically oriented text closer to or farther from a column edge For infor mation about aligning text in a cell see PgfCellAlignment on page 64 MIF uses Cell Affect sColumnWidtha only with the Tb1columnwidtha statement
153. art of a book A BookComponent statement can contain one or more DeriveTag statements Syntax lt BookComponent Book components lt FileName pathname gt Generated file s device independent pathname for pat hname syntax see page 7 lt FileNameSuffix string gt Suffix for the generated file lt DeriveType keyword gt Type of generated file keyword can be one of AML alphabetic marker list APL alphabetic paragraph list IDX index IOA author index IOM index of markers IOS subject index IR index of references LOF list of figures LOM list of markers LOP list of paragraphs LOT list of tables LR list of references TOC table of contents lt DeriveTag tagstring gt Tags to include in the generated file lt DeriveLinks boolean gt Yes automatically creates hypertext links in generated files gt End of BookComponent statement InitialAutoNums statement The InitialAutoNums statement controls the starting values for autonumber series in a document A MIF file can have onlyone InitialAutoNums statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 An autonumber format includes a series label to identify the type of autonumber series and one or more counters The InitialAutoNums statement initializes the counters so that series that continue across files in a book are numbered correctly Any statement that increments the cou
154. ase No gt gt end of ElementBegin lt String Light rail provides transportation for those who gt gt lt ParaLine lt String are unable to drive or cannot afford an automobile gt lt ElementEnd Item gt gt f end of Para lt Para lt PgfTag Bullet gt lt PgfNumString e t gt lt ParaLine lt ElementBegin lt ETag Item gt lt Collapsed No gt lt SpecialCase No gt gt end of ElementBegin lt String Light rail lures commuters away from rush hour traffic gt Again note that both the Item and Bulletlist elements end before the end of the Para and ParaLine statements lt ElementEnd Item gt lt ElementEnd UnorderedList gt gt end of Para PrefixEnd and SuffixBegin statements The PrefixEnd statement appears after the ElementBegin statement and any prefix strings the element has Every thing between the ElementBegin statement and the PrefixEnd statement is treated as the element prefix The PrefixEnd statement does not appear when the element has no prefix ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 176 MIF Reference The suffixBegin statement appears before the element suffix string which is followed by the ElementEnd statement Everything between the suffixBegin statement and the ElementEnd statement is treated as the element suffix The ElementEnd statement does not appear when the element has no suffix Banner text Banner text in a FrameMaker file instructs you about what to enter in an element Banner te
155. atalog Begin Element Catalog lt ElementDef gt Element definitions defined on page 157 lt ElementDef gt Additional statements as needed End of ElementDefCatalog statement Usage MIF Reference The book file inherits the Element Catalog from the document used to generate the book file or from a document given as the source for the Import gt Element Definitions command In a MIF file you should copy the Element Catalog from one of the structure documents included in the book BookSettings statement The BookSett ings statement contains the definitions of all elements in the book file A book file can have only one BookSettings statement It normally appears near the beginning of the file The statements in the BookSettings statement correspond to statements in the BookSett ings statement except that they begin with the letter B instead of the letter D Syntax lt BookSettings Begin book settings lt BElementCatalogScope keyword gt Validation scope keyword can be one of Strict Loose Children All CustomList lt BCustomElementList List of tags to display when BElementCatalogScope specifies CustomList A EDTag string gt Element definition name A EDTag string gt Additional statements as needed gt End of DCustomElementList statement lt BShowElementDescriptiveTags boolean gt Yes displays descriptive text again
156. atalog is not included in the lt Document gt block but is in a block of its own Each Asian language can have its own Kumihan tables This means that one Kumihan catalog can have up to four sets of tables one set for each of the four supported Asian languages Japanese Traditional Chinese SimpleChinese and Korean ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Syntax lt KumihanCatalog lt Kumihan Defines a Kumihan table set lt Kumihan Additional Kumihan table sets as needed one for each Asian language up to four per document End of KumihanCatalog statement Kumihan statement The kumihan statement defines a set of Kumihan tables A document can have one set of tables for each of the four supported Asian languages Syntax lt Kumihan Defines a Kumihan table lt Klanguage keyword gt The language for this table keyword can be one of Japanese TraditionalChinese SimpleChinese Korean lt CharClass Defines character class assignments lt SqueezeTable Defines the squeeze table lt SpreadTable Defines the spread table lt LineBreakTable Defines the line break table lt ExtraSpaceTable Defines the extra space table CharClass statement The CharClass statement assigns individual characters to one of 25 classes The JIS standard recognizes 20 classes and MIF includes an additional five classes Spare1 through Spare5 so you can assign characters cu
157. atement under paragraph properties identifies the side heads and the Text Rect statement contains specifications for their size and placement For information about text flow properties see your user s manual Notes statement The Notes statement defines all of the footnotes that will be used in a table title cell or text flow It can appear at the top level or at the beginning of a TolTitleContent CellContent or Text Flow statement 130 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Syntax lt Notes lt FNote lt ID ID Unique ID lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters lt Font gt Changes font as needed see PgfFont and Font statements on page 66 lt Para gt Footnote text see Para statement next lt Para gt Additional statements as needed gt End of FNote statement lt FNote gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Notes statement Usage Within the document text footnotes are referred to with the lt FNote ID statement where ID is the ID specified in the corresponding FNote statement See ParaLine statement on page 132 Para statement The Para statement defines a paragraph It can appear in a Text Flow FNote CellContent or Tb1TitleContent statement In simple MIF files without page or document statements such as the hello mif sample fi
158. atement Infinity lt MathFullForm num Infinity Infinity gt NaN lt MathFullForm num NaN NaN gt NaN means not a number These forms of num usually result from computations string string contains a character string Character strings must be enclosed in straight double quotation marks To include characters in the extended ASCII range above 0x127 use a backslash sequence see Character set in strings on page 7 To include a straight double quotation mark precede the quotation mark with a straight double quotation mark 197 Example MathFullForm statement FrameMath lt MathFullForm string FrameMath gt using quotes lt MathFullForm string using quotes gt char char describes a character Example MathFullForm statement X lt MathFullForm char x gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference The char expression can contain one of the letters a through z one of the letters A through Z a custom math element or one of the character names shown in the following table Example MathFullForm statement N lt MathFullForm char aleph gt a lt MathFullForm char alpha gt B lt MathFullForm char beta gt di lt MathFullForm char bot gt x lt MathFullForm char chi gt lt MathFullForm char cpartial
159. atement that corresponds to each Frame statement The AFrame statement identifies where a specific anchored frame appears in a text flow it need only supply the frame s ID number Tbls Describes all tables in the document The Tb1s statement contains Tb1 statements that define the contents of each table and its ID number Later in the MIF file where the docu ment contents are described the MIF file must include a short ATb1 statement that corre sponds to each Tb1 statement The ATb1 statement identifies where a specific table appears in a text flow it need only supply the table s ID number Page Describes the layout of each page in the document The description includes the layout of each page the dimensions of the text frames and the objects and other graphic frames on that page A MIF file created by FrameMaker includes a Page statement for each page in the document including the master pages When you write an import filter you can omit Page statements the MIF interpreter repaginates the document as needed InlineComponentsInfo Describes the mini table of contents mini TOC in the document The InlineCompo nent sInfo statement contains InlineComponent Info statement that define the properties of the mini TOC MIF Reference ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 54 MIF Reference Statement Description TextFlow Represents the actual text in the document Within Text Flow statements the text is expressed in pa
160. atively you can preview the original document without the text edits incorporated in the document To preview how a document will appear if you accept all text edits or reject all text edits use the DTrackChangesPreviewState statement Syntax lt DTrackChangesOn boolean gt Preserves the On Off state of the Track Text Edit feature lt DTrackChangesPreviewState integer gt Preserves the preview state of the Track Text Edit feature The preview state can have one of the following values Preview Off DTrackChangesPreviewState set with the value No Preview On Final DTrackChangesPreviewState set with the value Al 1 Preview On Original DTrackChangesPreviewState set with the value Yes lt DTrackChangesReviewerName string gt The windows unix login name of the reviewer whose edits are visible in the document The Show Reviewer Name popup menu lets you select the name of the reviewer whose changes you want to display in the document The reviewer s name selected in the Show Reviewer Name popup menu appears in this tag When you select All Users this tag is empty lt ReviewerName string gt The windows unix login name of the reviewer who made a particular change lt ReviewTimeInfo string gt The time when an edit was made The number of seconds past after 00 00 hours Jan 1 1970 UTC Conditional text FrameMaker documents can contain conditional text In a MIF file the condition tags are defined by a Conditio
161. ats lt VariableFormat lt VariableName lt VariableDef 90 Revenue gt 2 342 165 gt 240 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 241 MIF Reference lt VariableFormat lt VariableName 91 Revenue gt lt VariableDef 3 145 365 gt gt gt When you import the MIF file into the document that contains the table FrameMaker updates the variables in the table Database publishing This database publishing example shows how to use the data storage and manipulation capabilities of a database and the formatting capabilities of FrameMaker through MIE In this example inventory information for a coffee distributor is stored in a database Database fields contain a reference number the type of coffee the number of bags in inventory the current inventory status and the price per bag A sales representative creates an up to date report on the coffee inventory by using a customized dialog box in the database application to select the category of information and sort order Publish Price List p Sales FR veven Name Darrell Dexter Phone 800 555 1212 Discount i ejection eee Select Sort All Offerings By Coffee ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference When the sales representative clicks Publish a database procedure scans the database retrieves the requested infor mation and writes a MIF file that contains all of the information in a fully formatted document The final document looks like this GREEN COFFEE PRICE LIST Te avatar
162. before number in document footnote lt DFNoteNumberSuffix string gt Suffix after number in document footnote Table footnote properties 100 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt DTbIFNoteTag string gt Same meaning for the following statements as the corresponding document footnote properties lt DTbIFNoteLabels string gt lt DTbIFNoteNumStyle keyword gt lt DTbIFNoteAnchorPos keyword gt lt DTbIFNoteNumberPos keyword gt lt DTbIFNoteAnchorPrefix string gt lt DTbIFNoteAnchorSuffix string gt lt DTbIFNoteNumberPrefix string gt lt DTbIFNoteNumberSuffix string gt Change bar properties lt DChBarGap dimension gt Change bar distance from column lt DChBarWidth dimension gt Thickness of change bar lt DChBarPosition keyword gt Position of change bar keyword can be one of LeftOofCol RightOfCol NearestEdge FurthestEdge lt DChBarColor tagstring gt Change bar color see ColorCatalog statement on page 83 lt DAutoChBars boolean gt Turns automatic change bars on or off Document view properties lt DGridOn boolean gt Turns on page grid upon opening lt DPageGrid dimension gt Spacing of page grid lt DSnapGrid dimension gt Spacing of snap grid lt DSnapRotation degrees gt Angle of rotation snap lt DRulersOn boolean gt Turns on rulers upon opening lt DFullRu
163. bjects created with the drawing tools on the Tools palette arcs arrows ellipses polygons polylines rectangles and rounded rectangles e Math equations e Groups e Imported graphic images such as xwd TIFF bitmap images or vector images Ina MIF file graphic objects are defined by object and Frame statements Object refers to any MIF statement that describes an object such as Arc Text Line or TextRect Generally these objects are created and manipulated by using the Tools palette in a FrameMaker document This section describes general information that pertains to all graphic objects and then lists the MIF statements for graphic objects in alphabetic order Object positioning Each Page statement has nested within it object and Frame statements If a graphic frame contains objects and other graphic frames the graphic frames and objects are listed in the order that they are drawn object in back first For Object and Frame statements the interpreter keeps track of the current page and current graphic frame When the interpreter encounters a Frame statement it assumes the graphic frame is on the current page Similarly when the interpreter encounters an object statement it assumes the object is in the current graphic frame or page 110 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 111 MIF Reference When you open a MIF file as a FrameMaker document the default current page is page 1 and the default current frame is the page frame for page 1 A page
164. ble contains an example of each expression with optional operands Example MathFullForm statement Vx lt MathFullForm grad char x gt Vol lt MathFullForm grad num 1 1 num 2 2 gt logx lt MathFullForm log char x gt log x lt MathFullForm log char x char x gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER Example MathFullForm statement lt MathFullForm oppartial char x gt Ox ar lt MathFullForm oppartial char x char x gt Ox lt MathFullForm optotal char x gt dx a lt MathFullForm optotal char x char x gt dx Ja lt MathFullForm sqrt char x gt ae lt MathFullForm sqrt char x char x gt X x lt MathFullForm substitution char x gt x lt MathFullForm substitution char x char x gt x lt MathFullForm substitution char x char x char x gt x For partial and full differentials such as 2 and see page 205 Ix Indexes X There are three expressions for describing indexes indexes chem and tensor MIF Reference indexes The indexes expression describes any number of subscripts and superscripts The first operand is the number of superscripts and the second operand is the number of subscripts Subsequent operands define the subscripts and then the superscripts Note Note that the number of superscripts is listed before the number of subscripts However supe
165. ble relative to the table s containing text column has no effect on right aligned tables lt TblRIndent dimension gt Right indent for the table relative to the table s containing text column has no effect on left aligned tables lt TblSpBefore dimension gt Space above table lt TblSpAfter dimension gt Space below table lt TblAlignment keyword gt Horizontal alignment within text column or text frame keyword can be one of Left Center Right Inside Outside See page 77 lt TblPlacement keyword gt Vertical placement of table within text column keyword can be one of Anywhere Float ColumnTop PageTop LPageTop RPageTop lt TblBlockSize integer gt Widow orphan rows for body rows lt TblCellMargins L T R B gt Left top right bottom default cell margins lt TblTitlePlacement keyword gt Table title placement keyword can be one of InHeader InFooter None lt TblTitlePgf1i Paragraph format of title for a new table created with the table format lt PgfTag tagstring gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt Pgf gt Overrides Paragraph Catalog format as needed see page 61 gt End of Tb1TitlePgf1 statement lt TblTitleGap dimension gt Gap between title and top or bottom row ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 75 MIF Reference lt TblNumByColumn boolean gt Autonumber paragraphs in cells Yes numbers down each column and No numbers across each row lt TblDir keyword gt Direction of the table keyword can be one of LTR The
166. bout working with MIF files including opening and saving MIF files in FrameMaker It goes on to provide detailed information about the MIF language and its syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 2 MIF Reference For an introduction to writing MIF files read Using MIF Statements You can then use the statement index subject index and table of contents to locate more specific information about a particular MIF statement For a description of a MIF statement use the table of contents or statement index to locate the statement For a description of the differences between the MIF statements for this version of FrameMaker and earlier versions see MIF Compatibility Style conventions This manual uses different fonts to represent different types of information e What you type is shown in text like this MIF statement names pathnames and filenames are also shown in text like this e Placeholders such as MIF data are shown in text like this e For example the statement description for PgfTag is shown as lt PgfTag tagstring gt e You replace tagstring with the tag of a paragraph format This manual also uses the term FrameMaker as in FrameMaker document or FrameMaker session to refer to FrameMaker and to refer to structured or unstructured documents Overview of MIF statements When you are learning about MIF statements you may find it useful to understand how FrameMaker represents documents How MIF statements rep
167. by the PageTag statement appear in the status bar of a document window The PageBackground statement names the master page to use as the background for a body page A value of Default tells FrameMaker to use the right master page for single sided documents and to alternate between the right and left master pages for a two sided document For more information about applying master page layouts to body pages see Specifying page layout on page 31 A page of type HiddenPage contains the document s hidden conditional text See How FrameMaker writes a conditional document on page 41 A page s size and orientation landscape or portrait is determined by the PageAngle statement and the Document substatement DPageSize If DPageSize defines a portrait page one whose height is greater than its width pages with an angle of 0 or 180 degrees are portrait pages with an angle of 90 or 270 degrees are landscape If DpageSize defines a landscape page one whose width is greater than its height pages with an angle of 0 or 180 degrees are landscape pages with an angle of 90 or 270 degrees are portrait The filter statements are not generated by FrameMaker When it reads a MIF file generated by a filter the MIF inter preter uses these statements to set up columns and text flows on master pages Mini TOC FrameMaker document can contain a mini TOC Ina MIF file a mini TOC tag is defined in an InlineComponen tsInfo statement InlineComponentsIn
168. by the Table Designer e These include the row and column ruling and shading styles the position of text within cell margins the table s placement within the text column and the table title position e The number and widths of columns e The paragraph format of the first paragraph in the title if there is one The paragraph format of the topmost paragraph in the heading body and footing cell of each column For example you could change the format of the previous table to include shaded rows and a different ruling style Coffee Price per Bag Brazil Santos 455 00 Celebes Kalossi 924 00 Colombian 474 35 The following MIF statements define this table format lt TblFormat lt TblTag Coffee Table gt Every table must have at least one TblColumn statement lt TblColumn lt TblColumnNum 0 gt Columns are numbered from 0 lt TblColumnWidth 2 0 gt Width of first column gt lt TblColumn lt TblColumnNum 1 gt lt TblColumnWidth 1 5 gt TblCellMargins 6 0 pt 6 0 pt 6 0 pt TblLIndent 0 0 gt blRIndent 0 0 gt TblAlignment Center gt blPlacement Anywhere gt TblSpBefore 12 0 pt gt blSpAfter 12 0 pt gt TblBlockSize 1 gt blHFFill 15 gt bl1HFColor Black gt blBodyFill 5 gt blBodyColor Black gt blShadeByColumn No gt blShadePeriod 1 gt b1XFill 15 gt bl1XColor Black gt blAltShadePeriod 1 gt TblLRuling Thin gt Tb1BRuling Thin gt blRRuling Thin
169. caps and tail caps the previous PolyLine statement end of PolyLine This is a wild one solid solid solid solid solid end of DashedPattern end of PolyLine This one has a missing DashSegment statement so the 10 point segment is repeated with a default gap of 10 Missing NumSegments Missing a second DashSegment This polyline inherits the butt cap and tail style from the previous PolyLine statement end PolyLine This one is a really dense dotted line This polyline also inherits the butt cap and tail style 237 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 238 MIF Reference from the previous PolyLine statement lt PenWidth lpt gt lt NumPoints 2 gt Point 1 0 5 gt Point 7 5 5 gt gt end PolyLine When you ve defined a custom dashed line style in one FrameMaker document you can easily copy and paste the custom style into another document by pressing Shift and choosing Pick Up Object Properties from the Graphics menu For more information see your user s manual Table examples You can use MIF to create a table or to update a few values in an existing table Creating an entire table This example shows a table and the MIF file that describes it This table is in the sample file stocktb1 mif The widths of columns is calculated using MIF statements that are only for input filters Rather than specifying an exact width for each column the table uses the substatement Tb1ColumnWidtha for two of th
170. ce file changes lt TiLastUpdate seconds microseconds gt Specifies the time when the text inset was last updated time is measured in the number of seconds and microseconds that have passed since January 1 1970 lt TilmportHint string gt Identifies the filter used to convert the file see Record of the filter used to import text on page 139 lt TiApiClient gt Identifies the text inset as one created and maintained by an FDK client see TiApiClient statement on page 140 lt TiFlow gt Identifies the text inset as an imported text flow from another document see TiFlow statement on page 141 lt TiText gt Identifies the text inset as an imported text file see TiText statement on page 142 lt TiTextTable gt Identifies the text inset as text imported into a table see TiTextTable statement on page 142 gt End of Text Inset statement Free form text Para statements containing and describing the imported text see Para statement on page 131 lt Text InsetEnd gt End of imported text Usage All text insets require information about the source file and the imported text The information is used to update the text inset when changes are made to the original file There are several different types of text insets The type of the text inset is identified and described by a substatement Text created and maintained by an FDK client is described by the TiApiclient substatement For information on
171. ch as the values shown in the following example amp 59a66a95 amp 00000040 amp 00000040 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000001 amp 00000000 amp 00000000 Each value identifies a property of the imported graphic ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 278 MIF Reference e The first value is always the constant value 0x59a66a95 The second value is the width of the graphic in pixels In the preceding example the graphic is 64 pixels wide converting the hexadecimal value 0x00000040 to the decimal value 64 The third value is the height of the graphic in pixels In the example the graphic is 64 pixels high converting the hexadecimal value 0x00000040 to the decimal value 64 e The fourth value is the number of bits used to describe a single pixel This value is sometimes referred to as the depth of the graphic For black and white graphics only one bit is used to describe a single pixel For color images eight bits are used to describe a single pixel In the example the value 0x00000001 indicates that the graphic is in black and white e The fifth value is not currently used and is set to 0x00000000 by default e The sixth value specifies whether or not the data is encoded If the data is encoded this value is set to 0x00000002 If the data is not encoded that is if the data is in uncompressed format this value is set to 0x00000001 In the example the data is uncompressed e The seventh value identifies the type of color map used b
172. character The hexadecimal digits must be followed by a space When using special characters in a variable definition you can also use a hexadecimal notation or Unicode notation In the previous example the hexadecimal notation for the paragraph symbol 4 is xa6 Alternatively you can use the u00B6 Unicode notation to represent the same character The following example shows a FrameMaker document line and its representation in a MIF string In a FrameMaker document In MIF Some symbols gt Some Qsymbols q gt j You can also use the Char statement to include certain predefined special characters in a ParaLine statement see Char statement on page 133 Device independent pathnames Several MIF statements require pathnames as values You should supply a device independent pathname so that files can easily be transported across different system types Because of MIF parsing requirements you must use the following syntax to supply a pathname lt code gt name lt code gt name lt code gt name where name is the name of a component in the file s path and code identifies the role of the component in the path The following table lists codes and their meanings Code Meaning ra Root of UNIX file tree UNIX only v Volume or drive Windows h Host Apollo only c Component ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 8 MIF Reference Code Meaning u Up one level in the
173. contain see your user s manual or the online Help system Cross references A FrameMaker document can contain cross references that refer to other portions of the document or to other documents A cross reference has a marker that indicates the source where the cross reference points and a format that determines the text and its formatting in the cross reference All cross reference formats in a document are contained in one XRefFormats statement A cross reference format is defined by an xRef Format statement Within text an XRef statement and a Marker statement indicate where each cross reference appears ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 87 MIF Reference XRefFormats and XRefFormat statements The xRefFormats statement defines the formats of cross references to be used in document text flows A MIF file can have only one XRef Formats statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 The xRefFormat statement supplies a cross reference format name and its definition The statement must appear in an XRefFormats statement Syntax lt XRefFormats lt XRefFormat lt XRefName string gt Cross reference name lt XRefDef string gt Cross reference definition gt End of XRef Format statement lt XRefFormat gt More cross reference definitions as needed gt End of XRefFormats statement Usage XRefName supplies the cross reference format name which is used later by
174. context format rules Syntax lt EDPrefixRules Begin prefix rules any combination of level and context format rules lt LevelFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 164 lt ContextFormatRule gt A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 164 lt ContextFormatRule gt Additional context format rule statements as needed lt LevelFormatRule gt Additional level format rule statements as needed Endof EDPrefixRules statement EDSuffixRules statement A suffix is a fixed text range that appears at the end of an element after the element s content The EDSuffixRules statement defines the formatting properties to be applied to a suffix in different contexts It must appear in an ElementDef statement It is valid only for container elements An EDSuffixRules statement can contain zero or more substatements describing level and context format rules Syntax lt EDSuffixRules Begin suffix rules any combination of level and context format rules lt LevelFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 164 lt ContextFormatRule gt A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 164 lt ContextFormatRule gt Additional context format rule statements as needed lt LevelFormatRule gt Additional level format rule state
175. cument Info entry consists of one Key statement and at least one Value statement A Key statement contains a string of up to 255 ASCII characters The Key names a File Info field in PDF the field name can be up to 126 characters long In MIF you represent non printable characters via HH where identifies a hexadecimal representation of a character and HH is the hexadecimal value for the character For example use 23 to represent the character Zero value hex codes 00 are illegal In PDE these hexadecimal representations are interpreted as PDFDocEncoding see Portable Document Format Reference Manual Addison Wesley ISBN 0 201 62628 4 Note that a a File Info field name can be up to 126 characters long and a MIF string can contain up to 255 characters Some characters in the key string may be hexadecimal representations and each hexadecimal representation uses three ASCII characters For example a Key of 126 non printing characters would require 378 ASCII characters However since a valid MIF string can only have up to 255 ASCII characters such a Key statement would be invalid in MIF The contents of the File Info field is represented by a series of value statements Each value statement can contain a string of up to 255 ASCII characters In PDF the File Info contents can contain up to 32765 Unicode characters To accommodate this number of Unicode characters FrameMaker generates MIF in the following ways It represents the
176. d but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 263 TblAltShadePeriod integer gt A Number of consecutive columns rows that use Tb1XFi 1 1 exception columns rows alternate with default body columns rows to form a repeating pattern Column properties lt TblWidth dimension gt Not generated by FrameMaker but can be used by filters to determine table width lt TblColumn Each table must have at least one Tb1 Column statement a column without a statement uses the format of the rightmost column lt TblColumnNum integer gt Column number columns are numbered from left to right starting at 0 lt TblColumnWidth dimension gt Width of column See page 81 lt TblColumnWidthP integer gt Not generated by FrameMaker but a temporary column width when filtering proportionally spaced tables from another application converted to a fixed width when read in see page 81 lt TblColumnWidthA W W gt Not generated by FrameMaker but a width based on a cell width for filters only converted into a fixed width when read in First value is minimum width second value is maximum width Values limit the range of a computed column width and are usually set to a wide range see page 81 lt TblColumnH Default paragraph format for the column s heading cells in new tables lt TableColumn Ifthe table column is conditionalized the conditional p
177. d DXmIPublicld BXmiStandAlone DXmiStandAlone BXmiStyleSheet DXmiStyleSheet BXmlSystemld DXmlSystemld BXmIUseBOM DXmIUseBOM BXmiVersion DXmiVersion BXmiWellFormed DXmiWellFormed XML Namespaces In versions 7 0 and later elements in structured FrameMaker documents now store namespace information The ENamespace statement contains an arbitrary number of namespace declaration Each namespace declaration consists of one ENamespacePrefix statement and one ENamemespacePath statement XMP job control packets FrameMaker book and document files now store information to support XMP the Adobe standard for collaboration and electronic job control MIF stores XMP data in a series of encoded XMP statements that contain the data You should not try to edit this data manually FrameMaker generates the encoding when you save a file as MIF This XMP data corresponds with the values of fields in the File Info dialog box In MIF this data is stored as sub state ments of lt DocFileInfo gt and lt BookFileInfo gt This XMP data contains the data that is stored in the PDFDocInfo and PDFBookInfo statements Changes between version 5 5 and 6 0 This section describes changes to MIF syntax between versions 5 5 and 6 0 of FrameMaker Saving documents and books as PDF FrameMaker documents now store information to support Structured PDF DPDFStructure is a new statement added to Document that specifies whether or not the document contains structure information to
178. d by FrameMaker or copy a group of statements from a MIF file into your file and then edit the statements An easy way to use FrameMaker to generate a MIF file is to create an empty document by using the New command and then saving it as a MIF file Test one object at a time e While testing an object in a document or learning about the MIF statements that describe an object work with just that object For example if you work with a document that contains both tables and anchored frames start by creating the MIF statements that describe tables Then add the statements that describe anchored frames Use the default properties provided by FrameMaker e Ifyou are not concerned with testing certain document components let FrameMaker provide a set of default document objects and formats MIF file layout FrameMaker writes the objects in a MIF document file in the following order This section Contains these objects File ID MIF file identification line MIFFile statement Units Default units Units statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 11 MIF Reference This section Contains these objects Catalogs Color Condition Paragraph Format Element Font or Character Format Ruling Table Format Views Formats Variable Cross reference Objects Document Dictionary Anchored frames Tables Pages Text flows FrameMaker provides all of these objects even if the object is empty To avoid unpredictab
179. d delete it Suppose you are working with the previous example You would search for the statement lt TextRectID 7 gt to locate the text flow It might look similar to the following lt TextFlow lt Notes gt end of Notes lt Para lt Unique 45157 gt lt PgfTag MyFormat gt lt ParaLine lt TextRectID 7 gt lt String A single line of text gt gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow Delete the entire text flow 4 From your application generate a MIF file that includes the edited template file Suppose the edited MIF file is called mytemplate mif Your application would generate the following two lines at the top of any new MIF file lt MIFFile 2015 gt Generated by my application include mytemplate mif The include statement is similar to a C include directive It causes the MIF interpreter to read the contents of the file named mytemplate mif For more information about filenames in MIF see Device independent pathnames on page 7 5 From your application generate a text flow that contains the entire document contents The text flow should use the ID and tag name of the text flow you deleted from the template file this associates the new text flow with the first body page in the template The entire generated MIF file would look something like this lt MIFFile 2015 gt Generated by my application include mytemplate mif lt Text Flow lt TFTag A gt lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt lt TextR
180. d document lt XRefSrcFile pathname gt File in which to search for source text for pathname syntax see page 7 lt XRefSrcElemNonUniqueld string gt A string specifying the id attribute of the source element in case it is not a unique ID lt XRefAltText string gt Alternate display text End of BookXRef statement BookUpdateReferences statement MIF Reference The BookUpdateReferences statement specifies whether or not cross references and text insets are automatically updated when the book file is opened Syntax lt BookUpdateReferences boolean gt Yes specifies that cross references and text insets are automati cally updated when the book file is opened WEBDAV statements The BookServerURL and BookServerState MIF statements mark a book as managed content from the WebDAV perspective Syntax lt BookServerURL string gt URL of the MIF book file on the WEBDAV Server All http path values are valid Example lt BookServerUrl http mikej xp joewebdav myfile book mif gt http mikej xp joewebdav is the path of the server lt BookServerState keyword checked out checkedin gt Indicates whether a book is checked in or checked out on the WebDAV server Example lt BookServerState CheckedIn gt 155 ee Chapter 5 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books This chapter describes the MIF statements that define structu
181. d in a MIF statement Tokens in MIF are case sensitive A token cannot contain white space characters such as spaces tabs or newlines For example the following MIF statement is invalid because the token contains white space characters lt Un its Uin gt When the MIF interpreter finds white space characters that aren t part of the text of the document as in the example MIF statement lt Units Uin gt it interprets the white space as token delimiters When parsing the example statement the MIF interpreter ignores the white space characters between the left angle bracket lt and the first character of the token Units After reading the token the MIF interpreter checks its validity If the token is valid the interpreter reads and parses the data portion of the statement If the token is not valid the interpreter ignores all text up to the corresponding right angle bracket gt including any nested substatements The interpreter then scans the file for the next left angle bracket that marks the beginning of the next MIF statement All statements as well as all data portions of a statement are optional If you do not provide a data portion the MIF interpreter assigns a default value to the statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 5 MIF Reference Statement hierarchy Some MIF statements can contain other statements The contained statements are called substatements In this manual substatements are usually shown indented within the containing s
182. d the online manual Using FrameServer with Applications and Insets Both manuals are provided with the UNIX version of the Frame Developers Kit The first part of this appendix describes the general format for a facet in a MIF file The second part of this appendix explains the graphic inset format Note If you are using the API to implement the graphic inset editor the syntax described in this appendix applies only to external graphic insets For information on specifying facet names data types and data for internal graphic insets see the FDK Programmer Guide Facets for imported graphics A graphic imported by copying into a FrameMaker document contains one or more facets Each facet describes the imported graphic in a specific graphic format All imported graphics copied into a document contain one or more facets used to display and print the file FrameMaker might not use the same facet for displaying and printing a graphic When printing an imported graphic FrameMaker selects one of the following facets in order of preference EPSI Encapsulated PostScript e Native platform facet QuickDraw PICT WMF FrameVector e TIFF FrameImage and other bitmap facets When displaying an imported graphic FrameMaker selects one of the following facets in order of preference e Native platform facet QuickDraw PICT WMF FrameVector e FrameImage e TIFF e Other bitmap facets All versions of FrameMaker recognize EPSI w
183. ded to extend flows boolean gt lt TFramePostscript Yes identifies text in the flow as printer code boolean gt lt TFrameColumnBalance Yes means columns in the text frame are automatically adjusted to the same height boolean gt lt TFrameDir keyword gt Controls the direction of the text frame and its child objects keyword can be one of LTR Set the direction of the text flow object to left to right The text flow propa gates its direction to all child objects that derive their direction from the text flow object RTL Set the direction of the text flow object to right to left The text flow propa gates its direction to all child objects that derive their direction from the text flow object INHERITLTR Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to left to right then INHERITLTR is assigned to TFrameDir INHERITRTL Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to right to left then INHERITRTL is assigned to TFrameDir lt TLineDir keyword gt Controls the direction in which the text line is drawn keyword can be one of LTR Set the direction for the text line object to left to right RTL Set the direction for the text line object to right to left INHERITLTR Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to left to right then INHERITLTR is assignedto TLineDir INHERITRTL Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to right to left then INHERITRTL
184. defined in the combined font catalog lt FEncoding string gt Specifies the encoding for the base font This is to specify the encoding for a double byte font If not present the default is Roman keyword can be one of JISX0208 ShiftJIS BIG5 GB2312 80 EUC KSC5601 1992 End of the PgfFont statement Example The following is an example of a combined font in a Para statement lt Para lt Unique 996885 gt lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt Font lt FTag gt lt FPlatformName M Osaka P gt lt FWesternPlatformName M Times lt FFamily Osaka gt BS lt FCombinedFontName MyCombinedFont gt lt FEncoding JISX0208 ShiftJIS gt lt FLocked No gt gt end of Font lt String CombinedFontStatement lt Font lt FTag gt lt FPlatformName M Osaka P gt lt FWesternPlatformName M Times lt FFamily Osaka gt 15 SPT lt FCombinedFontName MyCombinedFont gt 216 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt FWeight Medium gt lt FEncoding JISX0208 ShiftJIS gt lt FLanguage Japanese gt lt FLocked No gt gt lt String HRR gt gt end of Font end of ParaLine gt end of Para Kumihan Tables Kumihan tables specify line composition rules for Japanese documents FrameMaker uses standard JIS 4051 Kumihan rules by default In most cases the JIS standard is fine but there are cases where corporate standards might differ from the JIS rul
185. ding lt Para lt PgfTag Heading gt lt ParaLine lt Marker lt MType 9 gt Identifies this as a cross reference lt MText 34126 Heading My Heading gt Cross reference source gt end of Marker lt String My Heading gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para The lt mType 9 gt statement identifies this as a cross reference marker it is required The MText statement contains the cross reference source text which must be unique When FrameMaker writes a cross reference it adds a unique number and the paragraph tag to the MText statement as shown in the previous example While the number is not required it guarantees that the cross reference points to a unique source when the number is present In the previous example the number in lt MText gt is not mandatory However the number in the example ensures that the new cross reference points to the My heading heading Inserting the reference point The final step in creating a cross reference is to insert an XRef statement at the position in text where the cross reference should appear The xRef statement provides the name of the cross reference format defined in XRefFormat the source text and the pathname of the file containing the source lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt String This is a cross reference to gt lt XRef lt XRefName Page gt Cross reference format lt XRefSrcText 34126 Heading My Heading gt Source text l
186. ditional context format rule statements as needed lt LevelFormatRule gt Additional level format rule statements as needed gt Endof EDTextFormatRules statement EDObjectFormatRules statement The EDObjectFormatRules statement defines the formatting properties to be applied to a table cross reference system variable marker graphic or equation element in different contexts It must appear in an ElementDef statement An EDObjectFormatRules statement can contain a single level format rule or a single context format rule Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt EDObjectFormatRules Begin object format rules a single level format rule or a single context format rule lt LevelFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 164 Endof EDObjectFormatRules statement or lt EDObjectFormatRules lt ContextFormatRule gt A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 164 End of EDObjectFormatRules statement EDPrefixRules statement A prefix is a fixed text range that appears at the beginning of an element before the element s content The EDPre fixRules statement defines the formatting properties to be applied to a prefix in different contexts It must appear in an ElementDef statement It is valid only for container elements An EDPrefixRules statement can contain zero or more substatements describing level and
187. e The FrameType statement specifies the position of an anchored frame A graphic frame can be anchored within a text column or text frame or outside a text column or text frame If the graphic frame is anchored within a text column or text frame the anchored frame can be positioned in one of the following ways If the graphic frame is anchored within a text column or text frame The Frame statement contains At the insertion point of the cursor lt FrameType Inline gt At the top of the text column lt FrameType Top gt Below the insertion point of the cursor lt FrameType Below gt At the bottom of the text column lt FrameType Bottom gt Running into the paragraph lt FrameType RunIntoParagraph gt If the graphic frame is anchored outside a text column or a text frame the anchored frame can be positioned in one of the following ways If the graphic frame is anchored outside a text column or text frame The Frame statement contains On the left side of the text column or text frame lt FrameType Left gt On the right side of the text column or text frame lt FrameType Right gt On the side of the text column or text frame closer to the binding ofthe lt FrameType Inside gt book the inside edge On the side of the text column or text frame farther from the binding ofthe lt FrameType Outside gt book the outside edge On the side of the text column or text frame clos
188. e main text file and write the table data to the Tb1s file If you are using 4th Dimension the procedure should have the following statements vDoc CREATE DOCUMENT Prompts user to name main file vTbls CREATE DOCUMENT Tbls mif Hard codes name of include file SEND PACKET vDoc lt MIFFile 2015 gt File ID SEND PACKET vDoc include template mif SEND PACKET vDoc include Tbls mif As you process the records you write the table data to the second include file by referring to the vTbls variable in a SEND PACKET command For example SEND PACKET vTbls lt Cell lt CellContent CR The main MIF file would have the following components lt MIFFile 2015 gt include template mif include Tbls mif the database lt Text Flow gt File ID MIF template Table instances Main text flow end of text flow created by When FrameMaker opens the main MIF file it will use the two include statements to place the data and template information in the required order ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 247 MIF Reference Creating anchored frames You can extend the technique of writing separate MIF files to handle both tables and graphics Like table instances anchored frame instances must appear in the MIF file prior to the Text Flow statement If each record contains a graphic or a reference to a graphics file on disk you would create a separate text file called AFrames mif for only the
189. e MIF file The ruling styles in a table format are defined in a separate catalog called the Ruling Catalog You can define your own Ruling Catalog with the RulingCatalog statement Whether you use the default ruling styles or create your own substatements that refer to ruling styles such as the Tb1LRuling statement must use the name of a ruling style from the Ruling Catalog See RulingCatalog statement on page 82 Applying a table format You can apply a table format from the Table Catalog or you can define a table format locally To apply a table format from the Table Catalog use the Tb1Tag statement within the Tb1 statement lt Tbls lt Tbl lt TblID 1 gt lt TblTag Format A gt Tag of format in Table Catalog lt TblNumColumns 1 gt lt TblBody gt end of TblBody gt end of Tbl gt end of Tbls To locally define a table format use a complete Tb1Format statement lt Tbls lt Tbl lt TblID 1 gt lt TblFormat lt TblTag gt Every table must have one TblColumn statement lt TblColumn lt TblColumnNum 0 gt lt TblColumnwidth 1 0 gt gt end of TblColumn table property statements gt end of TblFormat gt end of Tbl gt end of Tbls Creating default paragraph formats for new tables You can use the Tb1Format and Tb1Column statements to define default paragraph formats for the columns in new tables These default formats do not affect tables that are defined within the MIF file
190. e Text Flow statement can override all of these defaults TextFlow statement The Text Flow statement defines a text flow It can appear at the top level or in a Text Rect statement It must appear after all other main statements in the file Syntax lt TextFlow lt TFTag tagstring gt Text flow tag name lt TFAutoConnect boolean gt Yes adds text frames as needed to extend flows ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt FlowDir keyword gt Controls the flow direction and of the direction of child objects that derive their direction from the flow keyword can be one of LTR Set the direction of the text flow object to left to right The text flow propagates its direction to all child objects that derive their direction from the text flow object RTL Setthe direction of the text flow object to right to left The text flow prop agates its direction to all child objects that derive their direction from the text flow object INHERITLTR Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to left to right then INHERITLTR is assigned to FlowDir INHERITRTL Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to right to left then INHERITRTL is assigned to FlowDir lt TFPostScript boolean gt Yes identifies text in the flow as printer code lt TFFeather boolean gt Yes adjusts vertical space in column so that last line of text lies against the bottom of the column lt TFS
191. e cent teen eenes 182 MIF Messages sunsiaulesdhennledlekbienledtvreskndssndt Seles haute humlene 186 Chapter 6 MIF Equation Statements MathME statement usa saesasa Geer Harde de ARAE R 188 Documentst tement su mssgkdstor mass ob antl erre 189 Mathstatement 2c s cigccseeescas bra acdenaredabieycaeghe sees E are Geadtnwer eee es 193 MathFullForm statement 2 2 ese eee eee eee e tence neat eeneeneneeeneee 194 Chapter 7 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements Asian Character Encoding svsrssn syesvetauede ne basser ee AN 213 Combined Fonts sk cece suns ob coxa seksere rd aner keine 214 Kumihan Tables Ahaia ee d E E R E E a e E enaa 217 R Ubitext a eheann tn ees a EE a hee Chien KA O E a A ie ean T aten 227 Chapter 8 Examples Text example sicevdinte ioe heb ec bhi Ni E sad A E E EE a 231 Bar chart xample ssressaspsrssdm desse a e aa a a aa a 232 Pie hartexample eico te niian e a a a a a eden bager see 235 C stom dashed lines 4 achaceseciadad da na oe a E eee 236 Table examples arya Salen a Oey eee oe declan ARRA E REA A ENE EE E ge sad 238 Databasepublishing svyurserssah sse Du dite A TEE ET E EEEN ERS 241 Chapter 9 MIF Messages General form for MIF messages vuvuenenenenennenenenenennenenenenennenenenenennenene 248 Listof MIF messages sun istad ed Meadea es aksene skades EG 248 Chapter 10 MIF Compatibility Changes between version 12 0 and 2015 release arananannanenenenennenenenenenuenene 251
192. e columns to specify that the column width is determined by the width of a particular cell Column widths are further affected by the Equalizewidths statement which sets the columns to the width of the widest column within the limits specified by the Tb1column substatements As you examine this example note how the column width statements interact the column widths are originally set by the applied table format from the Table Catalog The Tb1Format statement then specifies how this table instance s column properties override those in the default format The Equalizewidths statement further overrides the format established by TblFormat Table 2 StockWatch Mining and Metal 10 31 90 Weekly Close Change Ace Aluminum 24 00 3 50 Streck Metals 27 25 2 75 Linbrech Alloys 63 75 2 50 lt MIFFile 2015 gt Generated by StockWatcher identifies this as a MIF file lt Tbls lt Tbl lt TblID 1 gt This table s ID is 1 lt Tbl Format lt TblTag Format A gt Forces a lookup in the Table Catalog with the following exceptions lt Tb1Column lt TblColumnNum 0 gt Shrink wrap the first column so it s between 0 and 2 inches wide lt TblColumnWidthA 0 2 gt gt lt TblColumn lt TblColumnNum 1 gt lt TblColumnWidth 1 gt gt lt TblColumn lt TblColumnNum 2 gt heading lt TblColumnWidthaA 0 2 gt gt gt lt TblNumColumns 3 gt lt EqualizeWidths wider
193. e contains characters that are not allowed Element name contains at least one disallowed character such as amp or 186 188 Chapter 6 MIF Equation Statements This chapter describes the MIF statements that define equations Use it as a reference when you write filters for trans lating documents that include equations For more information about creating and editing equations see your Adobe FrameMaker user s manual MathML statement FrameMaker provides support for MathML which is an XML application for representing mathematical notation This support is provided through out of the box integration with MathFlow Editor by Design Science FrameMaker includes 30 day trial licenses of the following MathFlow editors Style Editor and Structure Editor Following is a sample MIF tags snippet that shows MathML MIF syntax lt MathML lt MathMLDataLen 489 gt lt MathMLData gt lt ShapeRect 0 0 0 0 1 30666 0 59999 gt lt BRect 0 0 0 0 1 30666 0 59999 gt lt MathMLDpi 150 gt lt MathMLComposeDpi 300 gt lt MathMLfontSize 14 gt lt MathMLinLine Yes gt lt MathMLApplyPgfStyle Yes gt lt MathMLFlipLR No gt gt end of MathML Syntax lt MathML lt MathMLDataLen integer gt Number of characters in the equation s XML lt MathMLData String gt The actual data of XML representation of the MathML equation Using the XML tags the MIF file displays the structure of the equat
194. e contains the name and path of the U3D file More information about imported graphics For additional information on imported graphics consult one of the following sources e For instructions about modifying an application to create graphic insets for FrameMaker documents see the FDK Programmer s Guide e Ifyou are using FrameServer or Live Links with graphic insets see the online manual Using FrameServer with Applications and Insets which is included in the UNIX version of the Frame Developer s Kit e For more information about importing graphics see your user s manual Math statement A Math statement describes an equation For its description see MIF Equation Statements Polygon statement The Polygon statement describes a polygon It can appear at the top level or in a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt Polygon Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 111 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt Smoothed boolean gt Yes smooths angles to rounded curves lt NumPoints integer gt Number of vertices lt Point X Y gt Position of object in page or frame coordinates More points as needed End of Polygon statement Usage The NumPoints statement is optional When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it counts the Point statements to determine the number of points in the polygon PolyLine statement The PolyLine statement descr
195. e document You can control whether the document starts with a right page or a left page by using the parity statement For an example of a document with left and right master pages see the sample file dblpage mif Creating a first master page In addition to left and right master pages you can create custom master page layouts that you can apply to body pages For example some books have a special layout for the first page in a chapter Ina MIF file you can create as many master pages as you need but you cannot apply all of them to the appropriate body pages You can only apply a left page a right page and one additional custom master page to the body pages Furthermore you can only link the custom master page to the first page in a document When you are importing a document into FrameMaker you do not know how much text the MIF interpreter will put on a page you can only determine where the first page begins When the interpreter reads the MIF file it applies the custom master page layout to the first page in the document For each subsequent page it uses the DParity and DTwoSides statements to determine when to add a left page and when to adda right page Other master page layouts that you ve defined are not lost when the interpreter reads a MIF file The user can still apply these page layouts to individual body pages For an example of a MIF file with a first page layout see the sample file frstpage mif Adding headers and foo
196. e ee 2a lt MathFullForm equal char x over plus minus char b pm sqrt plus power char b num 2 2 minus times num 4 4 char a char c times num 2 2 char a gt 213 Chapter 7 MIF Asian Text Processing Statements This chapter describes the MIF statements used to express Asian text in a document It includes character encoding statements combined Asian and Western fonts Kumihan tables and rubi text Asian Character Encoding Western text in a MIF file is written out as 7 bit ASCII However 7 bit encoding is insufficient for Asian text Asian text in MIF files is represented by double byte encoding There are different encoding schemes for each supported language and the MIF file must include a statement that can be used to determine which encoding to use The MIF file can be edited with an Asian enabled text editor on the platform on which the MIF was written If the text in a MIF file is in more than one Asian language then only the language of the MIF encoding statement will be directly readable in a text editor All other non 7 bit ASCII text will be backslashed escaped using the MIF backslash x convention MIFEncoding statement for Japanese Adobe FrameMaker recognizes two encoding schemes for Japanese Shift JIS and EUC The Windows versions of FrameMaker write Shift JIS for Japanese text and the UNIX versions of FrameMaker write out EUC The MIF can converted between Shift JIS and
197. e head e Anarc with a black border and no fill The following sample facet describes this graphic FrameVector SV amp lt MakerVector6 0 gt amp NX amp 010000000150 amp 020000001000000000000000000168000000D80000 amp 230000000400008000 amp 21000000010F amp 24000000080006426C61636B00 amp 260000000100 amp 220000000104 amp 200000000400000000 amp 8300000010007A00000052000000C0000000190000 amp 210000000100 amp 220000000107 amp 810000001C00000003000E0000004100000029000000710000004C000000410000 amp 830000001000720000004A000000C0000000190000 amp 8700000009007B0000005C000000 300 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference amp 2A0000000C00000A xHelvetica x00 amp 2B0000000400090000 amp 300000000A0008526567756C617200 amp 2F0000000A0008526567756C617200 amp 2E0000000A0008526567756C617200 amp 330000000400008000 amp 2C0000000400001000 amp 88000000160014 xFrameVector Graphic x00 amp 8900000000 amp 070000000C10780201000C00000004000 amp 270000000100 amp 82000000140000000200720000005500000033000000550000 amp 22000000010F amp 270000000103 amp 850000001800040000002B0000002F0000002C0000005A0000005A0000 amp FF00000000 amp NX EndInset The following sections explain the syntax used to describe this facet Definition op codes for the Frame Vector graphic The example begins with the ASCII string lt MakerVector 6 0 gt The x characters indicate that the data that follows is in hexadecimal format The followin
198. e number style keyword can be one of UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha lt DStartPage integer gt Starting page number lt ContPageNum boolean gt Yes means continue page numbering from the previous document in the book Pagination lt DTwoSides boolean gt Yes specifies two sided layout lt DParity keyword gt Specifies whether first page is left or right page keyword can be one of FirstLeft FirstRight lt DPageRounding keyword gt Method for removing blank pages or modifying total page count before saving or printing keyword can be one of DeleteEmptyPages MakePageCountEven MakePageCountOdd Dont ChangePageCount lt DFrozenPages boolean gt Yes if Freeze Pagination is on Document format properties lt DSmartQuotesOn boolean gt Use curved left and right quotation marks lt DSmartSpacesOn boolean gt Prevents entry of multiple spaces lt DLinebreakChars string gt OK to break lines at these characters lt DPunctuationChars string gt Punctuation characters that FrameMaker does not strip from run in heads these characters override the default punctuation set in PgfRunInDefaultPunct see page 63 Conditional text defaults lt DShowAllConditions boolean gt Shows or hides all conditional text ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt DDisplayOverrides boolean gt Turns format indicators of conditional text on or off F
199. e of the facet unsigned bytes amp v integer amp i or metric amp m If the facet data is binary such as FrameImage and FrameVector data or if it contains ASCII characters such as EPSI data as shown in the preceding example the facet uses the unsigned bytes data type amp v For example the following line is the second line in a facet that contains data represented as unsigned bytes amp SV Facet data The remaining lines contain the facet data Each line begins with an ampersand amp The end of the data for a facet is marked by the beginning of a new facet Thus a line with a new facet name signals the end of the previous facet data The end of the last facet in the graphic inset is marked by the following line EndInset Unsigned bytes If the facet data contains a backslash character another backslash precedes it as an escape character For example if the data contains the string x yz the facet contains x yz Within the facet data nonprintable ASCII characters or non ASCII bytes greater than 7 are represented in hexadecimal ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 269 MIF Reference Any section of data represented in hexadecimal is preceded and followed by the characters Nx For example the following FrameImage facet contains data represented in hexadecimal which is enclosed between two sets of x characters FrameImage SV amp NX amp 59a66a95 amp 00000040 amp 0000FCO001FCO000 amp NX EndInset In
200. e size of the graphic by the graphic type and the value of the ImportObFixedSize statement If the file format is Image scaled Size determined by Bitmap with lt ImportObFixedSize Yes gt No ShapeRect statement Bitmap with lt ImportObFixedSize No gt Yes BitMapDpi statement Vector Yes Dimensions specified in the vector data Encapsulated PostScript QuickDraw PICT No Bounding box information in imported image 121 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 122 MIF Reference Position and coordinate systems Some types of graphics such as EPS use coordinate systems to specify the position of the graphic When these types of graphics are imported into a FrameMaker document the Nat iveo rigin statement specifies the coordinates of the origin of the graphic within the page or frame If the imported graphic is updated FrameMaker uses the coordinates from the NativeOrigin statement to prevent the graphic from shifting on the page or frame Size and scale of TIFF graphics FrameMaker doesn t use internal TIFF dpi information for sizing purposes because not all TIFF files contain that information and because it may be incorrect FrameMaker allows users to set the dpi manually when importing the TIFF file Once the graphic is imported FrameMaker displays the dpi infor mation in the Object Properties dialog box Angle of imported graphics If an object contains both a lt FlipLR Yes gt statement and an Angle statement with a nonzero value the obj
201. e tables in this section lists the MIF messages produced by the MIF interpreter and describes their meanings This message Means Skipping these chars The MIF file contains a syntax error or a MIF statement not supported in this version of FrameMaker FrameMaker ignores MIF statements all MIF statements contained within the erroneous or unsup ported MIF statement The ignored MIF statements are listed in Done skipping the error message A footnote cannot contain another footnote One footnote in the MIF file is embedded in another Bad parameter parameter The MIF file contains a syntax error Cannot connect to TRNext ID N The text frame ID specified in a TRNext statement has no corresponding defined text frame Cannot find anchored frame N The graphic frame ID specified in an AFrames statement has no corresponding defined graphic frame Cannot find footnote N The footnote ID specified in a FNote statement has no corre sponding defined footnote Cannot find table ID N MIF cannot match lt ATb1 x gt with an earlier lt Tbl lt TblID X gt gt statement Cannot find text frame ID N The text frame ID specified ina Text Rect ID statement has no corresponding defined text frame Cannot open filename Make sure that the file exists and that you have read access to it then try again ADOBE FRAMEMAKER This message Means Cannot store inset s facets
202. eBar boolean gt Turns on the change bar lt FPosition keyword gt Specifies subscript and superscript characters font size and position relative to baseline determined by Document substatements see page 93 keyword can be one of FNormal FSuperscript FSubscript lt FPairKern boolean gt Turns on pair kerning lt FCase keyword gt Applies capitalization style to string keyword can be one of FASTyped FSmallCaps FLowercase FUppercase Default font kerning information lt F DX percent gt Horizontal kern value for manual kerning expressed as percentage of an em positive value moves characters right and negative value moves characters left lt F DY percent gt Vertical kern value for manual kerning expressed as percentage of an em positive value moves characters down and negative value moves characters up lt F DW percent gt Spread value for space between characters expressed as percentage of an em positive value increases the space and negative value decreases the space lt F DWChange dimension gt Change to spread value for space between characters expressed as percentage of an em positive value increases the space and negative value decreases the space Default font miscellaneous information lt FLocked boolean gt Yes means the font is part of a text inset that obtains its formatting properties from the source document MIF Reference
203. ean gt Turns on overline style lt FStrike boolean gt Turns on strikethrough style lt FChangeBar boolean gt Turns on the change bar lt FPosition keyword gt Specifies subscript and superscript characters font size and position relative to baseline determined by Document substatements see page 93 keyword can be one of FNormal FSuperscript FSubscript lt FOutline boolean gt Turns on outline style lt FShadow boolean gt Turns on shadow style lt FPairKern boolean gt Turns on pair kerning lt FCase keyword gt Applies capitalization style to string keyword can be one of FASTyped FSmallCaps FLowercase FUppercase Kerning information lt FDX percent gt Horizontal kern value for manual kerning expressed as percentage of an em positive value moves characters right and negative value moves characters left lt FDY percent gt Vertical kern value for manual kerning expressed as percentage of an em posi tive value moves characters down and negative value moves characters up lt FDW percent gt Spread value for space between characters expressed as percentage of an em positive value increases the space and negative value decreases the space lt FTsume boolean gt Yes turns on Tsume variable width rendering for Asian characters Filter statements Valid when text properties are applied to a file imported into FrameMaker lt FPlain boo
204. ean gt Yes specifies View Only document locked lt DViewOnlyXRef keyword gt Changes behavior of active cross references in View Only document see page 46 keyword can be one of GotoBehavior OpenBehavior NotActive ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 93 MIF Reference lt DViewOnlySelect keyword gt Disables enables user selection in View Only document including selection with modifier keys and sets highlighting style of destina tion markers for active cross references see Using active cross refer ences on page 46 keyword can be one of No disable user selection Yes enable user selection and highlighting Useronly enable selection but not highlighting lt DViewOnlyNoOp Oxnnn gt Disables a command in a View Only document command is specified by hex function code see page 47 lt DViewOnlyWinBorders boolean gt No suppresses display of scroll bars and border buttons in document window of View Only document lt DViewOnlyWinMenubar boolean gt No suppresses display of document window menu bar in View Only document lt DViewOnlyWinPopup boolean gt No suppresses display of document region pop up menus in View Only document The dotted boundary line of a document is the document region lt DViewOnlyWinPalette boolean gt Yes makes window behave as command palette window in View Only document The FrameMaker console is the Command palette window Document default
205. ect is first flipped around the vertical axis and then rotated by the value specified in Angle Methods of importing graphics As mentioned previously an imported graphic can be imported by reference or copied into the document In the Windows version an imported graphic can be a SWF object The following table shows how the structure of the Import Object statement differs depending on how the graphic is imported For an explanation of the facet syntax see Facet Formats for Graphics If the graphic is The ImportObject statement contains Copied into the FrameMaker document facet_name amp data_type amp facet_data EndInset Imported by reference lt ImportObFileDI pathname gt lt ImportHint string gt Imported graphic or embedded OLE object Windows facet_name of an imported graphic object or an OLE only object amp data_type amp facet_data facet_name amp data_type amp facet_data EndInset Example lt ImportObUpdater SWF gt Filenames of objects imported by reference When an object is imported by reference to an external file the Import Object statement contains the file pathname The ImportObFileDI statement specifies the pathname for graphics imported by reference The statement supplies a device independent pathname so that files can easily be transported across different types of systems see Device independent pathnames on page 7 In previous versions of FrameMaker t
206. ectID 7 gt lt Para lt ParaLine lt String This is the content of the generated document gt me gt end of Para gt end of TextFlow A user can open the generated MIF file to get a fully formatted FrameMaker document Setting View Only document options You can use MIF statements to control the display of View Only documents A View Only document is a locked FrameMaker hypertext document that a user can open read and print but not edit You can use MIF statements to control the appearance and behavior of the document window and to control the behavior of cross references in locked documents ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 46 MIF Reference The MIF statements for View Only documents are intended for hypertext authors who want more control over hypertext documents They do not have corresponding commands in the user interface The View Only MIF statements described in this section must appear in a Document statement These statements have no effect in an unlocked document Make sure that the Document statement also includes the following substatement lt DViewOnly Yes gt Changing the document window You can use MIF statements to change the appearance and behavior of the document window in the following ways e To suppress the document window menu bar use the following statement lt DViewOnlyWinMenubar No gt This statement has no effect in the Windows version of FrameMaker because those versions have an application menu bar rat
207. ection describes each field in the record record versis the version on the record for example 0001 vendor is a code specifying the filter s vendor The code is a string of four characters The following table lists some of the possible codes Code Description PGRF Built in FrameMaker filters FAPI External FDK client filter FFLT External FrameMaker filters IMAG External ImageMark filters XTND External XTND filters Note that this is not a comprehensive list of codes Codes may be added to this list by Adobe or by developers at your site format idisa code specifying the format that the filter translates The code is a string of four characters The following table lists some of the possible codes Code Description WDBN Microsoft Word compound document WPBN WordPerfect compound document RTF Microsoft s RTF compound document IAF Interleaf compound document MIF Maker Interchange Format MRTF MIF to RTF export MIAF MIF to IAF export MWPB MIF to WordPerfect export TRFF troff to MIF UNIX only MML Maker Mark up Language CVBN Corel Ventura compound document Windows DCA DCA to MIF UNIX TEXT Plain text ERTS Text ISO Latin 1 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Code Description TXRM
208. ed from the copyright owner Any references to company names in sample templates are for demonstration purposes only and are not intended to refer to any actual organization Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat Distiller Flash FrameMaker Illustrator PageMaker Photoshop PostScript Reader Garamond Kozuka Mincho Kozuka Gothic MinionPro and MyriadPro are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Solaris is a trademark or registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and other countries UNIX is a trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Ltd SVG is a trademark of the World Wide Web Consortium marks of the W3C are registered and held by its host institutions MIT INRIA and Keio All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This product contains either BISAFE and or TIPEM software by RSA Data Security Inc This product contains color data and or the Licensed Trademark of The Focoltone Colour System PANTONE Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE identified standards Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color PANTONE and other Pantone Inc trademarks are property of Pantone Inc Pantone Inc 2003 Pantone Inc
209. ed in a Bool CondCatalog statement The BoolCondCatalog statement defines the contents of Boolean Expression Catalog for conditional text A MIF file can have only one BoolCondCatalog statement after Condition Catalog Syntax lt BoolCondCatalog lt BoolCond gt Defines a Boolean expression lt BoolCond gt gt End of BoolCondCatalog BoolCond statement The BoolCond statement defines a new boolean expression which is used to evaluate the show hide state of condi tional text Statement must appear in BoolCondCatalog statement The property statement can appear in any order Syntax lt BoolCond lt BoolCondTag string gt Tag name used for Boolean expressions ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 59 MIF Reference lt BoolCondExpr string gt Boolean expression used for show hide evaluation of conditional text OR NOT and AND are the operators and condition tags are operands within a quoted string For example Comment OR Tag1 lt BoolCondState string gt Indicates whether the evaluation of showing or hiding conditional text is based on this expression The string must contain one of the following values e Active Inactive gt End of BoolCond Filter By Attribute Elements in a structured document can have one or more attributes associated with them Using FrameMaker you can filter a structured document based on the value of these attribut
210. edFontCatalog ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt CombinedFontDefn Defines a single combined font lt CombinedFontName string gt The name of the combined font lt CombinedFontBaseFamily string gt The name of the Asian component font lt CombinedFontWesternFamily string gt The name of the Roman component font lt CombinedFontWesternSize percent gt The size of the Roman component font expressed as a percentage of the base font size allowed values are 1 0 through 1000 0 lt CombinedFontWesternShift percent gt The baseline offset of the Roman font expressed as a percentage of the base font size where a positive value raises the Roman baseline above the Asian baseline allowed values are 1000 0 through 1000 0 lt CombinedFontBaseEncoding keyword gt Specifies the encoding for the base font keyword can be one of JISX0208 ShiftJIS BIG5 GB2312 80 EUC KSC5601 1992 boolean gt lt CombinedFontAllowBaseFamilyBoldedAndObliqued Yes allows a simulation of the bold or italic Asian component font to be used if Bold or Italic Oblique is applied to the combined font End of the CombinedFontDe fn state ment More CombinedFontDe fn statements as needed End of the CombinedFontCatalog statement Example The following is an example of a combined font catalog lt CombinedFontCatalog lt CombinedFontDefn lt CombinedFontName MyCombinedFont gt lt C
211. efLocked boolean gt Yes means the cross reference is part of a text inset that obtains its formatting information from the source document lt XRefSrcText string gt Text to search for lt XRefSrcIsElem boolean gt Yes means the source of the cross reference is an element from a struc tured document lt XRefSrcFile pathname gt Device independent pathname of file in which to search for source text for pathname syntax see page 7 lt XRefSrcElemNonUniqueld string gt A string specifying the id attribute of the source element in case it is not a unique ID lt XRefAltText string gt Alternate display text lt XRefApiClient The client for the cross reference Contains XRefClientName and XRefClientType lt XRefClientName string gt The registered name of the client that created the cross reference lt XRefClientType string gt The type of the client that created the cross reference gt End of XRefApiClient statement gt End of XRef statement lt Font gt Embedded character change for the following cross reference text see page 66 136 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 137 MIF Reference lt String string gt Text of cross reference lt XRefEnd gt End of cross reference Usage The xref statement marks where a cross reference appears in text The xRefName statement applies a format to the cross reference text its string argument must match the name of the format provided by an xRefFormat statement The xRefSrcTex
212. efined attribute values catalog If no values are defined the catalog is empty Each definition has an attribute tag AttributeTag and a corresponding list of values AttributeValue The attrCcondExprCatalog defines the contents of the filters catalog defined for a structured document A MIF file can have only one Att rCondExprCatalog statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference XML data for structured documents Document and book statements In versions 7 0 and later FrameMaker supports XML import and export The following statements store information necessary to properly save a document or book as XML Statements that begin with Dxm1 are document state ments and statements that begin with Bxm1 are book statements Syntax AN DXmlDocType string gt lt BXmlDocType string gt The name given to the XML document type A DXm1lSystemId string gt DXmlSystemId string gt A The system identifier for the XML document type A DXmlEncoding string gt lt BXmlEncoding string gt The XML encoding parameter that was specified in the XML declara tion when the XML file was opened lt DXmlFileEncoding string gt lt BXmlFileEncoding string gt The XML encoding that was found in the imported XML file A DXm1PublicId string gt DXm1PublicId string gt A The public identifier for the XML document type DXmlStandAlone int gt lt BXmlStandAlone int gt A The XML standalone par
213. efinition of the previous paragraph is used however its tag string is reset to the tag in the PgfTag statement ParaLine statement The ParaLine statement defines a line within a paragraph It must appear in a Para statement Syntax lt ParaLine lt ElementBegin gt See MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books lt TextRectID ID gt Where the following text goes lt InlineComponent lt Unique ID gt Unique ID number assigned by FrameMaker lt InlineComponentType MTOC gt Type of inline component which is the mini TOC gt End of InlineComponent statement lt InlineComponentEnd gt End of inline component content lt SpclHyphenation boolean gt Hyphenation of a word at the end of a line causes the word to be spelled differently as with German hyphenation lt Font gt Embedded character change for the following text see page 66 lt Conditional gt Turns on conditional text see page 57 lt Unconditional gt Returns to unconditional state lt String string gt Printable ASCII text in single quotation marks required lt Char gt An extended ASCII character code or special character name see page 133 lt ATbl ID gt ID of embedded table lt AFrame ID gt ID of embedded anchored frame lt FNote ID gt ID of embedded footnote lt Marker gt Embedded marker see page 134
214. ement The LevelFormatRule statement contains statements that specify an element s formatting on the basis of the level to which the element is nested within specific types of ancestor elements The LevelFormatRule statement contains a CountElements statement listing the tags of elements to count among the element s ancestors and a statement specifying the tag of the element at which to stop counting The LevelFormatRule statement also contains an If statement zero or more ElseIf statements and an optional Else statement The If ElseIf and Else statements define the formatting applied to the element at specified levels of nesting within the ancestor elements specified by the CountElements statement The LevelFormatRule statement must appear in a format rules statement such as an EDText FormatRules or EDEndElementRules statement Syntax lt LevelFormatRule Begin level format rule lt CountElements Optional list of elements to count among the element s ancestors lt CountElement tagstring gt Tag of element to count lt CountElement tagstring gt Additional statements as needed gt Endof CountElements statement lt StopCountingAt tagstring gt Optional tag of element at which to stop counting lt If gt An If clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 165 lt ElselIf gt An optional Elself clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 165 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER
215. ement is allowed to be the highest level element A EI DGeneralRule string gt The general rule for the element the following types of elements can have general rules containers tables table parts table titles headings bodies footings rows and cells and footnotes EDExclusions A E List of excluded elements A Exclusion tagstring gt Tag of excluded element A Exclusion tagstring gt Additional statements as needed Endof EDExclusions statement lt EDInclusions List of included elements lt Inclusion tagstring gt Tag of included element lt Inclusion tagstring gt Additional statements as needed Endof EDInclusions statement lt EDAlsoInsert List of elements that are automatically inserted in a container element when the element is initially added lt AlsoInsert tagstring gt Tag of inserted element 157 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt AlsoInsert tagstring gt Additional statements as needed End of EDAlsoInsert statement EDInitialTablePattern string gt List of the tags of table child elements that are automatically created when a table is inserted Valid only if EDObject is one of the following EDTable EDTblHeading EDTb1Body EDTblFooting EDTb1Row EDTbl1Cell EDAttrDefinitions List of attribute definitions EDAttrDef gt A Definition of attribute see Attribute defin
216. ements Object statements Page statements Color statements The following table lists the changes for color property statements M IF 3 00 MIF 4 00 lt FSeparation integer gt lt FColor string gt lt CSeparation integer gt lt CColor string gt lt RulingSeparation integer gt lt RulingColor string gt lt Separation integer gt lt ObColor string gt lt blHFSeparation integer gt lt TblHFColor string gt A blBodySeparation integer gt lt TblBodyColor string gt lt blXSeparation integer gt lt TblXColor string gt lt CellSeparation integer gt lt CellColor string gt lt DChBarSeparation integer gt lt DChBarColor string gt Separation values refer to the reserved default colors that appear in the Color pop up menu in the FrameMaker Tools palette This value Corresponds to this color lt Separation 0 gt Black lt Separation 1 gt White lt Separation 2 gt Red lt Separation 3 gt Green lt Separation 4 gt Blue lt Separation 5 gt Cyan lt Separation 6 gt Magenta lt Separation 7 gt Yellow lt Separation 8 gt Dark Grey 263 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference This value Corresponds to this color lt Separation 9 gt Pale Green lt Separation 10 gt Forest Green lt Separation 11 gt Royal Blue lt Separation 12 gt Mauve
217. end of ParaLine gt end of Para To summarize paragraphs inherit formats as follows e Formats in the Paragraph Catalog inherit properties from the formats above them e Locally defined paragraph formats inherit properties from previously specified formats Text lines in anchored frames inherit font properties from previously specified formats including the last format in the Paragraph Catalog and previous text lines Tips The following hints may help you minimize the MIF statements for paragraph formats e Ifpossible use the formats in the default Paragraph Catalog don t supply a Pgf Catalog statement If you know the names of the default paragraph formats you can tag paragraphs with the pgfTag statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 23 MIF Reference e Ifyou know that a document will use a particular template when it is imported into a FrameMaker document you can just tag the paragraphs in the text flow Don t create a new Paragraph Catalog in MIF it s easier to create catalogs in FrameMaker document templates e Ifyou need to provide a full Paragraph Catalog in a MIF file you can still use FrameMaker to ease the task of creating a catalog Create a template in FrameMaker save the template as a MIF file and include the Paragraph Catalog in your document For instructions see Including template files on page 44 Creating and applying character formats You can define character formats locally or store them in the Character
218. enenenennenenenenenenenenener 87 Pages angrer ee eek Dee net agar 107 MINITOG apene lees tials aled agai E est ar a reka ie ES 109 Graphic objects and graphic frames sanananenuanenenenenenneneneneneenenenenennenene 110 TEXt OWS arhent asata sb pid aa E AOE RE OER ge EGU ERR bia OeR NE Aen Yea eee as 129 Text insets text imported by reference 1 0 eee eee eee eee eee tence tent ee ence enees 137 Chapter 4 MIF Book File Statements MIE book filesovervieW sunesasae MA duns hee Aor eed loss ee eee ate toda hae Ree tea 144 MIF book file identification line 6 ccc cece cence cence nent nee te nen eetenene 145 Book statements SE HR EGEN 145 Chapter 5 MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books Structural element definitions 00 0 eee cece cece renee een ence tenet ene enee 156 Attribute definitions anaiena a peat aed dadeia ive ont eske ere bere ered 159 Formatrules so scescan sta een Gages hd 161 Format changelists ssrasirssanerka snekre vakre ke nske vindene cb auaeevaneeteete Elements Husa dessutsa resept kPa eee ena aad dae de Banner text Filter By Attribute XML data for structured documents eee eee cece cece eee een tenet ene n ea eenee Preference settings for structured documents vananunnenenenennanenenenenennenenenene Text in structured documents oo eee ec ec ee eee eee ene e tent e tent ee ence es 182 Structured book statements 02 eee cece cece eee e nent nen enc
219. ension gt Maximum right indent allowed in book A PgfSpBefore dimension gt Maximum space before allowed in book A PgfSpAfter dimension gt Maximum space after allowed in book lt PgfLeading dimension gt Maximum leading allowed in book lt FSize dimension gt Maximum font size allowed in book lt FDW dimension gt Maximum character spread allowed in book lt TSX dimension gt Minimum horizontal position of tab stop lt PgfCellLMargin dimension gt Minimum left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellBMargin dimension gt Minimum bottom cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellTMargin dimension gt Minimum top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellRMargin dimension gt Minimum right cell margin for first paragraph in a cell End of BFCLMaximums statement gt lt BFCLMinimums Lower change list limits Format change lists cannot decrement proper ties below these values lt PgfFIndent dimension gt Minimum first indent allowed in book lt PgfLIndent dimension gt Minimum left indent allowed in book lt PgfRIndent dimension gt Minimum right indent allowed in book lt PgfSpBefore dimension gt Minimum space before allowed in book lt PgfSpAfter dimension gt Minimum space after allowed in book MIF Reference 183 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt PgfLeading dimension gt Mi
220. ented by X and Y plus dimensions describing the width and height Used only by the DWindowRect and DViewRect statements within the Document statement and the BWindowRect statement within the Book statement The values are in pixels you cannot specify the units keyword A token value The allowed token values are listed for each statement you can provide only one value lt token gt Ellipsis points in a statement indicate required substatements or arguments The entire expanded statement occurs at this point Unit values You can specify the unit of measurement for most dimension data items The following table lists the units of measurement that FrameMaker supports and their notation in MIF Measurement unit Notation in MIF Relationship to other units point pt or point 1 72 inch inch orin 72 points millimeter mmormillimeter 1 inch is 25 4 mm centimeter cm or centimeter 1 inch is 2 54 cm pica pe or pica 12 points didot dd or didot 0 01483 inches cicero cc or cicero 12 didots Dimension data types can mix different units of measurement For example the statement lt CellMargins L T R B gt can be written as either of the following lt CellMargins 6 pt 18 pt 6 pt 24 pt gt lt CellMargins 6 pt 25 5 pica 2 pica gt Math values The mathFullForm statement uses metric values in formatting codes A metric unit represents one point 1 72 inch The metric type is a 32 bit fixed point number
221. equired EDGeneralRule statement specifies what the element can contain and in what order the element s contents can appear 158 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 159 MIF Reference An optional EDExclusions statement specifies elements that cannot appear in the defined element or in its descendants Anoptional EDInclusions statement specifies elements that can appear anywhere in the defined element or in its descendants The general rule specification must follow the conventions for data in a MIF string If a general rule contains angle brackets lt gt the right angle bracket must be preceded by a backslash in the MIF string For example an element that can contain text might have the following general rule lt EDGeneralRule lt TEXT gt gt If you don t provide a general rule statement for a container element the MIF interpreter applies the default rule lt ANY gt The rule means that any element or text is allowed The following general rule describes an element that must contain at least one element named Item lt ElementDef lt EDTag BulletList gt lt EDValidHighestLevel No gt lt EDGeneralRule Item gt lt EDObject EDContainer gt gt end of ElementDef For more information about content rules see the online manual FrameMaker Structure Application Developer s Guide Attribute definitions Element definitions can specify attribute definitions which describe attributes information stored with an element othe
222. er to any page edge lt FrameType Near gt On the side of the text column or text frame farther from any page edge lt FrameType Far gt Alignment of anchored frames If a graphic frame is anchored within a text column or text frame the AnchorAlign statement specifies the alignment of the anchored frame Unless anchored at the insertion point of the cursor the graphic frame can be aligned in one of the following ways If the graphic frame is aligned The Frame statement contains With the left side of the text column or text frame lt AnchorAlign Left gt In the center of the text column or text frame lt AnchorAlign Center gt With the right side of the text column or text frame lt AnchorAlign Right gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 119 MIF Reference If the graphic frame is aligned The Frame statement contains With the side of the text column or text frame closer to the binding ofthe lt AnchorAlign Inside gt book the inside edge With the side of the text column or text frame farther from the binding lt AnchorAlign Outside gt of the book the outside edge Group statement The Group statement defines a group of graphic objects and allows objects to be nested The Group statement must appear after all the objects that form the group It can appear at the top level or within a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt Group lt ID ID gt Group ID lt Unique ID
223. erning of 50 of an em to the left 0 50 Font vertical kerning 0x32 Specification by data type Metric Description of data Vertical kerning in percentage of an em a positive value moves characters downward a negative value moves characters upward Size of data in bytes 4 Default value default vertical kerning MIF Reference 294 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Example 32 00000004 00008000 for a font kerning of 50 of an em downward 0 50 32 00000004 FFFF8000 for a font kerning of 50 of an em upward 0 50 Font word spread value 0x33 Specification by data type Metric Description of data Percentage of spread Size of data in bytes 4 Default value default word spread Example 33 00000004 00008000 for a word spread of 50 0 50 33 00000004 FFFF8000 for a word spread of 50 0 50 Specifications of object op codes This section describes each object op code Op codes are listed by number and description The op code number is shown in parentheses Ellipse 0x80 Specification by data type Rectangle Description of data Position and size of ellipse in points Size of data in bytes 16 Example 80 00000010 01320000 00240000 007E0000 007E0000 for an ellipse with the following specifications x position 306 points 0132 y position 36 points 0024 width 126 points 007E height 126 poin
224. es All MIF 8 documents contain a catalog of predefined attribute values If no values are defined the catalog remains empty Each definition in a catalog includes an attribute tag Att ributeTag and the corresponding list of values AttributeValue DefAttrValuesCatalog statement The DefattrvaluesCatalog statement is used to define the contents of the Defined Attribute Values catalog A MIF file can contain one DefAttrValuesCatalog statement only Syntax lt DefAttrValuesCatalog lt DefAttrValues gt Defines an attribute and its corresponding values lt DefAttrValues gt Additional statements as required gt End of DefAttrValuesCatalog All MIF 8 documents contain a catalog of predefined filters DefAttrValues statement The DefAttrValues statement is used to define a set of attributes with relevant values Syntax lt DefAttrValues lt AttributeTag string gt Attribute Name lt AttributeValue string gt Attribute Value lt AttributeValue string gt Additional attribute values as required gt End of DefAttrValues ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 60 MIF Reference AttrCondExprCatalog statement The AttrcondExprCatalog statement is used to define the contents of the Attribute Expression catalog A MIF file can contain one AttrCondExprCatalog statement only Syntax lt AttrCondExprCatalog lt AttrCondExpr gt Defines a filter lt AttrCondE
225. es Kumihan tables are associated with a document To customize the Kumihan tables for a document you specify the tables in MIF Then you can import the MIF into an existing document or into a template you will use to create new documents Understanding Kumihan tables Kumihan tables specify line composition rules by assigning characters to various classes and then specifying four tables of rules that apply to the characters of each class The CharClass statement assigns each character to one of 25 classes For example the BegParentheses class and the EndParentheses class are defined by the following MIF statements and they contain the characters shown in the statement lt BegParentheses CHIPI gt lt EndParentheses CII HHJ gt For more information on the CharClass statement see CharClass statement on page 219 The four statements that define the tables of rules that apply to the characters of each class are SqueezeTable SpreadTable LineBreakTable and ExtraSpaceTable Each of these statements specify the actions FrameMaker takes for the characters in each of the 25 classes For example the LineBreakTable statement specifies whether a line break can occur between a character of one class and a character of another class Here is an example of a LineBreakTable statement that specifies when a line break can occur between a character in the BegParentheses class and a character in each of the 25 classes lt RegParenthes
226. es 1111212121227221 12I7221212121 1 13 1 1 1 1 1 gt 217 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 218 MIF Reference The 25 numerical values for the BegParentheses statement specify the actions FrameMaker takes when a character from each of the 25 classes such as an ending parenthesis character follows a character in the BegParen theses class The position of each numerical value after the BegParentheses statement specifies the class For example the first position is the BegParentheses class the EndParentheses class is the second position and so on Ifa numerical value of 0 is specified FrameMaker allows a line break between a character the BegParentheses class and a character in the class specified in that position in the statement If a value of 1 is specified FrameMaker does not allow a line break 4 3 H ri O H G H FH O Q Q oO 93 n g a O 3B 3 i EG o v0 g p U u w u U u u mL U S S H o 0 amp amp lt gaor n pb z H S Go 3 EQN HD YW A oo d O E Go HH HAMA EOH A V O U Hi S G 0 GT ON GF oH OB HH H Q a MO v 0M OUUU BH DAE EE eG DE H H 04140 AT 0020 2 4 G w U mH AN m 0 co GP U OU 02 09804400 HU FG GE GF 00 000 A A A HM VDA U U 020000 0 VHP GC GC U 0 H H H H H MO 4A UAH GF YO U A NH GH Wh En E E HU HH GB GB BW 0 o 0 3B 0020 AM 32 HarA Pp 6G 0232 28200070 A2220202 mH ZAUAN ZAUN KEE OMMA ZD mama ann unun n lt BegParentheses L de BENTE EE ETE EEE ET ME SETE LA The column position of each numerical value in the statemen
227. es are separated by a space An example of a squeeze table statement is lt SqueezeTable lt SqueezeHorizontal lt SqueezeVertical gt end of SqueezeTable BegParentheses EndParentheses NoLineBeginChar QuestionBang CenteredPunct PeriodComma NonSeparableChar PrecedingSymbol SucceedingSymbol AsianSpace Hiragana thers O BaseCharWithSuper BaseCharWithRubi Numeral UnitSymbol RomanSpace RomanChar ParenBeginWariChu ParenEndWariChu S parel WY pare2 Spare3 Spare4 112003 2000000085 0001 2 000 0 120042 0000000858 00031 2 0000 0 Spare5 0 0 In the preceding example the SqueezeHorizontal value for a character in the NoLineBeginChar class is 2 which specifies half squeeze from the right SpreadTable statement The SpreadTable statement defines how to reduce the squeeze that was applied to adjacent characters There are 25 statement rows in this table each corresponding to the 25 character classes respectively There are 26 numeric values in each statement row The first 25 values correspond to the 25 character classes respec tively The 26th value corresponds to the beginning or end of a line These values specify how to spread a character of the class identified by the row statement when followed by a character in the class identified by the column position in the statement Syntax lt SpreadTable lt BegParentheses numerals gt lt EndParenthe
228. ews statement contains View state ments that define which colors are visible in each color view VariableFormats Defines variables The VariableFormats statement contains VariableFormat statements that define each variable MarkerTypeCatalog Defines a catalog of user defined markers for the current document The MarkerType Catalog statement contains MarkerTypeCatalog statements that specify each user defined marker XRefFormats Defines cross reference formats The XRef Formats statement contains XRef Format statements that define each cross reference format Document Controls document features such as page size margins and column layout Because the MIF interpreter assumes the same page defaults as the New command this section is necessary only if you want to override those default settings BookComponent Provides the setup information for files generated from the document BookCompo nent statements describe the filename filename suffix file type and paragraph tags or marker types to include InitialAutoNums Provides a starting value for the autonumber series in a document Dictionary Lists allowed words in the document AFrames Describes all anchored frames in the document The AFrames statement contains Frame statements that define the contents ID number of each anchored frame Later in the MIF file where the document contents are described the MIF file must include an AFrame st
229. extRect statement defines a text frame It can appear at the top level or in a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt TextRect Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 111 lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of object before rotation in page or graphic frame coordi nates RNext integer gt ID of next text frame in flow m RNumColumns integer gt Number of columns in the text frame 1 10 m RColumnGap dimension gt Space between columns in the text frame 0 50 fe RCOlumnBalance boolean gt Yes means columns in the text frame are automatically adjusted to the same height RSideheadWidth dimension gt Width of side head area 0 50 A RSideheadGap dimension gt Gap between side head area and body text area 0 50 128 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 129 MIF Reference lt TRSideheadPlacement keyword gt Placement of side head in text frame keyword can be one of Left Right Inside Outside lt TextFlow See Text flows next gt End of TextRect statement Usage A text frame can contain one or more text columns up to ten text columns The number of columns and the space between columns are specified by the TRNumColumns and TRColumnGap statements respectively The space between columns cannot exceed 50 inches FrameMaker can adjust the height of the text columns to evenly dis
230. f the line number text Tables Table formats are defined by a Tb1Format statement Table formats can be locally defined or they can be stored in a Table Catalog which is defined by a Tb1Catalog statement The ruling styles used in a table are defined in a RulingCatalog statement In a MIF file all document tables are contained in one Tbls statement Each table instance is contained in a Tbl statement The ATb1 statement specifies where each table instance appears in the text flow TbICatalog statement The Tb1Catalog statement defines the Table Catalog A document can have only one Tb1 catalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt TblCatalog lt TblFormat gt Defines a table format see TbIFormat statement next lt TblFormat gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Tb1Catalog statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 74 MIF Reference TbIFormat statement The Tb1Format statement defines the format of a table A Tb1Format statement must appear in a Tb1Catalog or in a Tb1 statement A TblFormat statement contains property substatements that define a table s properties Table property statements can appear in any order Syntax Basic properties lt TblFormat lt TblTag tagstring gt Table format tag name lt TblLIndent dimension gt Left indent for the ta
231. file replace default formats The MIF interpreter does not add your paragraph format to the default Paragraph Catalog although it provides default values for unspecified properties in a paragraph format see Creating and applying paragraph formats on page 12 Pof statement The Pgf statement defines a paragraph format Pgf statements can appear in many statements the statement descriptions show where Pgf can be used The Pgf statement contains substatements that set the properties of a paragraph format Most of these properties correspond to those in the Paragraph Designer Properties can appear in any order within a Pgf statement with the following exception the PgfNumTabs statement must appear before any TabStop statements Syntax Basic properties lt Pgf Begin paragraph format lt PgfTag tagstring gt Paragraph tag name lt PgfUseNextTag boolean gt Turns on following paragraph tag feature lt PgfNextTag tagstring gt Tag name of following paragraph lt PgfFIndent dimension gt First line left margin measured from left side of current text column lt PgfFIndentRelative boolean gt Used for structured documents only lt PgfFIndentOffset dimension gt Used for structured documents only lt PgfLIndent dimension gt Left margin measured from left side of current text column lt PgfRIndent dimension gt Right margin measured from right side of current text column lt PgfAlignment keyword gt
232. fo statement A mini TOC is the only inline component that is available in a document The InlineComponentsInfo statement defines the information about all type of inline components present in the document Information about a particular type of inline component is defined using the InlineComponent Info statement A MIF file can have only one InlineComponentsInfo statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in the MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt InlineComponentsInfo 109 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt InlineComponentInfo gt Defines an inline component gt End of InlineComponentsInfo InlineComponentinfo statement The InlineComponent Info statement is used to define a set of attributes with values Syntax lt InlineComponentInfo lt InlineComponentType MTOC gt Type of inline component which is the mini TOC lt InlineComponentLinks boolean gt Specifies whether entries in an inline component are hyperlinked or not lt InlineComponentTag string gt Name of the paragraph tags included in the inline component for example Heading 1 gt H End of InlineComponent Info Graphic objects and graphic frames In a FrameMaker document graphic objects can appear directly on a page or within a graphic frame The following objects are considered graphic objects e Anchored and unanchored frames Text frames Text lines e O
233. for each paragraph property it acquires any property values explicitly defined in a previous Pgf statement Because the MIF interpreter sequentially reads MIF files it uses the most recently defined Pgf statement that occurs before the current statement in the file For example the following MIF code applies the default format named Body to the first paragraph in a document and locally overrides the paragraph font lt Para lt Pgf lt PgfTag Body gt lt PgfFont lt FWeight Bold gt gt end of PgfFont gt end of Pof lt ParaLine lt String First paragraph in document gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para lt Para lt ParaLine lt String Second paragraph in document gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para The previous example is in the sample file pgf fmt mif If you open this file in FrameMaker you ll find that the second paragraph also has the new font property A paragraph property remains in effect until the property value is changed by a subsequent MIF statement To change a paragraph property to another state supply a Pgf statement containing the paragraph property statement set to the new state Thus in the previous example you could change the font from Bold to Regular in a Pgf statement in the second Para statement lt Para lt Pgf lt PgfFont lt FWeight Regular gt gt end of PgfFont gt end of Pof lt ParaLine lt String Second paragraph in document gt gt
234. frame is an invisible frame that contains objects or graphic frames placed directly on a page The page frame is not described by any MIF statement When you import a MIF file into an existing FrameMaker document the default current page is the first page visible when the Import command is invoked the current frame is the currently selected frame on that page If there is no currently selected frame the current frame is the page frame for that page Generic object statements All object descriptions consist of the object type generic object statements containing information that is common to all objects and statements containing information that is specific to that type of object This section describes the generic object statements Syntax lt ID ID gt Object ID number lt GroupID ID gt ID of parent group object lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters lt Pen integer gt Pen pattern for lines and edges see Values for Pen and Fill statements on page 112 lt Fill integer gt Fill pattern for objects see Values for Pen and Fill statements on page 112 lt PenWidth dimension gt Line and edge thickness lt ObColor tagstring gt Applies color from Color Catalog see page 83 lt ObTint percentage gt Applies a tint to the object color 100 is equivale
235. from a database and store that information as a MIF file A user can then open or import the MIF file to get a fully formatted FrameMaker document that contains up to date infor mation from the database There are four key elements to a typical database publishing solution The database provides a system to enter manipulate select and sort data You can use any database that can create text based output files e MIF provides the data interchange format between the database and FrameMaker MIF can completely describe a document in ASCII format including information such as text and graphics page layout and indexes and cross references e FrameMaker provides the text formatting FrameMaker reads MIF files and dynamically manages line breaks page breaks headers and footers and graphics The user can view print save or even navigate through an online document using hypertext commands ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 50 MIF Reference Optional control programs allow you to tightly integrate the database and FrameMaker Some database publishing applications are controlled entirely from the database system or through hypertext commands embedded in a FrameMaker document More complicated applications may require an external control program such as a C program that issues queries and selects a FrameMaker document template Ge Text Final Document
236. g facet data it should process the subsequent data as hexadecimal until it encounters another x If your facet contains a mix of ASCII characters and hexadecimal data it might be simpler for you to represent the ASCII characters as character codes in hexadecimal For example the FrameVector format represents strings such as black as character codes in hexadecimal such as 62 6c 61 63 6b 275 Chapter 12 EPSI Facet Format EPSI is an interchange standard developed by Adobe Systems Incorporated You can obtain a complete specification of the EPSI format from Adobe Systems Incorporated Imported graphics can contain graphic data in EPSI format This data is called the EPSI facet of the graphic Adobe FrameMaker can use this facet to display and print the graphic For more information about facets see Facet Formats for Graphics Ina MIF file the EPSI facet is contained in the Import Object statement For more information about the statement see ImportObject statement on page 119 Specification of an EPSI facet An EPSI facet begins with the following facet name and data type lines EPSI amp SV Each line of EPSI facet data ends with n When FrameMaker imports a graphic inset with an EPSI facet FrameMaker uses the EPSI bounding box to determine the graphic inset s size If the bounding box does not fit on the page FrameMaker halves its dimensions until it fits Example of an EPSI facet The following recta
237. g lines specify the FrameVector version 6 0 and the size 5 x 3 or 360 points by 216 points and position 0 0 of the FrameVector graphic amp 010000000150 amp 020000001000000000000000000168000000D80000 Since colors are not used in this example the color op codes are not specified Specification of the rectangle shadow The drop shadow of the rectangle is drawn first since it appears behind the other graphic objects The rectangle has the following specifications e The line width is 0 5 point amp 230000000400008000 The pen pattern is none OF amp 21000000010F e The color is black amp 24000000080006426C61636B00 e The line is solid not dashed amp 260000000100 e The fill pattern is grey 04 amp 220000000104 e The rotation angle is 0 amp 200000000400000000 e The position of the rectangle is 122 points 82 points amp 8300000010007A000000520000 The size of the rectangle is 192 points by 25 points 00C0000000190000 301 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 302 MIF Reference Specification of the polygon The polygon in this example has the following specifications The pen pattern is solid 00 amp 210000000100 e The fill pattern is white 07 amp 220000000107 The polygon has three points amp 810000001C00000003 e The positions of the three points are 15 points 65 points 41 points 113 points and 76 points 65 points 000E0000004100000029000000710000004C000000410000 The rest of t
238. ge lt TiFlowName string gt If the text inset is not imported from the main flow specifies the tag of the flow to import if the source file is an edition set to Windows edition lt TiFormatRemoveOverrides boolean gt When reformatting to use the current document s formats Yes specifies that format overrides are removed lt TiFormatRemovePageBreaks boolean gt When reformatting to use the current document s formats Yes specifies that manual page breaks are removed gt End of TiFlow statement Usage If the imported text flow is not the main flow of the source document the TiPageSpace and TiFlowName substate ments identify the flow in the source document that serves as the imported text flow Text imported from another document can obtain formatting information from the original document if the TiFormatting statement is set to TiSource or from the current document if the TiFormatt ing statement is set to TiEnclosing 141 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 142 MIF Reference e Ifthe imported text flow is reformatted to use the current document s formats the TiFormatRemoveOverrides substatement specifies whether or not format overrides in the text are removed and the TiFormatRemovePage Breaks substatement specifies whether or not manual page breaks in the text are removed e Ifthe imported text flow retains the formatting of the source document the paragraph character table variable and cross reference formats used in the inset are marked
239. ge dimension gt Change to space below paragraph A PgfLineSpacingFixed boolean gt Yes means the lines spacing is fixed to the default font size 168 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt PgfLeading dimension gt Space below each line in a paragraph lt PgfLeadingChange dimension gt Change to space below each line in a paragraph lt PgfNumTabs integer gt Number of tabs in a paragraph To clear all the tabs in a para graph specify 0 lt TabStop Begin definition of tab stop the following property statements can appear in any order but must appear withina TabStop statement lt TSX dimension gt Horizontal position of tab stop lt TSXRelative boolean gt Yes means the tab stop is relative to the left indent a lt TSType keyword gt Tab stop alignment keyword can be one of Left Center Right Decimal lt TSLeaderStr string gt Tab stop leader string for example lt TSDecimalChar integer gt Align decimal tab around a character by ASCII value in UNIX versions type man ascii ina UNIX window for a list of char acters and their corresponding ASCII values gt Endof TabStop statement lt TabStop gt Additional statements as needed lt MoveTabs dimension gt Move all tabs by a specified distance A format change list can have one or more TabStob statements oraMoveTabs statement It can t have both Default fo
240. geSize W H gt Page width and height written by FrameMaker but ignored when a MIF file is read or imported see DPageSi ze on page 89 lt PageAngle degrees gt Rotation angle of page in degrees 0 90 180 270 angles are measured in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the page s original orientation as deter mined by the page size see DPageSi ze on page 89 lt PageBackground keyword gt Names master page to use for current page background body pages only keyword can be one of None Default pagename lt TextRect gt Defines text frame see page 128 lt Frame gt Graphic frames on the page see the section Graphic objects and graphic frames on page 110 Graphic object statements Objects on the page see the section Graphic objects and graphic frames on page 110 Filter statements lt HeaderL string gt Left header string lt HeaderC string gt Center header string lt HeaderR string gt Right header string lt FooterL string gt Left footer string 108 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt FooterC string gt Center footer string lt FooterR string gt Right footer string lt HFMargins L T R B gt Header footer margins lt HFFont Header footer font see page 66 lt Font gt gt lt Columns integer gt Default number of columns lt ColumnGap dimension gt Default column gap gt End of Page statement Usage Master and reference page names supplied
241. gt o lt MathFullForm char degree gt 5 lt MathFullForm char delta gt A lt MathFullForm char Delta gt lt MathFullForm char emptyset gt lt MathFullForm char epsilon gt n lt MathFullForm char eta gt y lt MathFullForm char gamma gt r lt MathFullForm char Gamma gt 3 lt MathFullForm char Im gt lt MathFullForm char infty gt l lt MathFullForm char iota gt K lt MathFullForm char kappa gt Ja lt MathFullForm char lambda gt A lt MathFullForm char Lambda gt lt MathFullForm char ldots gt u lt MathFullForm char mu gt V lt MathFullForm char nabla gt lt MathFullForm char nu gt 198 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Example MathFullForm statement o lt MathFullForm char omega gt Q lt MathFullForm char Omega gt o lt MathFullForm char phi gt D lt MathFullForm char Phi gt T lt MathFullForm char pi gt ul lt MathFullForm char Pi gt lt MathFullForm char pprime gt lt MathFullForm char prime gt y lt MathFullForm char psi gt Y lt MathFullForm char Psi gt R lt MathFullForm char Re gt p lt MathFullForm char rho gt o lt MathFullForm char sigma gt gt lt MathFullForm char Sigma gt z lt MathFullForm cha
242. gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters lt Angle gt Rotation angle of group see page 111 gt End of Group statement Usage When the MIF interpreter encounters a Group statement it searches all objects within the current graphic frame for those group IDs that match the ID of the Group statement These objects are then collected to form the group All objects with the same group ID must be listed in the MIF file before their associated Group statement is listed If multiple Group statements have the same ID the results will be unpredictable For more information about the group ID see Generic object statements on page 111 ImportObject statement The Importobject statement describes an imported graphic It can appear at the top level or within a Page or Frame statement The imported graphic is either copied into the document or imported by reference e Ifthe imported graphic is copied into the document the data describing the graphic is recorded within the ImportObject statement The description of a graphic in a given format is called a facet e FrameMaker uses facets to display graphics print graphics or store additional graphic information Imported graphics can have more than one facet which means that the graphic is described in more than one format e Ifthe graphic is imported by reference the data describing the graphic is no
243. he Import ObFile statement was used to specify the pathname for graphics imported by reference The statement which is no longer used supplies a UNIX style pathname which uses a slash to separate directories for example lt ImportObFile usr doc template mif gt FrameMaker still writes the ImportObFile statements to a MIF file for compatibility with version 1 0 of FrameMaker ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 123 MIF Reference Facets in imported graphics If a graphic is copied into a document the data describing the graphic is stored as facets in the MIF file Graphics imported by reference also use facets but these are temporary and are not saved to the file A MIF file with a graphic imported by reference does not contain any facets A facet contains graphic data in a specific format For example a TIFF facet contains graphic data described in TIFF format An EPSI facet contains graphic data in EPSI format Facets and facet formats are described in the appendixes of this manual e Fora general description of facets and facet formats see Facet Formats for Graphics e Fora description of the facet format for EPSI graphic data see EPSI Facet Format e Fora description of the Framelmage format used in facets see FrameImage Facet Format e Fora description of the FrameVector format in facets see FrameVector Facet Format Record of the filter used to import graphic by reference The ImportHint statement cont
244. he Tb1 statement must appear before the ATb1 statement that refers to it Each Tb1 statement can have only one associated ATb1 statement and vice versa For more information about the ATb1 statement see ParaLine statement on page 132 Syntax lt Tbl lt TblID ID gt Table ID number lt TblTag tagstring gt Applies format from Table Catalog lt TblFormat gt Overrides Table Catalog format as needed see page 74 Table columns lt TblNumColumns integer gt Number of columns in the table lt TblColumnWidth dimension gt Width of first column lt TblColumnWidth dimension gt Width of second column Width of remaining columns as needed lt EqualizeWidths Makes specified columns the same width as the widest column for filters only see page 81 lt TblColumnNum integer gt First column lt TblColumnNum integer gt More columns as needed gt End of EqualizeWidths statement Table title lt TblTitle Begin definition of table title lt TblTitleContent Table title s content represented in one or more Para statements lt Notes gt Footnotes for table title see page 130 lt Para gt Title text see page 131 lt Para gt Additional statements as needed ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 79 MIF Reference End of Tpb1TitleContent statement gt gt End of Tb1Title statement Table rows lt
245. he TiTb1NumHdrRows substatement is not set to 0 the table has header rows If the TiTblHeadersEmpty substatement is set to No these rows are filled with imported text on page 143 Structured document statements In version 5 FrameMaker does not support statements for structured documents such as Element DefCatalog and DElementBorderson FrameMaker strips these statements when reading in a MIF file When writing out a MIF file FrameMaker does not write these statements FrameVector graphic format The internal graphic format Frame Vector is supported for imported vector graphics The specifications for this facet are described in FrameVector Facet Format Changes between versions 3 and 4 This section describes the changes to MIF syntax between versions 3 and 4 of FrameMaker 4 00 top level MIF statements The following table lists top level statements introduced between versions 3 and 4 of FrameMaker New statement Action in earlier versions lt ColorCatalog gt All custom colors revert to Cyan ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference New statement Action in earlier versions lt Views gt Ignored Changes to 3 00 MIF statements This section describes the statements that have changed or that have introduced additional property statements between versions 3 and 4 of FrameMaker MIF statements that have changed include Color statements Math statements Character format stat
246. he styles are inherited from the previous object Specification of the rectangle The white rectangle in this example has the following specifications The position of the rectangle is 114 points 74pt amp 830000001000720000004A0000 The size of the rectangle is 192 points by 25 points 00C0000000190000 The rest of the styles are inherited from previous objects Specification of the text line The text line in this example has the following specifications e The position of the text line is 123 points 92 points and the text line is left aligned amp 8700000009007B0000005C000000 The text line uses the Helvetica font amp 2A0000000C00000A xHelvetica x00 The text line uses a 9 point font amp 2B0000000400090000 The font variation is Regular amp 300000000A0008526567756C617200 e The font angle is Regular amp 2F0000000A0008526567756C617200 e The font weight is Regular amp 2E0000000A0008526567756C617200 The font word spread value is 50 amp 330000000400008000 e The font style is Small Caps amp 2C0000000400001000 The text in the text line is FrameVector Graphic amp 88000000160014 xFrameVector Graphic x00 The rest of the styles are inherited from previous objects The following record specifies the end of the text line amp 8900000000 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 303 MIF Reference Specification of the polyline The polyline in this example has the following specifications The arrow style has
247. her than a document window menu bar e To suppress the display of scroll bars and border buttons in the document window use the following statement lt DViewOnlyWinBorders No gt To suppress selection in the document window include the following statement lt DViewOnlySelect No gt You can normally select text and objects in a locked document by Control dragging in UNIX and Windows versions Specifying lt DViewOnlySelect No gt prevents all selection in a locked document To suppress the appearance of a document region pop up menu use the statement lt DViewOnlyWinPopup No gt A document region pop up menu is a menu activated by the right mouse button For example in UNIX versions of FrameMaker the Maker menu can be accessed by pressing the right mouse button If the DviewonlyWinPopup statement has a value of No the background menu does not appear when the right mouse button is pressed This statement has no effect in the Windows version of FrameMaker To make a window behave as a palette window use the following statement lt DViewOnlyWinPalette Yes gt A palette window is a command window such as the Equations palette that exhibits special platform dependent behavior In UNIX versions of FrameMaker a palette window can only be dismissed it cannot be closed to an icon In Windows versions a palette floats outside the main application window and cannot be unlocked To edit the palette you need to reset the DviewoOnlyWinPale
248. herwise it specifies a paragraph tag table tag marker type cross reference format or equation size Only text and object format rules can include this statement lt FmtChangeListTag tagstring gt The tag of a named format change list a format change list in the format change list catalog For more information on format change lists see Format change lists on page 167 Object format rules can t include this statement lt FmtChangeList gt The definition of an unnamed format change list For more information on format change lists see Format change lists on page 167 Object format rules can t include this statement lt ContextFormatRule gt The definition of a nested context format rule lt LevelFormatRule gt The definition of a nested level format rule lt ContextLabel labelstring gt The context label for generated files It cannot contain white space characters or any of these special characters Chel ee Peo ss DP See a fb When a user displays the Set Up dialog box to set up a generated file the label appears next to elements to which the If ElseIf or Else statement applies Only text and object format rules can include this statement MIF Reference 166 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 167 MIF Reference lt ElementPrefix string gt A string that appears before the element Only prefix rules can include this statement lt ElementSuffix string gt A string that a
249. iableFormat statement for each document variable The variableFormat statement provides the variable name and definition lt VariableFormats lt VariableFormat lt VariableName Product Number gt lt VariableDef A15 24 gt gt end of VariableFormat ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 39 MIF Reference gt end of VariableFormats The variable name must be unique case and spaces are significant For a user variable the variable definition can contain only text and character formats you can provide any character format defined in the Character Catalog The following example applies the default character format Emphasis to a variable lt VariableFormat lt VariableName Product Number gt lt VariableDef lt Emphasis gt A15 24 lt Default f Font gt gt gt end of VariableFormat You can specify character formats as building blocks that is the character format name must be enclosed in angle brackets Because of MIF parsing requirements you must use a backslash sequence for the closing angle bracket Using system variables Whenever you open or import a MIF file the MIF interpreter provides the default system variables You can redefine a system variable but you cannot provide new system variables System variables are defined by a variableFormat statement For example the following statement shows the default definition for the system variable Page Count lt VariableFormat lt VariableName Page Count gt lt VariableDef lt
250. ibes a polyline It can appear at the top level or in a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt PolyLine Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 111 lt HeadCap keyword gt Type of head cap for lines and arcs keyword can be one of ArrowHead Butt Round Square lt TailCap keyword gt Type of tail cap for lines and arcs keyword can be one of ArrowHead Butt Round Square lt ArrowStyle gt See ArrowStyle statement on page 115 lt Smoothed boolean gt Yes smooths angles to rounded curves lt NumPoints integer gt Number of vertices lt Point X Y gt Position in page or graphic frame coordinates More points as needed End of PolyLine statement Usage The PolyLine statement is used for both simple and complex lines A simple line is represented as a PolyLine with lt NumPoints 2 gt The NumPoints statement is optional When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it counts the Point statements to determine the number of points in the polyline 126 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Rectangle statement The Rectangle statement describes rectangles and squares It can appear at the top level or in a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt Rectangle Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 111 lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of object before rotation in page or g
251. ibing the imported graphic lt NativeOrigin X Y gt Coordinates of the origin of the imported graphic within the page or frame applicable for graphics that use coordinate systems such as EPS lt ImportObEditor string gt Name of application to call to edit bitmap graphic inset or imported object ignored for FrameVector graphics lt ImportObUpdater string gt Identifies the imported graphic object or an embedded Windows OLE object For a description of the syntax of the string see Methods of importing graphics on page 122 lt ImportURL string gt The http file path of graphic files imported by reference 120 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt ObjectInfo string gt U3D model properties such as lighting scheme background color existing view and rendering mode The properties specified in this tag are applied to the U3D object when a MIF file containing a U3D object is opened in FrameMaker Description of record lt view name gt lt color gt lt lighting scheme gt lt rendering mode gt e lt view name gt Valid view of the given U3D object e lt lighting schemes Valid values are from 2 to 9 where 2 corresponds to Lights From File and 9 to HeadLamp e lt rendering mode Valid values are from 1 to 15 where 1 corre sponds to Bounding Box and 15 to Hidden Wireframe Example lt ObjectInfo cameral 167772
252. ic created in FrameMaker If the imported graphic is stored in a separate file the file must include the header string lt MakerVectorXxxx gt Specification of FrameVector data A description of a graphic in FrameVector format consists of records Each record contains the following fields A unique one byte op code e A four byte integer specifying the size of the data The actual data The following figure illustrates the breakdown of a typical record One byte op code Four byte field describing the size of Actual data of variable length the data 9 bytes long in this case as j specified by the previous field T 87 00000009 017A0000002D000000 L Types and listing of op codes Each record begins with an op code The op code can be one of the following three types e Definition e The definition op codes specify the version of the FrameVector graphic and any global information used in the graphic such as colors Any definitions used by the style and object op codes must be specified before these op codes e Style ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 285 MIF Reference The style op codes define the styles applied to all operations until the styles are changed For example all graphics objects use the same line width fill pattern and color until the style op codes change All styles need to be defined before specifying the first object op code Object The object op codes define graphics objects The following tab
253. ically correct but cause unexpected results in the document check for mismatched ID numbers and check the placement of statements Many MIF statements are position dependent and can cause errors if they appear in the wrong place in a file For example an ATb1 statement that comes before its corresponding Tb1 statement causes an error ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 51 MIF Reference Here are some additional tips for debugging MIF files Use the verbose statement to generate comments To debug a specific section of a MIF file you can precede the section with the lt verbose Yes gt statement and end the section with the lt verbose No gt statement e Make sure angle brackets are balanced e Make sure that MIF statement names are capitalized correctly MIF statement names and keyword values are case sensitive e Make sure that string arguments are enclosed in straight single quotation marks See MIF data items on page 5 for an example e Make sure ID numbers are unique e Make sure that every table anchor has a corresponding table instance and that every table instance has an anchor in the text flow e Make sure that tag names with spaces are enclosed in straight single quotation marks e Make sure paired statements are balanced For example XRef and XRefEnd statements must be paired e Make sure that right angle bracket gt and backslash characters in text are preceded by a backslash e Make sure that hexadecimal characters for exa
254. ied by the TiTb1Sep substatement and the number of these characters used as a single divider is specified by the TiTb1NumSep substatement e For example ifthe imported text uses a single tab character to distinguish the contents of one table cell from the next the following substatements are used H blSep t gt H blNumSep 1 gt e As another example if the imported text uses two spaces to distinguish the contents of one table cell from the next the following substatements are used lt TiTblSep gt lt TiTblNumSep 2 gt If the Ti Tb1NumHdrRows substatement is not set to 0 the table has header rows If the Ti Tb1HeadersEmpty substatement is set to No these rows are filled with imported text 143 144 Chapter 4 MIF Book File Statements MIF book file overview The following table lists the main statements in a MIF book file in the order that Adobe FrameMaker writes them You should follow the same order that FrameMaker uses with the exception of the macro statements and control statements which can appear anywhere at the top level of a file Each statement except the Book statement is optional Most main statements use substatements to describe objects and their properties Section Description Book Labels the file as a MIF book file The Book statement is required and must be the first statement in the file Macro statements Defines macros with a define statement a
255. ield in PDF the name of a File Info field must be 126 characters or less Represent non printable characters via HH where identifies a hexadecimal representation of a character and HH is the hexadecimal value for the character For example use 23 to represent the character Zero value hex codes 400 are illegal For more information see PDF Document Info on page 88 lt Value string gt A string of up to 255 ASCII characters that represents the value of a Document Info field because a single MIF string contains no more than 255 ASCII characters you can use more than one Value statement for a given Key A Value can include Unicode characters represent Unicode characters via amp HixHHHH where amp x opens the character code the character closes the character code and HHHH are as many hexadec imal values as are required to represent the character For more information see PDF Document Info on page 88 You can repeat paired groupings of Key and Value statements End of PDFBookInfo statement MIF Reference The BookFileInfostatement stores encoded packets of information XMP data that corresponds with values of fields in the File Info dialog box This statement can only appear in the Book statement Syntax lt BookFilelnfo gt Specifies the same information that appears in lt PDFBookInfo gt except it expresses these values as encoded data You should not try to
256. ientation ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 266 MIF Reference When the MIF interpreter reads a Page statement that includes both a PageAngle and a PageOrientation statement it ignores the PageOrientation statement When the interpreter reads a Page statement that contains a PageOrientation statement but no PageAngle statement it determines the page s angle from the PageOrien tation statement If the page orientation matches the orientation determined by the DpageSize statement the page s angle is 0 degrees otherwise the page s angle is 90 degrees A page that has neither a PageAngle nor a PageOrientation statement has an angle of 0 degrees 267 Chapter 11 Facet Formats for Graphics When you copy a graphic into an Adobe FrameMaker document the FrameMaker document stores the graphic data in one or more facets Each facet contains data in a specific graphic format FrameMaker uses facets to display and print graphics In UNIX versions of FrameMaker you can associate a graphic application with FrameMaker through the FrameMaker API or through the FrameServer interface You can set this up so that the graphics created and modified in the graphic application can be imported directly into a FrameMaker document The graphic application becomes a graphic inset editor Graphic inset editors write graphic data to graphic insets which can be read by FrameMaker For more information on setting up graphic inset editors see the FDK Programmer s Guide an
257. ikake and Nibukake rules that specify how to handle spacing between a rubi block and an adjacent character lt Numeral chars gt 15 Characters for numerals lt UnitSymbol chars gt 16 This class is not used by FrameMaker lt RomanSpace chars gt 17 Characters for spaces in Roman text lt RomanChar chars gt 18 Characters for Roman text lt ParenBeginWariChu chars gt 19 The current version of FrameMaker does not support Warichu this class is not used by FrameMaker lt ParenEndWariChu chars gt 20 The current version of FrameMaker does not support Warichu this class is not used by FrameMaker lt Sparel chars gt 21 Reserved for a user defined character class lt Spare2 chars gt 22 Reserved for a user defined character class lt Spare3 chars gt 23 Reserved for a user defined character class lt Spare4 chars gt 24 Reserved for a user defined character class lt Spare5 chars gt 25 Reserved for a user defined character class End of the CharClass statement MIF Reference 220 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 221 MIF Reference Usage Assigning characters to a class identifies them in the succeeding tables so the various typographical rules can be specified for each class of character Any character that is not assigned to a class is automatically assigned to the lt others gt class When specifying classes you should not assign any characters to lt Others gt In fact it is not necessary to include a MIF statement for
258. ile it places all hidden conditional text in a text flow with the tag name HIDDEN Within the document text flow a conditional text marker lt Marker lt MType 10 gt gt indicates where hidden condi tional text would appear if shown ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 42 MIF Reference The marker text contains a plus sign followed by a unique five digit integer The corresponding block of hidden text is in the hidden text flow It begins with a conditional text marker containing a minus sign and a matching integer and ends with a marker containing an equal sign and the same integer One or more Para statements appear between the markers If the hidden conditional text doesn t span paragraphs all the text appears in one Para statement If the hidden text spans paragraphs each end of paragraph in the conditional text forces a new Para statement in the hidden text flow The following example shows how FrameMaker writes the sentence used in the previous example This text flow contains the sentence as it appears in the document body lt Text Flow lt TFTag A gt lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt lt Para lt ParaLine lt String Our company makes a full line of gt This marker indicates that hidden text appears in the hidden text flow lt Marker lt MType 10 gt lt MText 88793 gt lt MCurrPage 0 gt gt end of Marker lt Conditional lt InCondition Summer gt gt end of Conditional lt String cool and comfortable t
259. iles for each component in the book This setting is ignored in individual documents lt DPD FStartPage string gt A string for the page number for the starting page in the page range _ top use this setting DPDFA11 Pages must be set to No lt DPDFStructure boolean gt Yes indicates that the document includes structure statements for Structured PDF lt DPDFStructureDefined boolean gt Statement to determine how FrameMaker should display the PDF structure settings in the PDF Setup dialog box this statement is for internal FrameMaker use and you should not modify it lt PDFDoclInfo gt Specifies the information that appears in the File Info dictionary when you save the document as PDF Each File Info entry consists of one Key statement followed by at least one Value statement FrameMaker ignores any Key state ment that is not followed by at least one Value statement There is no representation in this statement of the default fields for Creator Creation Date orMetaData Date For more information see PDF Document Info on page 88 lt Key string gt A string of up to 255 ASCII characters that represents the name of a Document Info field in PDF the name of a Document Info field must be 126 characters or less Represent non printable characters via HH where identifies a hexadecimal representation of a character and HH is the hexadec imal value for the character For example use
260. in text see ParaLine statement on page 132 VariableFormats and VariableFormat statements The variableFormats statement defines document variables to be used in document text flows A MIF file can have only one VariableFormats statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Each variableFormat statement supplies a variable name and its definition The statement must appear in a VariableFormats statement Syntax lt VariableFormats lt VariableFormat lt VariableName tagstring gt Name of variable lt VariableDef string gt Variable definition gt End of VariableFormat statement lt VariableFormat gt Additional statements as needed gt End of VariableFormats statement Usage VariableName contains the name of the variable used later in the MIF file by variable to position the variable in text VariableDef contains the variables definition A system defined variable definition consists of a sequence of building blocks text and character formats A user defined variable consists of text and character formats only The system variables for the current page number and running headers and footers can only appear on a master page in an untagged text flow You cannot insert any variables in a tagged text flow on a master page You can insert variables anywhere else in a text flow For more information about variables and the building blocks they can
261. include the name of the custom operator from the reference page For example suppose a document has a custom operator MyFunct ion that is added to the DMathcatalog statement as follows lt DMathCatalog lt DMathNew ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 212 MIF Reference Names the new operator lt DMathOpName MyFunction gt Specifies the operator type lt DMathNewType Function gt gt end of DMathNew gt end of DMathCatalog The corresponding MathFullForm statement appears as follows lt MathFullForm newfunction T MyFunction T char x gt You do not use one of the custom operator expressions to insert a redefined math operator in an equation Instead you use the expression for the built in operator but force FrameMaker to use the new symbol from the reference page For example suppose you redefine the built in operator asin and add it to the Math Catalog as follows lt DMathCatalog lt DMathOpOverrides Names the built in operator lt DMathOpName asin gt Forces lookup from reference page lt DMathOpTLineOverride Yes gt gt end of DMathOpOverrides gt end of DMathCatalog You would use the following MathFullForm statement lt MathFullForm asin T Inverse Sine T operands gt where the string Inverse Sine is the name given to the frame on the reference page Sample equations The following examples show MathFullForm statements for complete equations Example 1 2 b yb 4ac KE e
262. includes a font with lt FEncoding JISX0208 ShiftJIS gt but that font family is not available on the user s system then the text will appear in some other font on the system that uses Japanese encoding If there is no Japanese encoded font on the system the text appears in Roman encoding and the user will see garbled characters FPlatformName statement The lt FPlatformName string gt statement provides a platform specific ASCII string name that uniquely identifies a font for a particular platform The string value consists of several fields separated by a period Windows The Windows platform name has the following syntax lt FPlatformName W FaceName ItalicFlag Weight Variation gt W Platform designator FaceName Windows face name for more information see your Windows documentation ItalicFlag Whether font is italic use one of the following flags I Italic R Regular Weight Weight classification for example 400 regular or 700 bold Variation Optional variation for example Narrow The following statements are valid representations of the Windows font Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique lt FPlatformName W Helvetica Narrow I 700 gt lt FPlatformName W Helvetica I 700 Narrow gt Object styles An object style is defined by a Style statement Object styles can be defined locally or they can be stored in the Object Style catalog which is defined by a StyleCatalog statement StyleCatalog statement The s
263. ine sample files You can open these examples in FrameMaker and experiment with them by adding additional MIF statements Look for the sample files in the following location In this version Look here UNIX SFMHOME fminit language Samples MIF where language isthe language in use such as usenglish Windows The MIF directory under the samples directory Working with MIF files A MIF file is an alternate representation of a FrameMaker document in ASCII format MIF files are usually generated by FrameMaker or by an application that writes out MIF statements You can however create MIF files by using a text editor or by using FrameMaker as a text editor This section provides some general information about working with MIF files regardless of the method you use to create them Opening and saving MIF files When you save a FrameMaker document you usually save it in Normal format FrameMaker s binary format for document files To save a document as a MIF file choose Save As from the File menu In the Save Document dialog box choose Interchange MIF from the Format pop up menu You should give the saved file the suffix mif to distinguish it from a file saved in binary format When you open or import a MIF file FrameMaker reads the file directly translating it into a FrameMaker document or book When you save the document in Normal format FrameMaker creates a binary document file To prevent overwriting the original MIF file
264. ing Description of data Name of color tag string PANTONE name or number string Size of data in bytes Variable Example 05 0000001A 00 OB 53 61 67 65 20 47 72 65 65 6E 00 00 04 35 37 3000 for a color named Sage Green with the PANTONE number 570 Note See Definition op codes on page 285 for more information on color definitions End of the vector graphic 0xFF Specification by data type N A Description of data None ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Size of data in bytes 0 Example FF 00000000 Note This must be the last op code for a FrameVector graphic Specifications of style op codes This section describes each style op code Op codes are listed by number and description The op code number is shown in parentheses Note that these styles remain in place until another style op code resets the style Dashed line style 0x06 Specification by data type Short metric metric Description of data Number of dash segments short Length of dash segments in points metric metric Size of data in bytes Variable Default value None solid Example 06 0000000A 0002 00080000 00060000 for a dashed line with the following specifications number of dash segments 2 dash segment 1 line segment 8 0 points long dash segment 2 gap in dashed line
265. ing View Only document options eee cece cece een n ene n cent eenees 45 Applications of MIF orsccasiettadehas tant seeetare asiater te keine 47 Debugging MIF files adel cideaeaiad seeks alpene pek duane coh aa etat 50 Other application tools ranuananenenuenenenenennenenenennenenenenennenenenennenenener 51 Where to go from here xs rumsssye ced neka ates Area bd ie ee Aenea de ote eng 51 Chapter 3 MIF Document Statements MIF Tile layout e te dele read Bea Be Ee RR EI ek Se Bo ek BERNE ST 52 MIFFile statement ar 26 ede HTA NPA ENGS AG 54 Macro statements sorry ste seg Enn vaser velge he bale ga eg Reh Gang arkene dead 55 Tr ck edited text Lanseres este wiateisivad Serena se re NESS 56 Conditional text kisses aa id it 56 Boolean expressions miee ea aE ON EE EAA ETAN EDERA AA AN PIANE EA EAS ENNE 58 Filter By Attribute lt tens apaa e Ta mabe E A a E AEO itte 59 Paragraph formats a e a a kaiser 34 and dade ade ao abd e EEEE 60 Character formats usunne 65 Object Styles sau pus wae Eadie Wasa bakre eaten ees Maan een aS A weds 70 Eine numbers ardeii i a sot hora Mane Sipe etal peed p rapid 73 Tables utse tins peeageg seek GeAN eee Ve ae a karakter knee g 73 COI eases stood seeders eee aparte krage is 83 Variables Jauistureknnsasasmnasgsirensuenarer eee ae gel AERIAN eR 86 Grosssreferences vas arsthdads dae hot deh a gre bee eda Suet tine a par 86 Global document properties arsnuananenenenneneneneneenen
266. ing the default templates and setup files see the online manual Customizing FrameMaker for UNIX versions of FrameMaker For the and Windows version see the chapter on templates in your user manual Current state and inheritance FrameMaker has a MIF interpreter that reads and parses MIF files When you open or import a MIF file the inter preter reads the MIF statements and creates a FrameMaker document that contains the objects described in the MIF file When the interpreter reads a MIF file it keeps track of the current state of certain objects If the interpreter reads an object with properties that are not fully specified it applies the current state to that object When an object acquires the current state it inherits the properties stored in that state For example if the line width is set to 1 point for a graphic object the interpreter continues to use a 1 point line width for graphic objects until a new value is specified in the MIF file Similarly if the MIF file specifies a format for a paragraph the interpreter uses the same format until a new format is specified in the file The MIF interpreter keeps track of the following document objects and properties e Units e Condition tag properties e Paragraph format properties e Character format properties ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 4 MIF Reference e Page properties e Graphic frame properties e Text frame properties e Fill pattern e Pen pattern e Line width e Line cap
267. ing to be used for all subsequent Asian text in the document To see the characters spelling the word Korean you must view the MIF file on a system that is enabled for Korean character display When the MIF is displayed on a Roman system the characters appear garbled Syntax lt MIFEncoding Shab o originally written as Korean Combined Fonts Combined fonts assign two component fonts to one combined font name This is done to handle both an Asian font and a Western font as though they are in one font family In a combined font the Asian font is the base font and the Roman font is the Western font For example you can create a combined font named Mincho Palatino that uses Mincho for Asian characters and switches to Palatino for Roman characters When reading a MIF paragraph that uses Mincho Palatino FrameMaker displays Asian characters in Mincho and Roman characters in Palatino If the Mincho font is not installed on the user s system FrameMaker displays the Asian text in a font that uses the same character encoding as Mincho CombinedFontCatalog statement Combined fonts are defined for the document in the CombinedFont Catalog statement For each combined font there is a CombinedFontDefn statement that specifies the combined font name and identifies the Asian and the Roman component fonts Note that the combined font catalog must precede the first PgfFont and Font statements in the document Syntax lt Combin
268. ing was used each MIF file that contains Chinese text must include a MIFEncoding statement near the beginning of the file It must appear before any Chinese text in the file The string value in the MIFEncoding statement is the Chinese spelling of the word Chinese FrameMaker reads this fixed string and deter mines what the hexadecimal encoding is for it From that FrameMaker expects the same encoding to be used for all subsequent Asian text in the document To see the characters spelling the word Chinese you must view the MIF file on a system that is enabled for Chinese character display When the MIF is displayed on a Roman system the characters appear garbled Syntax lt MIFEncoding FA gt originally written as Traditional Chinese Big5 lt MIFEncoding gt originally written as Traditional Chinese CNS lt MIFEncoding HX gt originally written as Simplified Chinese MIFEncoding statement for Korean FrameMaker recognizes one encoding scheme for Korean KSC5601 All platform versions of FrameMaker write KSC5601 for Korean Each MIF file that contains Korean text must include a MIFEncoding statement near the beginning of the file It must appear before any Korean text in the file The string value in the MIFEncoding statement is the Korean spelling of the word Korean FrameMaker reads this fixed string and determines what the hexadecimal encoding is for it From that FrameMaker expects the same encod
269. interpreter uses the current default value for the object data 112 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference In a FrameMaker document patterns aren t associated directly with a document but with FrameMaker itself Each FrameMaker document contains indexes to FrameMaker patterns You cannot define document patterns in MIF you can only specify the values 0 15 However you can customize a UNIX or Windows version of FrameMaker to use patterns that differ from the standard set For information see the online manuals Customizing FrameMaker for UNIX and Working on Multiple Platforms for Windows Values for the Angle and ReRotateAngle statements The Angle statement specifies the number of degrees by which an object is rotated before it is printed or displayed In a FrameMaker document you can rotate an object in either a counterclockwise or clockwise direction In a MIF file the rotation angle is always measured in a counterclockwise direction An object without an Angle statement has an angle of 0 degrees If an object has a ReRotateAngle statement it specifies the angle to use when Esc g 0 zero is used to return the object to a previous rotation angle An object with a ReRotateAngle statement must have an angle of 0 degrees The Angle and ReRotateAngle statements are mutually exclusive When the MIF interpreter reads an Angle statement with a nonzero value it sets the value of the ReRotateAngle statement to 0 When it reads a ReRotate Angle stateme
270. ion For example lt math gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt msqrt gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt msup gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt mi gt a lt mi gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt mn gt 2 lt mn gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt msup gt x0d lt mo gt lt mo gt x0d lt msup gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt mi gt b lt mi gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt mn gt 2 lt mn gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt msup gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt msqrt gt x0d lt mrow gt x0d lt math gt x0d gt lt ShapeRect 0 0 0 0 1 30666 0 59999 lt MathMLDpi integer gt Scaling value for the image file created for the equation lt MathMLComposeDpi inte To show the equation corresponding to MathML FrameMaker creates a temporary image and ger gt this ComposeDpi is used to provide the resolution at the time of creation of that image lt MathMLfontSize integer gt The font size of the MathML equation content lt MathMLinLine boolean gt Yes places the equation inline with the enclosing paragraph ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt MathMLApplyPgfStyle boolean gt Yes applies the formats of the enclosing paragraph to the equation Formats include the font font family background color and foreground color lt MathMLFlipLR boolean gt Yes inverts the equation image sideways Document statement In addition to document preferences see Document statement on page 87
271. ion The TLDirection property controls the direction in which the text line is drawn You can also change the style of a text line object in which case the StyleCatalog statement contain a property named TLineDir This property controls the direction of all text lines created using the same style Anchored frame direction The AnchorDirect ion property controls the direction of individual anchored frame You can also change the style of an anchored frame in which case the styleCatalog statement would contain a property named AFrameDir This property controls the direction of all anchored frames created using the same style Element direction ElemDir property control the direction of an element in a structured document MathML style You can change the style of the MathML equation by using the MathMLStyleInline and MathMLApplyPgfStyle properties These properties allow a MathML equation to be inline with the enclosing paragraph s text or apply the formats of the enclosing paragraph Mini TOC You can add a mini TOC to an unstructured document The properties of InlineComponentsInfo statement defines the mini TOC properties ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 253 MIF Reference Conditional table columns Along with table rows you can conditionalize table columns by using the Tablecolumn statement Changes between version 11 0 and 12 0 This section describes changes to MIF syntax between versions 11 0 and 12 0 of FrameMaker MathML FrameMaker
272. is the copyright owner of color data and or software which are licensed to Adobe Systems Incorporated to distribute for use only in combination with Adobe Illustrator PANTONE Color Data and or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of Adobe Illustrator software Software is produced under Dainippon Ink and Chemicals Inc s copyrights of color data base derived from Sample Books This product contains ImageStream Graphics and Presentation Filters Copyright 1991 1996 Inso Corporation and or Outside In Viewer Technology 1992 1996 Inso Corporation All Rights Reserved This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Certain Spelling portions of this product is based on Proximity Linguistic Technology Copyright 1990 Merriam Webster Inc Copyright 1990 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 2003 Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc OCopyright 2003 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Legal Supplement OCopyright 1990 1994 Merriam Webster Inc Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc OCopyright 1994 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1990 1994 Merriam Webster Inc Franklin Elec
273. ith DCS Cyan DCS Magenta DCS Yellow and DCS Black for color separations TIFF FrameImage and FrameVector facets Windows versions of FrameMaker recognize WMF and OLE facets ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 268 MIF Reference If the graphic data does not have a corresponding facet supported by FrameMaker for displaying or printing FrameMaker can use filters to convert the graphic data into one of two internal facets FrameImage for bitmap data and FrameVector for vector data For example FrameMaker does not have a facet for HPGL so HPGL data is converted into a FrameVector facet In Windows versions of FrameMaker users can choose to automatically save a cross platform facet of an imported graphic If a cross platform facet does not already exist FrameMaker generates a FrameImage facet for the imported graphic Basic facet format A facet consists of a facet name a data type and a series of lines containing facet data For example EPSI amp SV amp PS Adobe 2 0 EPSF 2 0 n Facet name The first line of a facet identifies the facet by name The facet name line has the following format facet_name The facet name can be one of the standard display and print facets or an application specific name registered with FrameMaker For information about registering your application specific facets see the FDK Platform Guide for your platform which is included with the Frame Developer s Kit Data type The second line provides the data typ
274. ition 0 points 0000 width 522 points 020A height 189 points OOBD Note This must be the second op code for a FrameVector graphic CMYK color definition 0x03 Specification by data type String metric metric metric metric Description of data Name of color tag string Percentages of cyan magenta yellow and black metric metric metric metric Size of data in bytes Variable Example 03 0000001B 00 OB 53 61 67 65 20 47 72 65 65 6E 00 00500000 00230000 00320000 00000000 for a color named Sage Green with the following specifications cyan 80 0050 magenta 35 0023 yellow 50 0032 black 0 0000 Note See Definition op codes on page 285 for more information on color definitions RGB color definition 0x04 Specification by data type String metric metric metric Description of data Name of color tag string Percentages of red green and blue metric metric metric Size of data in bytes Variable Example 03 0000001B 00 0B 53 61 67 65 20 47 72 65 65 6E 00 00280000 00410000 00330000 for a color named Sage Green with the following specifications red 40 0028 green 65 0041 blue 51 0033 Note See Definition op codes on page 285 for more information on color definitions PANTONE color definition 0x05 Specification by data type String str
275. ition expressions are identified using the BoolCondTag You can create these expressions by linking condition tags with boolean operators and describe them in the Boo1condExpr statement If the value of BoolCondstate of a Boolean condition expression is set to Active the show hide state of the text in that document is governed by that Boolean condition expression All text for which the expression evaluates to True is shown while the rest are hidden Consider a scenario where you have created Conditions summary detail comment and a boolean expression comment OR summary OR detail If the value of Boolcondstate is Active FrameMaker uses this expression to determine the Show Hide state of conditional text The BoolCond statement appears in the BoolCondCatalog as shown below lt BoolCond lt BoolCondTag Conditional Expression gt lt BoolCondExpr comment OR summary OR detail gt lt BoolCondState Active gt gt end of BoolCond When you save a FrameMaker 8 document as MIF the following system tags are displayed in the MIF e FM8_SYSTEM_HIDEELEMENT e FM8 TRACK CHANGES ADDED e FM8 TRACK CHANGES DELETED Note These tags are used by the system and are reserved for internal use only How FrameMaker writes a conditional document If you are converting a MIF file that was generated by FrameMaker you need to understand how FrameMaker writes a file that contains hidden conditional text When FrameMaker writes a MIF f
276. itions on page 159 EDAttrDef gt A Additional statements as needed Endof EDAttrDefinitions statement zal DPgfFormat string gt Paragraph format of the element zal DStyleFormat string gt Style format of the element zal DTextFormatRules gt See EDTextFormatRules statement on page 161 zal DObjectFormatRules gt See EDObjectFormatRules statement on page 161 fr DPrefixRules gt See EDPrefixRules statement on page 162 zal DSuffixRules gt See EDSuffixRules statement on page 162 fr DStartElementRules gt See EDStartElementRules statement on page 163 tj DEndElementRules gt See EDEndElementRules statement on page 163 I EDBannerText string gt The banner text that appears inside a new element instance fr DDescriptiveTag string gt Description of the element tag that appears next to the element in the element catalog fr DComments string gt Comments for the element definition End of ElementDef statement Usage The element name can contain any characters from the FrameMaker character set except the following Oal 4 4 lt gt S Content rules The content rule for a container element consists of the following statements A required lt EDObject EDContainer gt statement specifies the element type MIF Reference A r
277. lated WebDAV statements The BookServerURL and BookServerState MIF statements mark a book as managed content on the WebDAV server The DocServerURL and DocServerState MIF statements mark a document as managed content on the WebDAVserver Import graphics from HTTP file paths You can specify an HTTP file path to import a graphic into a FrameMaker document either by copying or by reference The syntax of the Importobject statement has been modified to provide this feature in FrameMaker The ImportURL and ObjectInfo parameters have been included in the Importobject MIF statement Changes between version 6 0 and 7 0 This section describes changes to MIF syntax between versions 6 0 and 7 0 of FrameMaker Changes to structured PDF FrameMaker now includes attributes for graphic objects that are to be included when a document is saved as struc tured PDE A graphic object can have an arbitrary number of attributes Each attribute is stored in an Objectat tribute statement This statement contains one Tag statement and an arbitrary number of value statements ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference General XML support In versions 7 0 and later documents and books store general XML information such as XML version encoding and whether the XML is based on a DTD This information is stored in the following statements Book statements Document statements BXmIDocType DXmiDocType BXmlEncoding DXmlEncoding BXmiFileEncoding DXmiFileEncoding BXmIPublicl
278. le the Para statement can also appear at the top level It usually consists of a list of embedded ParaLine statements that contain the document text Syntax lt Para lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters lt PgfTag tagstring gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt Pgf gt Sets current paragraph format see page 61 lt PgfNumString string gt Paragraph number contains the actual string lt PgfEndCond boolean gt Used only for hidden conditional text Yes indicates this is the last paragraph in the current block of conditional text in the HIDDEN text flow see page 41 lt PgfCondFullPgf boolean gt Used only for hidden conditional text Yes indicates paragraph contains end of current block of hidden text and current block ends with a paragraph symbol lt ParaLine gt See ParaLine statement next gt End of Para statement 131 Usage ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference By default a paragraph uses the current Pgf settings the same settings as its predecessor Optional PgfTag and Pgf statements reset the current format If there is a PgfTag statement the MIF interpreter searches the document s Paragraph Catalog for a Pgf definition with the same tag If the tag exists then the Paragraph Catalog s Pgf definition is used If no definition is found in the catalog the Pgf d
279. le When the text in the original file is modified the imported text in the FrameMaker document is updated with changes Text imported by reference is called a text inset In a MIF file text insets are defined by the Text Inset statement A Text Inset statement appears in the ParaLine statement representing the location of the text being imported When text is imported by reference the resulting text inset can be formatted either as regular text or as a table The source file from which the text is imported can be a FrameMaker document or any other kind of text file The source file can also be a file that is created maintained and updated by an FDK client a program created with the Frame Developer s Kit Textinset statement The Text Inset statement defines text that has been imported by reference A Text Inset statement appears in a ParaLine statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Syntax lt TextInset lt Unique num gt Unique ID number assigned by FrameMaker lt TiName string gt Specifies a name for the text inset that may be assigned by an FDK client or by this statement in a MIF file FrameMaker does not automatically assign a name for the text inset lt TiSrcFile pathname gt Specifies the source file with a device independent filename for path name syntax see page 7 lt TiAutoUpdate boolean gt Yes specifies that the text inset is updated automatically when the sour
280. le keyword gt Document footnote numbering style keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha ZenLCAlpha ZenUCAlpha KanjiNumeric KanjiKazu BusinessKazu Custom lt DFNoteLabels string gt Characters to use in custom document footnote numbers lt DFNoteAnchorPos keyword gt Placement of document footnote number in text keyword can be one of FNSuperscript FNBaseline FNSubscript lt DFNoteNumberPos keyword gt Placement of number in document footnote keyword can be one of FNSuperscript FNBaseline FNSubscript lt DFNoteAnchorPrefix string gt Prefix before document footnote number in text lt DFNoteAnchorSuffix string gt Suffix after document footnote number in text lt DFNoteNumberPrefix string gt Prefix before number in document footnote lt DFNoteNumberSuffix string gt Suffix after number in document footnote Table footnote properties lt DTblFNoteTag string gt Same meaning for the following statements as the corresponding document footnote properties lt DTblFNoteLabels string gt lt DTb1FNoteNumStyle keyword gt lt DTb1FNoteAnchorPos keyword gt lt DTb1FNoteNumberPos keyword gt lt DTblFNoteAnchorPrefix string gt lt DTblFNoteAnchorSuffix string gt lt DTblFNoteNumberPrefix string gt lt DTblFNoteNumberSuffix string gt Change bar pr
281. le results in a document you must follow this order when you create a MIF file Creating a simple MIF file for FrameMaker Note The rest of this chapter explains how to create some simple MIF files for FrameMaker by hand These instructions do not apply to structured documents which require that you create elements first The most accurate source of information about MIF files is a MIF file generated by FrameMaker MIF files generated by FrameMaker can be very lengthy because FrameMaker repeats information and provides default objects and formats for all documents You may find it difficult to determine the minimum number of statements that are necessary to define your document by looking at a FrameMaker generated MIF file To better understand how FrameMaker reads MIF files study the following example This MIF file uses only four statements to describe a document that contains one line of text lt MIFFile 2015 gt The only required statement lt Para Begin a paragraph lt ParaLine Begin a line within the paragraph lt String Hello World gt The actual text of this document gt end of Paraline End of ParaLine statement gt end of Para End of Para statement The MIFFile statement is required in each MIF file It identifies the FrameMaker version and must appear on the first line of the file All other statements are optional that is FrameMaker provides a set of default objects if you specify none Comments in a MIF file a
282. lean gt Used only by filters lt FBold boolean gt Used only by filters lt FItalic boolean gt Used only by filters Miscellaneous information lt FLocked boolean gt Yes means the font is part of a text inset that obtains its formatting properties from the source document End of Pgf Font or Font statement Usage MIF Reference Use PgfFont within a Pgf statement to override the default font for the paragraph Use Font within a Font Catalog statement to define a font or in a Para statement to override the default character format Substatements in the Font and PgfFont statements are optional Like the Pgf substatements Font substatements reset the current font ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 69 MIF Reference When the MIF interpreter reads a Font statement it continues using the character format properties until it either reads another Font statement or reads the end of the Para statement You can set the character format back to its previous state by providing an empty FTag statement Font statement that does not supply all property substate ments inherits the current font state for those properties not supplied For more information about creating and applying character formats in a MIF file see Creating and applying character formats on page 23 For more information about character formats in general see your user s manual Usage of some aspects of the PgfFont and Font statements is described
283. lement as it appears in the Equations palette To find the name of a built in element choose Insert Math Element from the equations pop up menu on the Equations palette Turn off Show Custom Only in the dialog box and scroll through the element names until you find the one you want To use the redefined element in an equation include the asin expression see page 202 along with the name of the reference frame as follows lt MathFullForm asin T Inverse Sine T char x gt end of MathFullForm For more information about including custom operators in equations see Custom operators on page 211 For more information about format codes see MathFullForm statement syntax on page 195 Math statement A Math statement describes an equation within a document It can appear at the top level or within a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt Math Generic object statements Information common to all objects see Generic object statements on page 111 lt Angle integer gt Angle of rotation in degrees 0 90 180 270 lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of bounding rectangle before rotation in enclosing page or frame lt MathFullForm string gt Description of equation defined in MathFullForm statement syntax on page 195 lt MathLineBreak dimension gt Allows automatic line breaks after this position lt MathOrigin X Y gt Position of equation in current fra
284. lement to the Math Catalog as follows lt Document lt DMathCatalog lt DMathNew Name of new math element lt DMathOpName Real Numbers gt Type of math element lt DMathNewType Atom gt gt end of DMathNew gt end of DMathCatalog gt end of Document Define the custom element on a reference page that has a name beginning with FrameMath lt Page Create a named reference page lt PageType ReferencePage gt lt PageTag FrameMath1 gt Create a named unanchored frame lt Frame lt FrameType NotAnchored gt lt Tag Real Numbers gt Create the math element in the first text line in the frame lt TextLine 191 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Apply a specialized math font to the letter R lt Font lt FTag lt FFamily MathematicalPi gt lt FVar Six gt lt FWeight Regular gt gt end of Font lt String R gt gt end of TextLine gt end of Frame gt end of Page VE To insert the new element in an equation use the char expression see page 197 and the element s name in MathFullForm statement as shown in the following equation lt MathFullForm equal in forall char x comma char T Real Numbers T New times char f id char x indexes 1 0 char x num 3 00000000 3 gt end of MathFullForm The equation looks like this in the FrameMaker document We ER f x x You can change the appearance of a built in math element although
285. lers boolean gt Turns on formatting ruler upon opening lt DBordersOn boolean gt Turns on borders upon opening lt DSymbolsOn boolean gt Turns on text symbols upon opening lt DGraphicsOff boolean gt Yes displays text only lt DPageScrolling keyword gt Specifies how FrameMaker displays consecutive pages keyword can be one of Variable Horizontal Vertical Facing lt DCurrentView integer gt Specifies current color view 1 6 View Only document properties 101 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt DViewOnly boolean gt Yes specifies View Only document locked lt DViewOnlyXRef keyword gt Changes behavior of active cross references in View Only document see page 46 keyword can be one of GotoBehavior OpenBehavior NotActive lt DViewOnlySelect keyword gt Disables enables user selection in View Only document including selection with modifier keys and sets highlighting style of destina tion markers for active cross references see Using active cross refer ences on page 46 keyword can be one of No disable user selection Yes enable user selection and highlighting Useronly enable selection but not highlighting lt DViewOnlyNoOp Oxnnn gt Disables a command in a View Only document command is specified by hex function code see page 47 lt DViewOnlyWinBorders boolean gt No suppresses display of scroll bars and border but
286. les list the op codes with a brief description of each op code and the number of the page where each op code is described The definitions of many of these op codes are similar to corresponding MIF statements Definition op codes Op code Description of op code Location 0x01 Version number page 287 0x02 Bounding rectangle page 287 0x03 CMYK color definition page 288 0x04 RGB color definition page 288 0x05 Pantone color definition page 288 OxFF End of the vector graphics page 288 Note that the colors defined in a FrameVector graphic can be used only within the FrameVector graphic These colors cannot be used for other purposes in the document If the definition of a color in the FrameVector graphic does not match the definition in the color catalog of the document FrameMaker uses the definition in the color catalog when displaying the graphic Style op codes Op code Description of op code Location 0x06 Dashed line style page 289 0x07 Arrow style page 289 0x20 Rotation angle page 290 0x21 Pen pattern page 290 0x22 Fill pattern page 290 0x23 Line width page 290 0x24 Color page 291 0x25 Overprint page 291 0x26 Dashed solid line page 291 0x27 Head cap style page 291 0x28 Tail cap style page 292 0x29 Smoothed page 292 Ox2A Font name page 292 0x2B Font size page 292 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference
287. ll lists of the setup dialog boxes for generated files BookXRef Names and defines the book s internal cross references The Book XRef statement contains cross reference definitions in XRef Def statements cross reference text inXRefSrcText statements and the source filename in XRef SrcFi le state ments BookUpdateReferences Specifies whether or not cross references and text insets are automatically updated when the book file is opened WEBDAV statements Specifies whether or not a book is marked as managed content on the WebDAV server ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 145 MIF Reference MIF book file identification line The MIF book file identification line must be the first line of the file with no leading white space Syntax lt Book version gt comment The version argument indicates the version number of the MIF language used in the file and comment is a comment showing the name and version number of the program that generated the file For example a MIF book file saved in version 9 of FrameMaker begins with the following line lt Book 2015 gt Generated by version 9 0 of FrameMaker MIF is compatible across versions so a MIF interpreter should be able to parse any MIF file although the results can sometimes differ from the user s intentions A MIF book file identification line is the only statement required in a MIF book file Book statements A MIF file for a book contains stateme
288. loys gt gt gt gt end lt Para A PgfTag CellBody gt A ParaLine lt String 63 75 gt gt gt gt end lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para A A lt TextFlow lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt ATbl 1 gt gt PgfTag CellBody gt ParaLine lt String 2 50 gt gt gt gt end end end end HH end Updating several values in a table of Cell Forces lookup of Cell Forces lookup of Cell of Row of TblBody of Tbl of Tbls in in in in in in in in Paragraph Paragraph Paragraph Paragraph Paragraph Paragraph Paragraph Paragraph Reference to table ID 1 gt gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalog You can update several values in a table or elsewhere in a document by importing a MIF file MIF Reference To update a table insert a table in a FrameMaker document and create user variables for the values you want to update see your user s manual then insert the variables in the table where you want them To change the values of the variables create a MIF file with new variable definitions You can create MIF variable definitions from sources such as records in a database values in a spreadsheet or data gathered from measurement equipment For example the following MIF file defines two variables lt MIFFile 2015 gt lt VariableForm
289. lse clause lt Formatting statement gt gt Endof Else statement In a LevelFormatRule statement If and ElseIf and Else statements take the following form lt If Begin If clause lt Level levelstring gt String specifying a level of nesting suchas 1 or 5 Ifthe element is nested to this level the following formatting statements are used to format the element 165 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt Formatting statement gt A statement suchasa FormatTag or FmtChangeListTag state ment that specifies how to change the formatting whenthe Level state ment applies see Formatting statements next for a list of formatting state ments Endof If statement lt Elself Begin Elself clause lt Level levelstring gt lt Formatting statement gt Additional formatting statements as needed Endof ElseIf statement lt Else An optional Else clause lt Formatting statement gt Additional formatting statements as needed Endof Else statement Formatting statements If ElseIf and Else statements can use the following statements to specify an element s formatting lt IsTextRange boolean gt Yes if the element is formatted as a text range instead of as a paragraph Only text format rules can include this statement lt FormatTag tagstring gt The format tag If IsTextRange specifies Yes tagstring specifies a character format tag ot
290. lt TblColumnNum 1 gt lt TblColumnNum 2 gt gt lt TblTitle lt TblTitleContent lt Para lt PgfTag TableTitle gt lt ParaLine lt String StockWatch gt gt gt gt gt lt TblH lt Row lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para PgfTag CellHeading gt A A lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para PgfTag CellHeading gt A A ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 239 MIF Reference Make 2nd column 1 inch wide This establishes a minimum width for the columns Shrink wrap the third column to the width of its cell See CellAffectsColumnWidthA statement below end of TblFormat The table instance has three columns Make the width of the second and third columns equal to the larger of the two However the columns cannot be than 2 inches or narrower than 1 inch end of EqualizeColWidth Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog end of ParaLine end of Para end of TblTitleContent end of TblTitle The heading The heading row Cell in column 0 Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog H H HH H lt ParaLine lt String Mining and Metal gt gt gt gt end of Cell Cell in column 1 Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog ParaLine lt String 10 31 90 Close gt gt gt gt end of Cell Cell in column 2 Forces lookup in Paragraph Catalog ParaLine lt String Weekly gt lt Char HardReturn gt gt ParaLine lt
291. me lt ID 1 gt Give the text frame a unique ID lt Pen 15 gt Set the pen style lt Fill 15 gt Set the fill pattern none lt ShapeRect 2 1 5 7 5 gt Specify the text frame size lt TRNumColumns 1 gt Specify number of text columns lt TRColumnGap 0 0 gt Specify gap between text columns gt end of TextRect gt end of Page The 1D statement assigns a unique ID number to this text frame You must give text frames a unique ID in a MIF file other objects that require unique IDs are anchored graphic frames and table instances To create an empty body page To create the body page use the Page statement Then use the Text Rect statement to create a text frame with dimen sions that are exactly the same as the text frame on the master page Give the text frame a unique ID lt Page lt PageType BodyPage gt lt PageBackground Default gt lt TextRect ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 34 MIF Reference lt ID 2 gt This text frame has a unique ID The body page dimensions match those of the master page H lt ShapeRect 2 1 5 7 55 lt TRNumColumns 1 gt The column layout must also match lt TRColumnGap 0 0 gt gt end TextRect gt end Page If the dimensions specified by the ShapeRect statement and column layout specified by the TRNumColumns and TRColumnGap statements of the master page and body page do not match the body page will not use the page layout from the master page Instead the
292. me or page lt MathAlignment keyword gt Alignment of equation within ShapeRect keyword can be one of Left Center Right Manual lt MathSize keyword gt Equation size defined on page 189 keyword can be one of MathLarge MathMedium MathSmall 193 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 194 MIF Reference gt End of Math statement Usage Values of the ShapeRect statement specify the coordinates and size of the bounding rectangle before it is rotated The equation is rotated by the value specified in an Angle statement The MathFullForm string defines the mathe matical properties of the equation For a complete description see MathFullForm statement next Whenever you save a document as a MIF file using the Save As command FrameMaker writes all the Math substate ments except ObColor to the file It writes an ObColor statement only when the equation is in a color other than black The obcolor statement specifies the color for the entire equation object To specify color for an individual element within an equation use the formatting code qstringq see MathFullForm statement syntax on page 195 If you are writing an output filter for converting FrameMaker equations to a format used by another application you might be able to ignore some of the Math substatements You don t need MIF statements for FrameMaker s math features that are unsupported by another application If you are writing an in
293. meMaker passes the external graphic inset filename to your application and instructs your application to edit the graphic inset When users finish editing a graphic inset they issue your application s command for pasting a graphic inset to FrameMaker and FrameMaker immediately updates the graphic inset file If users edit the graphic inset from another application FrameMaker displays the updated graphic inset the next time the document is opened Note that ifthe graphic inset file is moved or deleted FrameMaker will be unable to display the data and will inform the user that the graphic inset is missing Your graphic External graphic inset application file FrameMaker document External graphic insets are best suited to situations in which users are documenting projects in progress or in which the document s graphics are updated by external sources for example by a database An external graphic inset file contains a MIFFile statement and an ImportObject statement The ImportObject statement lists the graphic inset file s pathname the name of the inset editor that created it and all of its facets An external graphic inset file has the following format lt MIFFile 2015 gt lt ImportObject lt ImportObEditor inset editor name gt lt ImportObFileDI device independent pathname gt facet name amp data type ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 271 MIF Reference amp facet data facet n
294. meMaker product Use the Char statement for a small set of predefined special characters Character name Description Tab Tab HardSpace Nonbreaking space SoftHyphen Soft hyphen HardHyphen Nonbreaking hyphen DiscHyphen Discretionary hyphen NoHyphen Suppress hyphenation Cent Cent Pound Sterling Yen Yen EnDash En dash EmDash Em dash Dagger Dagger DoubleDagger Double dagger Bullet Bullet HardReturn Forced return NumberSpace Numeric space ThinSpace Thin space EnSpace En space EmSpace Em space In MIF 8 documents the following 10 special characters are no longer represented by Character Names You can directly enter the UTF 8 code points of these characters e lt Char DiscHyphen gt e lt Char NoHyphen gt e lt Char HardHyphen gt e lt Char Tab gt e lt Char HardReturn gt e lt Char NumberSpace gt e lt Char HardSpace gt e lt Char ThinSpace gt e lt Char EnSpace gt lt Char EmSpace gt However these special characters continue to be represented by Character Names in dialog boxes 134 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference MarkerTypeCatalog statement The MarkerTypeCatalog statement defines the contents of the catalog of user defined markers for the current document A document can have only one MarkerTypeCatalog statement Syntax lt MarkerTypeCatalog lt MTypeName string gt Marker
295. ment Continue the Rubi element specification gt End of the Rubi element lt String string gt The rubi text lt RubiTextEnd gt Ends the rubi text lt RubiCompositeEnd gt Ends the rubi composite Example unstructured lt Paraline lt String kumihan gt lt RubiCompositeBegin lt String HhF gt lt RubiTextBegin lt String HTMEF gt lt RubiTextEnd gt lt RubiCompositeEnd gt gt end of ParaLine Example structured lt Paraline lt String Some text gt lt RubiCompositeBegin lt Element lt Unique 123456 gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 230 MIF Reference lt ETag RubiGroup gt lt Attributes Typical MIF to define attributes gt end of Attributes lt Collapsed No gt lt SpecialCase No gt lt AttributeDisplay AllAttributes gt gt end of Element gt end of RubiCompositeBegin lt String Oyamoji text gt lt RubiTextBegin lt Element lt Unique 123457 gt lt ETag Rubi gt lt Attributes Typical MIF to define attributes gt end of Attributes lt Collapsed No gt lt SpecialCase No gt lt AttributeDisplay AllAttributes gt gt end of Element lt String Rubi text gt lt RubiTextEnd gt lt RubiCompositeEnd gt lt String Some more text gt end of Paraline Chapter 8 Examples The examples in this appendix show how to describe text and graphics in MIF files The current examples a
296. ment ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 66 MIF Reference FontCatalog statement The Fontcatalog statement defines the contents of the Character Catalog A document can have only one FontCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt FontCatalog lt Font gt Defines a character format see PgfFont and Font statements next lt Font gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Font Catalog statement PgfFont and Font statements The PgfFont and Font statements both define character formats The PgfFont statement must appear in a Pgf statement The Font statement must appear in a Font Catalog Para or TextLine statement New statements have been added to the PgfFont and Font statements to express combined fonts in FrameMaker documents For more information see Combined Fonts on page 214 Syntax lt PgfFont Font lt FTag tagstring gt Character format tag name Font name lt FFamily string gt Name of font family lt FAngle string gt Name of angle such as Oblique lt FWeight string gt Name of weight such as Bold lt FVar string gt Name of variation such as Narrow lt FPostScriptName string gt Name of font when sent to PostScript printer see Font name on page 69 lt FPlatformName string gt Platform specific font name only read by the Windows version see page 70 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 6
297. ment statement For information about combined fonts see Combined Fonts on page 214 Control statements A new control statement CharUnits has been added to express whether characters and line spacing is measured by points or by Q the standard units of measurement for Japanese typography The keywords for this statement are CUpt and cua Document statements The DPageNumStyle and DFNoteNumStyle statements have new keywords to express Japanese footnote numbering formats The new keywords are ZenLCAlpha ZenUCAlpha KanjiNumeric KanjiKazu and BusinessKazu DTrapwiseCompat ibility is a new statement that determines whether generated PostScript will be optimized for the Trap Wise application DSuperscriptStretch DSubscriptStretch and DSmallCapsStretch are new statements that specify the amount to stretch or compress superscript subscript or small caps text Color statements MIF 5 5 now supports a number of color libraries In the color statement the ColorPantonevalue statement is no longer used Instead ColorFamilyName specifies the color library to use and ColorInkName identifies the specific pigment Note that the full name must be provided for ColorInkName The color statement can also express a tint as a percentage of a base color ColorTintPercentage specifies the percentage and ColorTintBaseColor specifies the base color to use ColorOverprint is a new statement that assigns overprinting to the color If a graphic objec
298. mentHierarchy statement lt DFCLMaximums Upper change list limits Format change lists cannot increment properties beyond these values lt PgfFIndent dimension gt Maximum first indent allowed in document lt PgfLIndent dimension gt Maximum left indent allowed in document lt PgfRIndent dimension gt Maximum right indent allowed in document lt PgfSpBefore dimension gt Maximum space before allowed in document MIF Reference 179 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt PgfSpAfter dimension gt Maximum space after allowed in document lt PgfLeading dimension gt Maximum leading allowed in document lt FSize dimension gt Maximum font size allowed in document lt FDW dimension gt Maximum character spread allowed in document lt TSX dimension gt Maximum horizontal position of tab stop lt PgfCellLMargin dimension gt Maximum left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellBMargin dimension gt Maximum bottom cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellTMargin dimension gt Maximum top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCellRMargin dimension gt Maximum right cell margin for first paragraph in a cell End of DFCLMaximums statement gt lt DFCLMinimums Lower change list limits Format change lists cannot decrement properties below these values lt PgfFIndent dimension gt Minimum first indent
299. ments as needed 162 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 163 End of EDSuffixRules statement EDStartElementRules statement MIF Reference The EDStartElementRules statement defines a special set of format rules to be applied to the first paragraph in a parent element The EDStartElementRules statement must appear in an ElementDef statement It is valid only for container elements An EDStartElementRules statement can contain zero or more substatements describing level and context format rules Syntax lt EDStartElementRules Begin start element rules any combination of level and context format rules lt LevelFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 164 lt ContextFormatRule gt A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 164 lt ContextFormatRule gt Additional context format rule statements as needed lt LevelFormatRule gt Additional level format rule statements as needed Endof EDStartElementRules statement EDEndElementRules statement The EDEndElementRules statement defines a special set of format rules to be applied to the last paragraph in a parent element The EDEndElementRules statement must appear in an ElementDef statement It is valid only for container elements An EDEndElementRules statement can contain zero or more substatements describing level and context format rules Syn
300. mple xe6 have a space after them Other application tools The Frame Developer s Kit FDK provides tools that you can use to write filters and to perform custom document processing The FDK includes the Application Program Interface API which you can use to create a C application that can create and save documents modify documents and interact with the user The FDK also includes the Frame Development Environment FDE which allows you to make your FDK clients portable to the platforms that FrameMaker supports MIF files can be used by C applications text processing utilities or UNIX shell scripts You might want to work directly with MIF files if you are filtering large numbers of files in batch mode You also might want to work with MIF files if you are doing simple document processing such as changing a few tag names or if you are setting options for View Only documents You can use the FDK and MIF files together for example a database publishing application can extract values from a database and write out the information as a table in a MIF file An FDK client can then automatically open the MIF file as a FrameMaker document Where to go from here This chapter has given you a start at working with MIF files You can use the information in this chapter as guidelines for working with similar MIF statements Once you have experimented with basic MIF files you can learn about other MIF statements by creating small FrameMaker documen
301. myfile doc from the directory mydir on the c drive specify the pathname c mydir myfile doc Dont start an absolute path with a slash If you specify a relative pathname the MIF interpreter searches for the file to include in the directory or folder that contains the file being interpreted In UNIX versions of FrameMaker the MIF interpreter also searches the FMHOME fminit and the FMHOME fminit filters directories for a file with a relative pathname ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 56 MIF Reference In general you would use an include statement to read a header file containing define statements that a filter needs to translate a file Isolate the data in a header file to simplify the process of changing important mappings You can also use an include statement to read in a template file containing formatting information Your application can then simply generate a document s text For more information see Including template files on page 44 Track edited text Reviewers can edit FrameMaker documents sent for review with the Track Text Edit feature enabled In a MIF file you can enable the Track Text Edit feature using the DTrackChangeson statement FrameMaker retains the Windows Unix login name of the reviewer and a timestamp indicating the time of the edit in each of the edits Before you accept all text edits you can preview the final document with all the text edits or the text edits by a specific reviewer incorporated in the document Altern
302. n statement which specifies whether the condition tag is hidden or shown The condition tags for a document are stored in a ConditionCatalog statement Within the text flow conditional and Unconditional statements show where conditional text begins and ends ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 57 MIF Reference ConditionCatalog statement The conditionCatalog statement defines the contents of the Condition Catalog A MIF file can have only one ConditionCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt ConditionCatalog lt Condition gt Defines a condition tag see Condition statement next lt Condition gt Additional statements as needed gt End of ConditionCatalog statement Condition statement The Condition statement defines the state of a condition tag and its condition indicators which control how condi tional text is displayed in the document window The statement must appear in a ConditionCatalog statement The property statements can appear in any order Syntax lt Condition lt CTag string gt Condition tag string lt CState keyword gt Whether text with this tag is shown or hidden keyword can be one of CHidden CShown lt CStyle keyword gt Format of text with this condition keyword can be one of CAsIs CUnderline CDoubleUnderline CStrike COverline CChangeBar lt CColor tagstring gt Color for condition
303. n character DQ char 34 double quotation mark character C_TIME vDoc CLOSE DOCUMENT vDoc vDoc Create document vDisc 1 Num 3 100 send header SEND PACKET vDoc lt MIFFile 2015 gt Generated by 4th Dimension for Version 7 0 of FrameMaker CR Read in the MIF template for the report SEND PACKET vDoc include coffee mif CR Generate table ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 244 MIF Reference SEND PACKET vDoc lt Tbls lt Tbl lt TblID 2 gt lt TblFormat lt TblTag Format A gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbINumColumns 5 gt lt TbIColumnWidth 6 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIColumnWidth 3 25 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIColumnWidth 5 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIColumnWidth 1 7 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIColumnWidth 1 0 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TblTitle CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt TblTitleContent CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Para lt PgfTag TableTitle gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Offerings as of String Current date 5 gt gt gt gt gt CR Table Heading Row SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIH lt Row lt RowMaxHeight 14 0 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Ref No gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt S
304. n for the text line object to left to right RTL Set the direction for the text line object to right to left INHERITLTR Derive the direction from the parent object Ifit resolves to left to right then INHERITLTR is assigned to TLDirection INHERITRTL Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to right to left then INHERITRTL is assigned to TLDirection lt TLLanguage keyword gt Spell checking and hyphenation language for text line for list of allowed keywords see PgfLanguage on page 64 lt Char integer gt Nonprinting ASCII character code lt Font gt Embedded font change see PgfFont and Font statements on page 66 lt String string gt Printable ASCII text in single quotation marks required End of Text Line statement Usage The TLOrigin statement specifies the baseline Y and the left center or right edge of the text line X depending on TLAlignment The text line is rotated by the value specified in an Angle statement The default angle is 0 A Text Line statement contains one or more String statements Each String statement is preceded by an optional Font statement The Char statements provide codes for characters outside the printable ASCII range You can define macros that make Char statements more readable and there are several predefined constants for character values See Tex Char statement on page 133 tRect statement The T
305. n points of level 2 expression in large equations lt DMathSmallLevel3 dimension gt Size in points of level 3 expression second level subscripts and superscripts in small equations lt DMathMediumLevel3 dimension gt Size in points of level 3 expression in medium equations lt DMathLargeLevel3 dimension gt Size in points of level 3 expression in large equations lt DMathSmallHoriz integer gt Horizontal spread for small equations expressed as a percentage of equation s point size negative values decrease space and positive values increase space lt DMathMediumHoriz integer gt Horizontal spread for medium equations lt DMathLargeHoriz integer gt Horizontal spread for large equations 189 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt DMathSmallVert integer gt Vertical spread for small equations expressed as a percentage of equation s point size negative values decrease space and positive values increase space lt DMathMediumVert integer gt Vertical spread for medium equations lt DMathLargeVert integer gt Vertical spread for large equations lt DMathShowCustom boolean gt Specifies whether to show all math elements or only custom elements in Insert Math Element dialog box lt DMathFunctions tagstring gt Font for functions lt DMathNumbers tagstring gt Font for numbers lt DMathVariables tagstring gt Font for variables lt DMathStrings tagstring gt Font for strings lt DMathGreek tag
306. name amp data type amp facet data EndInset gt Because the graphic inset is stored in FrameMaker document the file does not have an ImportObFileDI statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference The ImportobFile statement identifies the file as a FrameMaker version 2 0 internal graphic inset file for compat ibility with earlier versions of FrameMaker If you do not plan to use the graphic insets generated by your application with earlier versions of FrameMaker you can omit this statement Application specific facets Application specific facets can be in any format your application understands and a graphic inset file can contain as many application specific facets as you want When selecting application specific facets for your graphic inset file you might want to include an industry standard facet for example EDIF for EDA applications so that you can use the graphic inset file to share data with applications other than FrameMaker Application specific facets can be contained entirely within the graphic inset file a local facet or the graphic inset file can contain a reference to an external data file or database a remote facet Local application specific facets A local application specific facet is contained in the graphic inset file The formats for external and internal graphic insets described in the sections External graphic insets on page 270 and Internal graphic insets on page 271 apply to local applicati
307. nc OCopyright 2004 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA OCopyright 1991 Text amp Satz Datentechnik OCopyright 1991 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 2004 Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag Copyright 2004 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 2004 MorphoLogic Inc Copyright 2004 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1990 William Collins Sons amp Co Ltd Copyright 1990 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1993 95 Russicon Company Ltd Copyright 1995 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 2004 IDE a s Copyright 2004 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA The Hyphenation portion of this product is based on Proximity Linguistic Technology Copyright 2003 Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc OCopyright 2003 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA
308. nd color for the paragraph and conditional text In a MIF file the background color for a paragraph tag is added using the FBackgroundColor tag and the background color for a conditional tag is added using the cBackgroundColor tag Track text edits FrameMaker tracks the Windows Unix username of the user who edits a document in track changes mode FrameMaker also tracks the time of the edit Ina MIF document this information is in the DTrackChangesReview erName ReviewerName and ReviewTimeInfo Descriptive tags FrameMaker displays the description of the elements in the element catalog In a mif file the EDDescriptiveTag tag contains the descriptive tag of an element and using a boolean tag DShowElmentDescriptiveTags you can decide whether or not to display the element descriptions Custom catalogs FrameMaker allows you to create custom catalogs of character formats paragraph formats and table formats A mif document contains the boolean tags CustomPgfFlag CustomFontFlag and CustomTblFlag to control whether or not these custom catalogs exist in the document For the custom catalogs a mif document contains one tag each to signify the start of a custom catalog DcustomFontList DCustomPgfList or DCustomTblList The Dcustom Font Tag DCustomPgfTag and DCustomTblTag tags specify the names of the tags in the custom catalogs MIF syntax changes in FrameMaker 8 This section describes the MIF syntax changes in FrameMaker 8 ADOBE F
309. nd reads in files with an include statement These statements can appear anywhere at the top level Control statements Establishes the default units ina Units statement the debugging setting in a Verbose statement and comments in a Comment statement These statements can appear anywhere at the top level BWindowRect Specifies position of book window on the screen View only statements Specify whether the book is View Only and how to display View Only book windows BDisplayText Specifies the type of text to display in the book window for each book component icon PDF statements Specify document info entries and how to handle named destinations when you save the book as PDF BookComponent Provides the setup information for each file in the book Color Catalog The color definitions of each document in the book Condition Catalog Defines the condition tags of each document in the book Combined Font Catalog Defines the combined fonts of each document in the book FontCatalog Defines the character formats of each document in the book The Font Catalog statement contains a series of Font statements that define the tags that appear in the Character Catalog of generated files PgfCatalog Defines the paragraph formats of each document in the book The Pgf Catalog statement contains a series of Pgf statements that define the tags that appear in the Include and Don t Include scro
310. nd so forth For example the data value 05 represents the color defined by the level of red stored in the fifth byte of red the level of green stored in the fifth byte of green and the level of blue stored in the fifth byte of blue If the fifth byte of red contains FF the maximum red intensity and the fifth bytes of green and blue are both 00 then 05 would represent bright red Data describing the graphic The data type can be either byte encoded or standard Each type uses different data formats Byte encoded data If ras type is RT BYTE ENCODED if the sixth value in the header is 0x00000002 the data is a run length encoded pixel matrix The byte value 80 hexadecimal decimal 128 is used as a separator for encoding several bytes of the same color The encoding scheme uses the following format 80 nn pp where nn 1 is the number of times to repeat the data byte pp For example the following values represent seven data bytes of the hex value 55 80 06 55 A single pixel value of 80 must be encoded as 80 00 in the data If the value 80 occurs sequentially use the format 80 nn 80 where nn 1 is the number of times 80 occurs Standard data If ras_type is RT_STANDARD if the sixth value in the header is 0x00000001 the data contains uncompressed hex data corresponding to the graphic Each byte is eight pixels for a monochrome graphic or one pixel for color Each scanline of data must be padded to a word 16 bit boundary ADOBE
311. nennnnenenenenennenene Differences between monochrome and color Sample unencoded Framelmage facet cece cece eee eee eee Sample encoded Framelmage facet see eee eee eee e eee Chapter 14 FrameVector Facet Format Specification of a FrameVector facet Specification of FrameVector data Sample FrameVector facet lt i52 chisso ween ad shire cos Jaren eh sane ced ADELE EER sd Chapter 1 Introduction MIF Maker Interchange Format is a group of ASCII statements that create an easily parsed readable text file of all the text graphics formatting and layout constructs that Adobe FrameMaker understands Because MIF is an alter native representation of a FrameMaker document it allows FrameMaker and other applications to exchange infor mation while preserving graphics document content and format Why use MIF You can use MIF files to allow FrameMaker and other applications to exchange information For example you can write programs to convert graphics and text MIF and then import the MIF file into FrameMaker with the graphics and text intact You can also save a FrameMaker document or book file as a MIF file and then write a program to convert the MIF file to another format These conversion programs are called filters filters allow you to convert FrameMaker document files into foreign files files in another word processing or desktop publishing format and foreign files into FrameMaker document files You can u
312. nent ReadFromFi le use numbering set for the component s document Sub section numbering lt SubSectionNumStart integer gt Starting sub section number lt SubSectionNumStyle keyword gt Style of sub section numbering keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt SubSectionNumText string gt When SubSectionNumStyle issetto Custom this is the string to use lt SubSectionNumComputeMethod keyword gt Sub section numbering keyword can be one of StartNumbering restart numbering ContinueNumbering continue numbering from previous compo nent UseSameNumbering use the same numbering as previous compo nent ReadFromFi le use numbering set for the component s document Page numbering lt Cont PageNum boolean gt Yes continues page numbering from the previous file in the book lt PageNumStart integer gt Starting page number MIF Reference 151 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt PageNumStyle keyword gt Style of page numbering keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu lt PageNumbering keyword gt Page numbering
313. ng book component numbering starts at 1 i extSnippet string gt Text snippet for structure window Endof Element statement lt Element gt Additional statements as needed Endof BookElements statement Usage The ElementBegin and ElementEnd statements define elements that contain other elements The Element statement defines an element with no subelements If the element is inserted in the book structure from the Element Catalog this statement includes only the ETag substatement If the element corresponds to a book component this statement encodes the sequence number of the corresponding component file If the element corre sponds to an unstructured component file the ETag string value is empty For more information about structured documents see Using FrameMaker 184 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 185 MIF Reference MIF Messages Invalid context specification parameter There is a syntax error in an lt EDContextSpec gt statement in an element definition EDContainerType has an invalid value An lt EDContainerType gt statement uses an invalid value EDContainerType ignored for object element definition An element definition contains an lt EDContainerType gt statement but the lt objectType gt statement doesn t specify EDContainer Value of EDObject is invalid An lt EDObject gt statement uses an invalid value General rule not allowed for object eleme
314. ngle is an imported graphic The following MIF statements describe the imported graphic The graphic data that specifies the rectangle is an EPSI facet lt ImportObject lt BRect 0 0 0 25 0 25 gt lt Pen 15 gt lt Fill 15 gt lt ImportObFile 2 0 internal inset gt EPSI amp SV amp PS Adobe 2 0 EPSF 2 0 n amp BoundingBox 0 0 18 18 n amp Pages Oln amp Creator contr2 n amp CreationDate Tue Apr 25 16 09 56 1989 n amp EndComments n amp BeginPreview 18 18 1 18 n amp SFFFFCO n A de ole ole ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 276 MIF Reference amp FFFFCOVn amp FFFFCOVn amp FFFFCO n amp SFFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp SFFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp SFFFFCO n amp SFFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp SFFFFCO n amp FFFFCO n amp SFFFFCO n amp SFFFFCO n amp SFFFFCO n amp SFFFFCO n EndPreview n amp amp EndProlog n amp Page one 1 n amp 0 0 moveto 18 0 rlineto 0 18 rlineto 18 0 rlineto closepath 0 setgray n amp fill n amp Trailer n EndInset gt End ImportObject o o A de A de 277 Chapter 13 FrameImage Facet Format Framelmage is a format for bitmap graphics that is recognized by Adobe FrameMaker on all platforms The speci fication of the FrameImage format is documented in this appendix Imported graphics can contain graphic data in FrameImage format This data is called the FramelImage facet of the graphic FrameMaker can use this facet
315. nimum leading allowed in book lt FSize dimension gt Minimum font size allowed in book lt FDW dimension gt Minimum character spread allowed in book lt TSX dimension gt Minimum horizontal position of tab stop lt PgfCel 1LMargin dimension gt Minimum left cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCel 1BMargin dimension gt Minimum bottom cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCel 1TMargin dimension gt Minimum top cell margin for first paragraph in a cell lt PgfCel 1RMargin dimension gt Minimum right cell margin for first paragraph in a cell End of BFCLMinimums statement End of BookSettings statement BookElem ents statement The BookElements statement contains all of the elements in the book s hierarchy This statement must appear after the BookComponent statements Otherwise the MIF interpreter warns you about out of bounds EComponent values Syntax lt BookEleme nts Begin structure tree A ElementBegin gt Begin element that contains other elements Elementi A End gt End element that contains other elements A ElementBegin gt Additional statements as needed Elementi A End gt Element A Begin element with no subelements A i ag tagstring gt Element tag name from Element Catalog A OG Component integer gt Correspondi
316. nitNumFRows integer gt Number of footing rows for new tables Miscellaneous properties lt TblLocked boolean gt Yes means the table is part of a text inset that obtains its formatting properties from the source document End of Tol Format statement Usage The basic properties ruling properties and shading properties correspond to settings in the Table Designer The tagstring value specified in any ruling substatement such as Tb1ColumnRuling must match a ruling tag defined in the RulingCatalog statement see page 82 The tagstring value specified in any color substatement such as Tb1BodyColor must match a color tag defined in the Colorcatalog statement see page 83 Usage of some of the aspects of the Tb1Format statement is described in the following sections Alignment of tables The horizontal alignment of a table within a text column or text frame is specified by the Tblalignment statement e Ifthe table is aligned with the left center or right side of a text column or text frame the Tblalignment statement is set to Left Center or Right respectively e Ifthe table is aligned with the closer edge or farther edge of a text frame closer or farther relative to the binding of the book the Tb1Alignment statement is set to Inside or Outside respectively Locked tables and text insets The TblLocked statement does not correspond to any setting in the Table Designer The statement is for text
317. ns a name for the inset object but it is valid only of inset contains facets FLV SWF and U3D lt ObjectActivateInPDF boolean gt On creation of PDF if this flag is ON for the object the corresponding annotation in PDF will get active as soon as the page containing this object becomes visible This is only valid for inset having facets FLV SWF and U3D lt ObjectOpenInFloatWindow boolean gt On creation of PDF if this flag is ON for the object the corresponding annotation in PDF will open in new window inside PDF reader soon as the page containing this object becomes visible This is only valid for inset having facets FLV SWF and U3D lt ObjectSupportMMLink boolean gt This tag represents if the inset support creation of multimedia link to it from text The inset having facets FLV SWF and U3D supports this string Specifies the name of the facet used to describe the graphic imported by copying see Facet Formats for Graphics amp amp keyword Identifies the data type used in the facet see Facet Formats for Graphics keyword can be one of v for unsigned bytes i for integer data m for metric data Data describing the imported graphic data must begin with the ampersand character see Facet Formats for Graphics amp x Marks the beginning or end of data represented in hexadecimal see Facet Formats for Graphics EndInset End of the data descr
318. nt see DashSegment values on page 113 lt DashSegment dimension gt Additional statements as needed gt End of DashedPattern statement lt ObjectAttribute Tagged information that gets stored with the object when you save a document as Structured PDF A graphic object can have ny number of ObjectAttribute statements lt Tag string gt The tag name for the object attribute lt Value string gt The text of the object attribute gt End of ObjectAttribute statement Usage The 1D substatement is necessary only if other objects refer to the object For example anchored frames groups and linked text frames require ID substatements The GroupID statement is necessary only if the object belongs to a set of grouped objects Group statement All objects in the set have the GroupID of the parent object See Group statement on page 119 Values for Pen and Fill statements Values for the Pen and Fi11 statements refer to selections in the Tools palette Graphics can use all the Pen and Fill values illustrated below Ruling lines and table shadings use only the first seven pen fill values and 15 none The pen and fill patterns might look different on your system Pen Fill 0 2 3 5 6 8 9 11 12 oc 14 None 15 Pen Fill Patterns in Tools palette Each Pen Fill or Penwidth substatement resets the MIF interpreter s corresponding current value If an Object statement doesn t include one of these statements the MIF
319. nt definition An element definition for an object element contains an lt EDGeneralRule gt statement Exclusions not allowed for object element definition An element definition for an object element contains an lt EDExclusions gt statement Inclusions not allowed for object element definition An element definition for an object element contains an lt EDInclusions gt statement Discarding element definition no EDTag name was specified An element definition has no tag name so it is ignored Bad general rule for element definition Name or expected A general rule is invalid Bad general rule for Cannot use different connectors in a group A general rule is invalid Bad general rule for expected A general rule is invalid Bad general rule for element definition expected A general rule is invalid Ambiguous general rule for element definition A general rule is invalid Bad general rule for element definition Syntax Error A general rule is invalid ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Bad general rule for element definition Connector or or amp expected A general rule is invalid Duplicate definition only first element definition for tag will be used Two or more element definitions use the same tag Format tag is invalid for an element of type EDEquation defaulting to Medium Only small medium and large format tags are valid for an equation element Element nam
320. nt name properties lt FFamily string gt Name of font family lt FAngle string gt Name of angle lt FWeight string gt Name of weight lt FVar string gt Name of variation lt FPostScriptName string gt Name of font when sent to PostScript printer see Font name on page 69 lt FPlatformName string gt Platform specific font name only read by the Windows version see FPlatformName statement on page 70 Default font size color and width lt FSize dimension gt Size in points only lt FSizeChange dimension gt Change to default font size lt FColor tagstring gt Font color see ColorCatalog statement on page 83 lt FSeparation integer gt Font color no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 263 MIF Reference 169 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt FStretch percent gt The amount to stretch or compress the font where 100 means no change lt FStretchChange percent gt The amount to change the width setting for the font where 100 means no change Default font style lt FUnderlining keyword gt Turns on underlining and specifies underlining style keyword can be one of FNoUnderlining FSingle FDouble FNumeric lt FOverline boolean gt Turns on overline style lt FStrike boolean gt Turns on strikethrough style lt FChang
321. nt statement on page 87 the MIF Document statement describes standard formats for rubi text The rubi formatting substatements correspond to settings in the Rubi Properties dialog box Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt Document See page 87 lt DRubiSize percentage gt OR The size of the rubi characters proportional to the size of the oyamoji characters Allowed values are 1 0 through 1000 0 lt DRubiFixedSize point size The fixed size of the rubi characters in points only Either the DRubiSize statement or the DRubiFixedSize state ment can be specified but not both in the same document lt DRubiOverhang boolean gt Yes allows rubi to overhang hiragana oyamoji text lt DRubiAlignAtBounds boolean gt Yes aligns all rubi and oyamoji characters at line boundaries lt DWideRubiSpaceForJapanese keyword gt Determines how to space rubi characters for Japanese oyamoji that is wider than the rubi text keyword can be Wide Narrow Proportional lt DNarrowRubiSpaceForJapanese keyword gt Determines how to space rubi characters for Japanese oyamoji that is narrower than the rubi text keyword can be Wide Narrow Proportional lt DWideRubiSpaceForOther keyword gt Determines how to space rubi characters for non Japanese oyamoji that is wider than the rubi text keyword can be Wide Narrow Proportional lt DNarrowRubiSpaceForOther keyword gt Determine
322. nt to the pure object color and 0 is equivalent to no color at all lt Separation integer gt Applies color no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility see Color statements on page 263 lt Overprint boolean gt Yes turns on overprinting for the graphic object No turns on knockout If this statement is not present then the overprint setting from the object s color is assumed lt RunaroundType keyword gt Specifies whether text can flow around the object and if so whether the text follows the contour of the object or a box shape surrounding the object keyword can be one of Contour Box None lt RunaroundGap dimension gt Space between the object and the text flowing around the object must be a value between 0 0 and 432 0 points lt Angle degrees gt Rotation angle of object in degrees default is 0 Frames cells and equations can only be rotated in 90 degree increments all other objects can be arbitrarily rotated lt ReRotateAngle dimension gt Previous rotation angle of object in degrees ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle keyword gt Specifies whether object is drawn with a dashed or a solid line keyword can be one of Solid Dashed lt NumSegments integer gt Number of dash segments ignored when MIF file is read lt DashSegment dimension gt Defines a dash segme
323. nt with a nonzero value it sets Angle to 0 Thus if an object has both statements the MIF interpreter keeps the state of the most recently read statement Objects do not inherit rotation angles from other objects FrameMaker rotates objects as follows e Polygons polylines and Bezier curves are rotated around the center of the edge mass e Text lines are rotated around the TLOrigin point e Arcs are rotated around the center of the bounding rectangle of the arc not the bounding rectangle of the under lying ellipse The bounding rectangle is the smallest rectangle that encloses an object See your user s manual for more information about rotation e Other objects are rotated around the center of the object DashSegment values If the Dashedstyle statement has a value of Dashed the following DashSegment statements describe the dashed pattern The value of a DashSegment statement specifies the length of a line segment or a gap in a dashed line See the online manual Customizing Adobe FrameMaker for information on changing default dashed patterns in UNIX versions of FrameMaker In Windows versions edit the maker ini file in the directory where FrameMaker is installed See Customizing Adobe FrameMaker for more information You can also define custom dash patterns For examples see Custom dashed lines on page 236 Values for the RunaroundType and RunaroundGap statements The RunaroundType and RunaroundGap statements specify the
324. nter value starts from the initial setting Syntax lt InitialAutoNums lt AutoNumSeries lt FlowTag string gt Specifies flow that the file uses to number the series lt Series string gt Specifies autonumber series lt NumCounter integer gt Initializes autonumber counter lt NumCounter gt Additional statements as needed ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference gt End of AutoNumSeries statement lt AutoNumSeries gt Additional statements as needed gt End of InitialAutoNums statement Dictionary statement The Dictionary statement lists all the words in the document dictionary A MIF file can have only one Dictionary statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt Dictionary lt OKWord string gt Word in dictionary lt OKWord string gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Dictionary statement Dictionary preferences Use the Dictionary preferences to specify Proximity or Hunspell dictionaries for Spelling and Hyphenation for various languages Syntax lt Dictionary lt DiLanguages lt DiLanguage string gt Name of the language such as US English or Dutch lt DiService Name of the spelling and hyphenation service provider in the following tags under DiService lt DiSpellProvider string gt lt DiHyphenProvider string gt You can set these tags to Hunspell or Proximi
325. ntinue numbering from previous document in book UseSameNumber ing use the same numbering as previous docu ment in book Chapter numbering lt ChapterNumStart integer gt Starting chapter number ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 97 MIF Reference lt ChapterNumStyle keyword gt Style of chapter numbering keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt ChapterNumText string gt When ChapterNumStyle is set to Custom this is the string to use lt ChapterNumComputeMethod keyword gt Chapter numbering keyword can be one of StartNumbering restart numbering ContinueNumbering continue numbering from previous document in book UseSameNumber ing use the same numbering as previous docu ment in book Section numbering lt SectionNumStart integer gt Starting section number lt SectionNumStyle keyword gt Style of section numbering keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt SectionNumText string gt When SectionNumStyle is set to Custom this is the string to use ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 98 MIF Reference lt SectionNumComputeMethod keyword gt
326. nts for a tint even though they will be ignored To modify the color values of a tint modify the color value statements for the base color used by the tint Views statement The views statement contains the color views for the document A document can have only one Views statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt Views lt View gt Defines a color view see View statement next lt View gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Views statement View statement For each color view the view statement specifies which colors will be displayed which will be displayed as cutouts and which will not be displayed at all The view statement must appear in a Views statement Syntax lt View lt ViewNumber integer gt View number 1 6 lt ViewCutout tagstring gt Name of color to print as cutout separation lt ViewCutout gt Additional statements as needed lt ViewInvisible tagstring gt Name of color to hide lt ViewInvisible gt Additional statements as needed gt End of View statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 86 MIF Reference Variables All variable definitions for a document are contained in a VariableFormats statement Both user defined and system defined variables are defined by a VariableFormat statement A Variable statement that refers to the variable name shows where the variable appears
327. nts specific to books BWindowRect BookComponent BookxRef and BookUpdateReferences plus the following statements which can also occur in a MIF file for a document Comment Units Verbose PgfCatalog and FontCatalog ColorCatalog and ConditionCatalog BWindowRect statement The BWindowRect statement defines the position of the book window on the screen It can appear anywhere in the file but normally appears just after the Book statement Syntax lt BWindowRect X Y W H gt Book window placement on screen PDF statements The PDFBookInfo statement specifies the information to include in the Document Info dictionary when you save the book as PDF Each data entry consists of one Key statement followed by at least one Value statement you can include as many Value statements as you like FrameMaker ignores any Key that does not have at least one value following it MIF does not represent entries for Creator Creation Date or Modification Date For additional information and an example of the syntax for the Key and value statements see PDF Document Info on page 88 Syntax lt PDFBookInfo Specifies the information that appears in the File Info dictionary when you save the book as PDF Each Document Info entry consists of one Key statement followed by at least one Value statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt Key string gt A string of up to 255 ASCII characters that represents the name of a Document Info f
328. nts that represent book content The order of BookComponent statements determines the order of the documents in the book If the BookComponent Type is either a folder or a group the following BookComponent statements should begin under a BeginFolder and EndFolder statements or BeginGroup and EndGroup statements The sequence should be as follows 147 lt BookComponent lt BookComponentType FolderBookComponent gt lt ComponentTitle Folder Name gt lt Expanded Yes gt lt ExcludeComponent No gt lt ComponentTemplateFilePath folder template fm gt gt end of BookComponent lt BeginFolder gt or lt BeginGroup gt lt BookComponent lt BookComponentType GeneralBookComponent gt gt end of BookComponent for file 1 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference There can be multiple BookComponent statements within a BeginFolder and EndFolder statements lt EndFolder gt or lt EndGroup gt You specify the setup information as substatements nested within the overall book component statement A BookComponent statement doesn t need all these substatements which can occur in any order A BookComponent statement can contain one or more DeriveTag statements Folder components lt BeginFolder gt Ifthe BookComponentType is FolderBookComponent then this tag appears before the following BookComponent tag lt ComponentTitle gt The name for the folder or group lt EndFolder gt EndFolder indicates the end
329. o world gt Index entry gt end of Marker lt String Hello world gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para The mText statement contains the complete index entry When FrameMaker writes a Marker statement the statement includes an McurrPage substatement with the page number on which the marker appears You do not need to provide an McurrPage statement when you generate a MIF file this statement is ignored when the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file Creating cross references In a FrameMaker document you can create cross references that are automatically updated A cross reference can refer to an entire paragraph or to a particular word or phrase in a paragraph The text to which a cross reference points is called the reference source the actual location of the cross reference is the reference point The format of a cross reference determines its appearance and the wording Cross reference formats include building blocks instructions to FrameMaker about what information to extract from the reference source A common building block is lt pagenum gt which FrameMaker replaces with the page number of the reference source Another common building block is lt paratext gt which FrameMaker replaces with the text content of the paragraph excluding autonumbering and special characters such as tabs and forced line breaks Within a FrameMaker document you insert and format cross references by choosing Cross Reference from the Special men
330. object the overprint setting for the object s color is assumed ObTint applies a tint to whatever color is assigned to the object If the object s color already has a tint the two tint values are added together Structured element definition statements EDAtt rHidden is a new statement in the EDAttrDef that specifies whether an attribute is hidden or not FStretch and FStretchChange are new statements added to the FmtChangeList to specify how much to stretch or compress the characters in an element Changes between versions 4 and 5 This section describes changes to MIF syntax between versions 4 and 5 of FrameMaker Changes to existing MIF statements In version 5 the following MIF statements have changed or now have additional property statements e Paragraph statements e Character statements Table statements e Document statements Text frame statements Text flow statements e Graphic frame statements Text inset and data link statements e Structured document statements Version 5 also introduces a new internal graphic format for imported vector graphics ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 260 MIF Reference Paragraph statements In version 5 paragraphs can span all text columns and side heads or span columns only As a result of this change the PgfPlacementStyle statement now supports the additional keyword StraddleNormalonly which indicates that the paragraph spans text columns but not side heads For supporting the capabilit
331. of the folder started with the immedi ately previous BeginFolder statement Group components lt BeginGroup gt Ifthe BookComponentType is GroupBookComponent then this tag appears before the following BookComponent tag lt EndGroup gt EndGroup indicates the end of the group started with the immedi ately previous BeginGroup statement Syntax lt BookComponent Book components lt FileName pathname gt A document or generated file in the book for pathname syntax see page 7 lt DisplayText string gt The text to display in the book window next to the icon for this compo nent FrameMaker displays this text when BDisplayText is set to AsText see lt BDisplayText keyword gt on page 147 lt BookComponentType string gt The type of book component GroupBookComponent group FolderBookComponent folder GeneralBookComponent regular component lt Expanded boolean gt Yes expands the node in case of a hierarchy lt ExcludeComponent boolean gt Yes exludes the component Generated components lt FileNameSuffix string gt Filename suffix added to generated file 148 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt DeriveType keyword gt Type of generated file keyword can be one of AML alphabetic marker list APL alphabetic paragraph list IDX index IOA author index IOM index of markers IOS subject index IR index of references LOF list of figure
332. ombinedFontBaseFamily Osaka gt lt CombinedFontWesternFamily Times gt lt CombinedFontWesternSize 75 0 gt lt CombinedFontWesternShift 0 0 gt lt CombinedFontBaseEncoding JISX0208 ShiftJIS gt lt CombinedFontAllowBaseFamilyBoldedAndObliqued Yes gt gt end of CombinedFontDefn gt end of CombinedFontCatalog PgfFont or Font statement MIF Reference When a combined font is used in a paragraph or text line the PgfFont or Font statement includes the combined font name and the base font s family name These statements also include the PostScriptName and PlatformName for both the base and the Roman fonts 215 FCombinedFontName is a new statement to express the combined font name The FFamily statement expresses the base font s family name The FPostScriptName and FPlat formName statements all refer to the base font The following new statements have ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference been added to express the corresponding values for the Roman font FWesternPostScriptName e FWesternPlatformName Syntax lt PgfFont lt FPostScriptName string gt The PostScript name for the base font lt FPlatformName string gt The platform name for the base font lt FWesternPostScriptName string gt The PostScript name for the Roman font lt FWesternPlatformName string gt The platform name for the Roman font lt FCombinedFontName string gt The name of the combined font as
333. on see MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books Fmt ChangeListCatalog Defines the contents of the Format Change List Catalog for a structured document For more information see MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books DefAttrValuesCatalog Defines the DefAttrValuesCatalog for a structured document For more information see MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books AttrCondExprCatalog Defines the AttrCondExprCatalog for a structured document For more information see MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 53 Statement Description FontCatalog Describes character formats The Font Catalog statement contains Font statements that define the properties and tag for each character format RulingCatalog Describes ruling styles for tables The RulingCatalog statement contains Ruling statements that define the properties for each ruling style TblCatalog Describes table formats The Tb1 Catalog statement contains TblFormat state ments that define the properties and tag for each table format StyleCatalog Describes object styles The StyleCatalog statement contains Style statements that define the properties and tags for each object style KumihanCatalog Contains the Kumihan tables that specify line composition rules for Japanese text Views Describes color views for the document The Vi
334. on specific facets The following illustration shows the relationship between your application FrameMaker document and a graphic inset file with a local application specific facet Display and print facet Your graphic application FrameMaker document Graphic inset with a local application specific facet 272 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 273 MIF Reference Remote application specific facets A remote application specific facet contains the pathname or database key for an existing data file or database Since application specific data is normally duplicated in a separate application file remote facets conserve file space Because the application specific facet contains only a pathname remote facets are easier to implement Display and print facet Your graphic application Graphic inset with a remote application specific facet FrameMaker document Application specific facet Remote application specific facet data Note Display and print facets must be contained in the graphic inset file They cannot be remote facets To write a remote facet your graphic application must write an application data file and store its data type and pathname in the graphic inset file A remote application specific facet has the following format facet_name amp facet
335. ootnote properties lt DFNoteTag string gt Paragraph and reference frame tag for document footnotes lt DFNoteMaxH dimension gt Maximum height allowed for document footnotes lt DFNoteRestart keyword gt Document footnote numbering control by page or text flow keyword can be one of PerPage PerFlow lt FNoteStartNum integer gt First document footnote number lt DFNoteNumStyle keyword gt Document footnote numbering style keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha ZenLCAlpha ZenUCAlpha KanjiNumeric KanjiKazu BusinessKazu Custom lt DFNoteLabels string gt Characters to use in custom document footnote numbers lt DFNoteComputeMethod keyword gt Footnote numbering keyword can be one of Cont inue continue numbering from previous component in book Restart restart numbering lt DFNoteAnchorPos keyword gt Placement of document footnote number in text keyword can be one of GNLnEPOXpPITT GNBaoeAive ON XvPoypiat lt DFNoteNumberPos keyword gt Placement of number in document footnote keyword can be one of FNSuperscript FNBaseline FNSubscript lt DFNoteAnchorPrefix string gt Prefix before document footnote number in text lt DFNoteAnchorSuffix string gt Suffix after document footnote number in text lt DFNoteNumberPrefix string gt Prefix
336. operties ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 92 MIF Reference lt DChBarGap dimension gt Change bar distance from column lt DChBarWidth dimension gt Thickness of change bar lt DChBarPosition keyword gt Position of change bar keyword can be one of LeftOofCol RightOfCol NearestEdge FurthestEdge lt DChBarColor tagstring gt Change bar color see ColorCatalog statement on page 83 lt DAutoChBars boolean gt Turns automatic change bars on or off Document view properties lt DGridOn boolean gt Turns on page grid upon opening A DPageGrid dimension gt Spacing of page grid A DSnapGrid dimension gt Spacing of snap grid A DSnapRotation degrees gt Angle of rotation snap lt DRulersOn boolean gt Turns on rulers upon opening lt DFullRulers boolean gt Turns on formatting ruler upon opening lt DBordersOn boolean gt Turns on borders upon opening A DSymbolsOn boolean gt Turns on text symbols upon opening A DHotspotIndicatorsOn boolean gt Turns on the hotspot indicators A DGraphicsOff boolean gt Yes displays text only A DPageScrolling keyword gt Specifies how FrameMaker displays consecutive pages keyword can be one of Variable Horizontal Vertical Facing lt DCurrentView integer gt Specifies current color view 1 6 View Only document properties lt DViewOnly bool
337. or more paragraph formats which are defined by Pgf statements A PgfCatalog statement looks like this lt PgfCatalog lt Pgf gt A paragraph format description lt Pgf gt More paragraph formats gt end of PgfCatalog The Pgf statement describes a complete paragraph format For example the sample file pgfcat mif stores the paragraph format 1 Heading in the Paragraph Catalog lt MIFFile 2015 gt Hand generated lt PgfCatalog lt Pgf lt PgfTag 1Heading gt lt PgfUseNextTag Yes gt lt PgfNextTag Body gt lt PgfAlignment Left gt lt PgfFIndent 0 0 gt lt PgfLIndent 0 0 gt lt PgfRIndent 0 0 gt lt PgfBoxColor NoColor gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 21 MIF Reference lt PgfAsianComposer No gt lt PgfDir LTR gt gt end of Pgf gt end of PgfCatalog If you open pgfcat mif in FrameMaker you ll see that the Paragraph Catalog contains a single paragraph format called 1Heading If you supply a Paragraph Catalog the paragraph formats in your catalog replace those in the default catalog they do not supplement the default formats If you do not supply a Paragraph Catalog in a MIF file the MIF interpreter provides a default Paragraph Catalog with predefined paragraph formats If a Pgf statement provides only the name of a paragraph format the MIF interpreter supplies default values for the rest of the paragraph properties when it reads in the MIF file Applying a paragraph format To apply a fo
338. otation lt Cell lt CellAngle 270 gt lt CellContent gt gt end of Cell Cells can only be rotated by 90 180 or 270 degrees Cells are rotated clockwise Straddle cells The contents of a straddle cell cross cell borders as if there were a single cell You can straddle cells horizontally or vertically The following table includes a heading row that straddles two columns Brazilian Coffee Coffee Price per Bag Brazil Santos 455 00 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 28 MIF Reference The MIF code for the straddle cell includes a Ce11cColumns statement that specifies the number of columns that the cell crosses The contents of the straddle cell appear in the first of the straddle columns the subsequent ce11 state ments for the row must appear even if they are empty lt Row lt Cell lt CellColumns 2 gt Number of straddle columns lt CellContent Content is in the first cell lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt lt ParaLine lt String Brazilian Coffee gt gt gt end of Para gt end of CellContent gt end of Cell Cell Second cell appears even though lt CellContent it is empty lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt lt ParaLine gt gt end of Para gt end of CellContent gt end of Cell gt end of Row If the cell straddles rows the substatement is Cel 1Rows Creating a table format A table format includes the following properties e The properties specified
339. otnote numbering keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt BTblFNoteLabels string gt When BTb1FNoteNumStyle is set to Custom this is the string to use lt BTb1FNoteComputeMethod keyword gt Table footnote numbering either value causes the component to read the numbering style from its document keyword can be one of Restart use numbering style specified in the component ReadFromFi le use numbering style set for the component s docu ment Book component defaults lt DefaultPrint boolean gt Yes adds file to Print scroll list in Print Files in Book dialog box file is printed saved for compatibility with versions earlier than 6 0 lt DefaultApply boolean gt Yes adds file to Update scroll list in the Import Formats dialog box file is updated saved for compatibility with versions earlier than 6 0 lt DefaultDerive boolean gt Yes adds file to Generate scroll list in the Generate Update Book dialog box lt NumPages integer gt The number of pages in the components document as calculated the last time the book was updated lt ComponentIsDitaMap boolean gt Yes if the component file path is a DITA map MIF Reference 153 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Book autonumbering lt Book
340. p 12 0 gt statement appears all objects after that statement have a 12 0 point gap from text that flows around them If this is the only RunaroundGap statement in the MIF file all objects before that statement have a 6 0 point gap the default gap value from the text that flows around them Ifthe MIF file does not contain any RunaroundType statements or RunaroundGap statements FrameMaker uses the default values lt RunaroundType None gt and lt RunaroundGap 6 0 gt for all objects in the file e For example 3 x and 4 x MIF files do not contain any RunaroundType statements When opening these files FrameMaker uses the default value lt RunaroundType None gt and text does not flow around any of the existing graphic objects in these files AFrames statement The aFrames statement contains the contents of all anchored frames in a document A document can have only one AFrames statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 The contents of each anchored frame are defined in a Frame statement Within the text flow an AFrame statement indicates where each anchored frame appears by referring to the ID provided in the original frame description see ParaLine statement on page 132 Syntax lt AFrames lt Frame gt Defines a graphic frame see Frame statement on page 116 lt Frame gt Additional statements as needed gt End of AFrames statement A
341. paragraph tags to bookmarks in Adobe Acrobat By default this statement is set to No Another new statement DGenerateAcrobat Info sets print options to the required states for generating Acrobat information By default this statement is set to Yes For View Only documents the default value of the DViewonlySelect statement has changed from Yes to Useronly For text insets the following statement has been renamed MIF 4 00 MIF 5 00 lt DUpdateDataLinksOnOpen boolean gt lt DUpdateTextInsetsOnOpen boolean gt Document and text flow statements In version 5 the MIF statements describing interline spacing and padding which appeared under the Document statement in previous versions have been replaced by corresponding statements under the Text Flow statement MIF 4 00 MIF 5 00 lt DMaxInterLine dimension gt lt TFMaxInterLine dimension gt lt DMaxInterPgf dimension gt lt TFMaxInterPgf dimension gt In version 5 if FrameMaker finds the DMaxInterLine and DMaxInterPgf statements in a 4 00 document FrameMaker applies these settings to all flows in the document ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 261 MIF Reference Text frame and text flow statements Version 5 introduces text frames which are composed of any number of text columns separated by a standard gap In MIF files text frames are described by the same statement used in previous versions for text columns the TextRect statement In version 5 three new
342. part of the cross reference Creating variables In a FrameMaker document variables act as placeholders for text that might change For example many documents use a variable for the current date A variable consists of a name which is how you choose a variable and a definition which contains the text and formatting that appear where a variable is inserted FrameMaker provides two kinds of variables system variables that are predefined by FrameMaker and user variables that are defined by the user System variables contain building blocks that allow FrameMaker to extract certain infor mation from the document or the system such as the current date or the current page number and place it in text Headers and footers frequently use system variables You can modify a system variables definition but you cannot create new system variables User variables contain only text and formatting information Within a FrameMaker document you insert and define variables by choosing Variable from the Special menu The variable appears in the document text where it is inserted In a MIF file you define and insert variables as follows Define and name the document variables by using VariableFormats and VariableFormat statements e Insert the variable in text by using the Variable statement Defining user variables All variable definitions for a document are contained in a single VariableFormats statement The Variable Formats statement contains a Var
343. pen this file in FrameMaker you ll see that the anchor symbol for the table appears at the end of the sentence To place the table anchor between two words in the sentence use the following statements lt Para lt ParaLine lt String Coffee prices gt lt ATbl 1 gt lt String for January gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para Note that the ATb1 statement appears outside the String statement A ParaLine statement usually consists of String statements that contain text interspersed with statements for table anchors frame anchors markers and cross references About ID numbers The table ID used by the aTb1 statement must exactly match the ID given by the Tb1ID statement If it does not the MIF interpreter ignores the ATb1 statement and the table instance does not appear in the document You cannot use multiple ATb1 statements that refer to the same table ID An ID can be any positive integer from 1 to 65535 inclusive The only other statements that require an ID are AFrame statements linked TextRect statements and Group statements For more information about these statements see Graphic objects and graphic frames on page 110 Rotated cells A table can have rotated cells and straddle cells The following table includes rotated cells in the heading row Coffee Price Brazil Santos 455 00 In a MIF file a cell that is rotated simply includes a Cellangle statement that specifies the angle of r
344. port by copying and save the FrameMaker document as a MIF file General rules for reading and writing facets To write a facet you need to modify the existing function in your application for writing data The function must write the facet name and data type lines and insert an ampersand at the beginning of each line of facet data If necessary convert data lines to the appropriate facet data format Unsigned bytes should follow the conventions described in Unsigned bytes on page 268 and metric data should follow the conventions described in Metric data on page 269 When writing the facet data your application can use as many lines as necessary Each line should be short enough to read with a text editor in case you need to debug the graphic inset file There are no counts offsets or facet size limits Facet data in hexadecimal must contain valid hexadecimal digits only 0 9 A F and cannot contain backslash characters When you write a facet containing hexadecimal data do not write newline characters Nr or Xn at the end of the lines Graphic insets cannot contain any blank lines within or between facets When reading a graphic inset your application need only scan for facet name lines and then read the appropriate facets Since facets begin and end with the facet_name token your program should read facet data until it encounters an equal sign in column 1 If your application encounters the characters x when readin
345. ports a MIF file End of Marker statement Usage Marker type numbers correspond to the marker names in the Marker window as follows This number Represents this marker name 0 Header Footer 1 1 Header Footer 2 2 Index 3 Comment 4 Subject 5 Author 6 Glossary 135 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference This number Represents this marker name 7 Equation 8 Hypertext 9 X Ref 10 Conditional Text 11 through 25 Type 11 through Type 25 for versions of FrameMaker earlier than 5 5 If more than 25 markers are defined for the document all extra markers are assigned the number 25 In UNIX versions you can change the default marker names For more information see the online manual Custom izing FrameMaker XRef statement The xref statement marks a cross reference in text It must appear in a ParaLine statement Syntax lt XRef lt Unique ID gt ID persistent across sessions assigned when FrameMaker generates a MIF file used by the FDK client and should not be used by filters lt XRefName tagstring gt Name of cross reference format see XRefFormats and XRefFormat statements on page 87 lt XRefLastUpdate seconds microseconds gt Specifies the time when the cross reference was last updated time is measured in the number of seconds and microseconds that have passed since January 1 1970 lt XR
346. ppears after the element Only suffix rules can include this statement Each If ElseIf and Else statement can include only one of the following formatting statements FormatTag FmtChangeList FmtChangeListTag ContextFormatRule LevelFormatRule Format change lists A format change list specifies how a paragraph format changes when a format rule clause applies A change list can specify a change to just a single paragraph property or it can specify changes to a long list of properties A format change list can be named or unnamed A named change list appears in the Format Change List Catalog Format rule clauses that use a named change list specify its name or tag Multiple rule clauses can specify the same named change list An unnamed change list appears in a rule clause It is used only by the rule clause in which it appears FmtChangeListCatalog statement The FmtChangeListCatalog statement defines the contents of the Format Change List Catalog A document can have only one FmtChangeListCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 10 Syntax lt FmtChangeListCatalog Begin Format Change List Catalog lt FmtChangeList gt Defines an element see FmtChangeList statement next lt FmtChangeList gt Additional statements as needed gt End of FmtChangeListCatalog statement FmtChangeList statement The FmtChangeList
347. ption of data Name of font weight type uses the same values as the MIF FWeight statement Size of data in bytes Variable 293 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER Default value default font weight Example 2E 00000008 00 08 52 65 67 75 6C 61 72 00 for the font weight Regular Font angle 0x2F Specification by data type String Description of data Name of font angle type uses the same values as the MIF FAngle statement Size of data in bytes Variable Default value default font angle Example 2F 00000008 00 08 52 65 67 75 6C 61 72 00 for the font angle Regular Font variation 0x30 Specification by data type String Description of data Name of font variation type uses the same values as the MIF FVar statement Size of data in bytes Variable Default value default font variation Example 30 00000008 00 08 52 65 67 75 6C 61 72 00 for the font variation Regular Font horizontal kerning 0x31 Specification by data type Metric Description of data Horizontal kerning in percentage on an em a positive value moves characters to the right a negative value moves characters to the left Size of data in bytes 4 Default value default horizontal kerning Example 31 00000004 00008000 for a font kerning of 50 of an em to the right 0 50 31 00000004 FFFF8000 for a font k
348. put filter for converting equations created with another application to FrameMaker equations you must provide a Shaperect or MathOrigin substatement to specify the equation s location on the page The other Math substatements are not required If you don t provide them the MIF interpreter uses preset values If you don t define the equation in a MathFullForm statement an equation prompt appears in the FrameMaker document MathFullForm statement The mathFullForm statement consists of a string containing a series of expressions that define the mathematical structure of an equation Each expression defines a component of the equation and can be nested within other expressions A sample MathFullForm statement This example shows an equation and the MathFullForm statement that defines it The diagram shows the hierarchy of the MathFullForm statement Symbols that appear in the equation are shown in parentheses following the MathFullForm expression y a x b lt MathFullForm equal char y times char a power id plus char x char b num 2 2 gt end of MathFullForm ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 195 MIF Reference equal char y times char a power id num 2 parentheses plus char x char b MathFullForm statement syntax In addition to the mathematical structure of the equation a MathFullForm statement can contain special instruc tions for character formatting manual alignment points and posi
349. r tau gt 0 lt MathFullForm char theta gt e lt MathFullForm char Theta gt v lt MathFullForm char upsilon gt y lt MathFullForm char Upsilon gt lt MathFullForm char varphi gt oO lt MathFullForm char varpi gt G lt MathFullForm char varsigma gt 9 lt MathFullForm char vartheta gt p lt MathFullForm char wp gt lt MathFullForm char xi gt 199 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 200 MIF Reference Example MathFullForm statement fn lt MathFullForm char Xi gt G lt MathFullForm char zeta gt Using char for custom math elements The char expression can contain a custom math element by using the following syntax lt MathFullForm char T ElementName T New gt where ElementName is the name of the reference frame that contains the custom element Using char and diacritical for diacritical marks The char and the diacritical expressions both describe diacritical marks around an operand The char expression places diacritical marks around a single operand as shown in the following table The char expression is backward compatible Example lt MathFullForm gt statement X lt MathFull Form char x 1 0 0 0 0 x lt MathFull Form char x 2 0 0 0 0 lt MathFull Form char x 3 0 0 0 0 lt MathFull Form char x 0 1 0 0 0 lt MathFullForm char x 0 2 0 0 0 lt MathFullForm
350. r than its content The definition of an attribute can specify that the attribute is required for all elements with the element definition It can also provide a list of the values the attribute can have and a default value EDAttrDef statement The EDAtt rDef statement defines the formatting properties to be applied to a container table table child or footnote element in different contexts It must appear in an ElementDef statement Syntax lt EDAttrDef Begin attribute definition lt EDAttrName string gt Attribute name ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt EDAttrType keyword gt Attribute type keyword can be one of FAttrChoice a value from a list of choices FAttrInt a signed whole number optionally restricted to a range of values FAttriInts oneor more integers optionally restricted to a range of values FAttrReal a real number optionally restricted to a range of values FAttrReals one or more real numbers optionally restricted to a range of values FAttrString an arbitrary text string FAttrStrings one or more arbitrary text strings FAttrUniquelId a string that uniquely identifies the element FAttrUniqueIdRef a reference to a UniquelD attribute FAttrUniqueIdRefs one or more references to a UniquelD attribute EDAttrRequired boolean gt Yes means the attribute is required EDAttrReadOnly boolean gt Yes means the attribute is read only EDAttrHidden boolean gt Yes means the att
351. rIsCyan ColorIsMagenta ColorIsYellow ColorIsDarkGrey ColorIsPaleGreen ColorIsForestGreen ColorIsRoyalBlue ColorIsMauve ColorIsLightSalmon ColorIsOlive ColorIsSalmon ColorIsReserved lt ColorTint percentage gt 100 indicates solid color less than 100 indicates a reduced percentage of the color lt ColorTintBaseColor string The name of the color from which the tint is derived If the base color does not exist in the document black will be used lt ColorOverprint boolean gt Yes indicates overprint is set for the color No indicates knockout End of Color statement Usage In a MIF file all colors are expressed as a mixture of cyan magenta yellow and black The colorattribute statement identifies a default FrameMaker document color the default colors are all reserved specified by the ColorIsReserved keyword and cannot be modified or deleted by the user A reserved default color can have two ColorAttribute statements for example ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 85 MIF Reference lt ColorAttribute ColorIsCyan gt lt ColorAttribute ColorIsReserved gt A color tint must be based on an existing color This has two implications e Ifthe base color doesn t exist in the document black is used as the base color for the tint The color value statements values for CMYK color family and ink name are ignored when included in a tint statement However FrameMaker writes out color value stateme
352. raLine end of Para end of TextFlow End of MIFFile HH H Creating a single sided custom layout If the document that you re importing needs a custom master page you must specify a custom page layout For example a document might need a master page for background graphics To create a custom layout for a single sided document you do the following e Create a right master page e Create a single empty body page e Create an empty tagged text flow that is linked to the master page e Create a tagged text flow that is linked to the body page and contains all the document s text The MIF code shown in this section is also in the sample file snglpage mif To create the master page To create a master page layout use the Page statement to create the page and use the Text Rect statement to create the text frame To specify the number of text columns in the text frame use the TRNumColumns statement By default if the text frame s specification does not include this statement the text frame has only one column This example sets up a right master page with a text frame containing one text column lt MIFFile 2015 gt Hand generated lt Document lt DPageSize 7 5 9 0 gt lt DTwoSides No gt Set the document page size Make this a single sided document end of Document Create a right master page gt lt Page lt PageType RightMasterPage gt lt PageTag Right gt lt TextRect Set up a text fra
353. racter pair Delete the first occurance of the two spaces for example delete the first of two adjacent Roman space characters Nibukake Rubi may extend over the preceding nibukake but it cannot exceed the nibukake add space to the first oyamoji haracter Nibukake Rubi may extend over the following nibukake but it cannot exceed the nibukake add space to the last oyamoji aracter Allow rubi text to extend over oyamoji character when betagumi no space is added P lace oyamoji character with rubi based on the standard rule Double yakumono Double yakumono rule is applied This character pair should not have occurred MIF Reference 223 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 224 MIF Reference Usage Each statement row in the spread table includes 26 numerical values one for each character class and an added value for the characters at the beginning or the end of a line The values are separated by a space An example of a spread table is lt SpreadTable u 5 4 U m G H A O Q Q U 3 nn w S 048 2 23 do G o Oo sS v U 2 u m AO nun VU MO oO E S S H oo 5840 na n py H SG God p E Qn wn YW oe m O a pv MMA EGMA LO O U Huo B GS 02800 HN GF AH amp i H H Qeoeon td v 0 m 000 BvH DBD ASE G Er Du Oo g H H OAH HTD ATO HNHNHKAG G 6 NMULUA HAoANM TIO CO GvPvo0OO 0 02 0 FAHD U HN F AA 4 00000 A A id HbA WM U VU GUU 0 OH GUU HNHH MO FH OGH GO VAN GN un EH E EY 4 00606608 of 03200 OH BHA YO GO 328 0000 220200 MH Z2ova Z
354. ragraphs which in turn contain paragraph lines Line endings of ParaLine statements are not significant because the MIF interpreter wraps the contents of ParaLine statements into paragraphs MIFFile statement The MIFFile statement identifies the file as a MIF file The MIFFile statement is required and must be the first line of the file with no leading white space Syntax lt MIFFile version gt comment Required Identifies a MIF file The version argument indicates the version number of the MIF language used in the file and comment shows the name and version number of the program that generated the file For example a MIF file saved in FrameMaker 2015 release begins with the following line lt MIFFile 2015 gt Generated by FrameMaker 12 0 2 366 MIF is compatible across versions so a MIF interpreter can parse any MIF file The results may sometimes differ from your intentions ifa MIF file describes features that are not included in FrameMaker that reads the MIF file For more information see MIF Compatibility Comment statement The comment statement identifies an optional comment Syntax lt Comment comment text gt Identifies a comment Usage Comments can appear within Comment statements or they can follow a number sign When it encounters a number sign the MIF interpreter ignores all text until the end of the line including angle brackets Because Comment statements c
355. raphic frame coordinates lt Smoothed boolean gt Yes smooths angles to rounded curves gt End of Rectangle statement RoundRect statement RoundRect statement describes a rectangle with curved corners It can appear at the top level or in a Page or Frame statement Syntax lt RoundRect Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 111 lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of object before rotation in page or graphic frame coordinates lt Radius dimension gt Radius of corner 0 square corner gt End of RoundRect statement TextLine statement The TextLine statement describes a text line It can appear at the top level or in a Page or Frame statement A text line is a single line of text that FrameMaker treats differently from other text Text lines grow and shrink as they are edited but they do not automatically wrap the way text in a text column does Text lines cannot contain paragraph formats markers variables cross references or elements Syntax lt TextLine Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 111 lt TLOrigin X Y gt Alignment point origin lt TLAlignment keyword gt Alignment keyword can be one of Center Left Right 127 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt TLDirection keyword gt Controls the direction in which the text line is drawn keyword can be one of LTR Set the directio
356. rc statement The Arc statement describes an arc It can appear anywhere at the top level or in a Frame or Page statement Syntax lt Arc Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 111 114 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt HeadCap keyword gt Type of head cap for lines and arcs keyword can be one of ArrowHead Butt Round Square lt TailCap keyword gt Type of tail cap for lines and arcs keyword can be one of ArrowHead Butt Round Square lt ArrowStyle gt See ArrowStyle statement on page 115 lt ArcRect L T W H gt Underlying ellipse rectangle lt ArcTheta dimension gt Start angle lt ArcDTheta dimension gt Arc angle length gt End of Arc statement Usage The arc is a segment of an ellipse whose bounding rectangle is defined in ArcRect ArcTheta specifies the starting point of the arc in degrees Zero corresponds to twelve oclock 90 to three oclock 180 to six oclock and 270 to nine oclock ArcDTheta corresponds to the length of the arc Positive and negative values correspond to clockwise and counterclockwise extents ArrowStyle statement The ArrowStyle statement defines both the head cap at the starting point and the tail cap at the ending point of lines and arcs The arrow style property statements can appear in any order in an ArrowStyle statement For a complete description of arrow style properties see
357. re preceded by a number sign By convention the substatements in a MIF statement are indented to show their nesting level and to make the file easier to read The MIF interpreter ignores spaces at the beginning of a line ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 12 MIF Reference This example is in the sample file he110 mif To see how FrameMaker provides defaults for a document open this file in FrameMaker Even though the MIF file does not specify any formatting FrameMaker provides a default Paragraph Catalog and Character Catalog In addition it provides a right master page as well as many other default properties Save this document as a MIF file and open the FrameMaker generated MIF file in a text editor or in FrameMaker as a text file For information on how to save and open MIF files see Opening and saving MIF files on page 9 You ll see that the MIF interpreter has taken the original 6 line file and generated over 1 000 lines of MIF statements that describe all the default objects and their properties To see the actual text of the document go to the end of the file This example demonstrates an important point about MIF files Your MIF file can be very sparse the MIF interpreter supplies missing information Most documents are not this simple however and require some formatting The following sections describe how to add additional document components such as paragraph and character formats a table and custom page layouts to this minimal
358. re valid only for unstructured documents You can import the MIF file into an existing Adobe FrameMaker template or you can open the MIF file as a FrameMaker document In either case if you save the resulting document in MIF format you will create a complete description of the document not just the text or graphics If you find any MIF statement difficult to understand the best way to learn more is to create a sample file that uses the statement Use FrameMaker to edit and format a document that uses the MIF feature and then save the document as a MIF file Examine the MIF file with any standard text editor The examples in this appendix are provided online For FrameMaker on this platform Look here UNIX FMHOME fminit language Samples where language is the language in use such as usenglish Windows The samples directory where MIF Reference is installed Text example This example shows a simple text file and the MIF file that describes it If you are writing a filter program to convert text files to MIF your program should create a similar MIF file The following text file was created with a text editor MIF Maker Interchange Format is a group of statements that describe all text and graphics understood by FrameMaker in an easily parsed readable text file MIF provides a way to exchange information between FrameMaker and other applications while preserving graphics document structure and format Yo
359. red documents created with Adobe FrameMaker For more information about creating and editing structured documents see the FrameMaker User Guide Structural element definitions A structured document is divided into logical units called structural elements Elements have tags or names that indicate their role in the document For example a document might contain Section Para List and Item elements Each element has a definition that specifies its valid contents such as text and graphics A structured template specifies a document s elements and the correct order of elements and text in the document There are two basic groups of structure elements e Containers tables and footnotes which can hold text and other elements Object elements such as graphic frames equations markers system variables and cross references An object element holds one of its specified type of object and nothing more Tables belong to both groups of elements Although they can contain other elements table parts such as rows and cells tables are also object elements In a MIF file an element definition is defined by an ElementDef statement Element definitions are stored in the Element Catalog which is defined by the ElementDefCatalog statement Within a text flow elements are indicated by ElementBegin and ElementEnd statements When FrameMaker reads a MIF file that does not support structure they strip MIF statements for structure such as
360. resent documents FrameMaker represents document components as objects Different types of objects represent different components in a FrameMaker document For example a paragraph is considered an object a paragraph format is considered a formatting object The graphic objects that you create by using the Tools palette are yet another type of object Each object has properties that represent its characteristics For example a paragraph has properties that represent its left indent the space above it and its default font A rectangle has properties that represent its width height and position on the page When FrameMaker creates a MIF file it writes an ASCII statement for each object in the document or book The statement includes substatements for the object s properties For example suppose a document with no text frame contains a rectangle that is 2 inches wide and 1 inch high The rectangle is located 3 inches from the left side of the page and 1 5 inches from the top MIF represents this rectangle with the following statement lt Rectangle Type of graphic object Position and size left offset top offset width and height ShapeRect 3 0 1 5 2 0 1 0 5 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 3 MIF Reference FrameMaker also treats each document as an object and stores document preferences as properties of the document For example a document s page size and page numbering style are document properties FrameMaker documents have default
361. resented by a Text Flow statement The actual text of the document is specified by substatements under the Text Flow statement If the text flow has the autoconnect property if the text flow uses the MIF statement lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt the text flow runs through a series of text frames when you fill up one text frame text continues into the next text frame Most documents have only one text flow although you can create many separate flows FrameMaker provides a default right master page for single sided documents and default right and left master pages for double sided documents A MIF file can either use the default page layout or provide a custom layout Using the default layout If you don t need to control the page layout of a document you can use the default page layout by putting all of the document s text into a Text Flow statement When reading the file the MIF interpreter creates default master pages and body pages The MIF file creates a single column text frame for the body pages to contain the document s text The MIF interpreter associates the text flow with this text frame The following example is in the sample file defpage mif lt MIFFile 2015 gt lt Text Flow lt TFTag A gt lt TFAutoConnect Yes gt Hand generated All document text is in this text flow Make this a tagged text flow Automatically connect text frames lt Para lt ParaLine lt String This paragraph appears on a body page within
362. ribute is hidden and will not appear in the Struc ture view or in the Edit Attributes dialog box EDAttrChoices The choices if the attribute typeis FAttrChoice lt EDAttrChoice string gt A choice lt EDAttrChoice string gt Additional statements as needed Endof EDAttrChoices statement lt EDAttrDefValues The default if the attribute is not required If the attribute type is FAttrInts FAttrReals FAttrStrings or FAttrUniqueIdRefs the default can have multiple strings lt EDAttrDefValue string gt A default value lt EDAttrDefValue string gt Additional statements as needed Endof EDAttrDefValues statement EDAttrRange Range of values the attribute is allowed to have lt EDRangeStart string gt The minimum value the attribute must have lt EDRangeEnd string gt The maximum value the attribute must have Endof EDAttrRange statement Endof EDAttrDef statement MIF Reference 160 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 161 MIF Reference Format rules Format rules allow the template builder to specify the format of an element in specific circumstances format rule can be either a context rule or a level rule A context rule contains clauses that specify an element s formatting based on its parent and sibling elements For example one clause of a format rule could specify that a Para element has the FirstBody paragraph format if
363. ring a character format from the character catalog gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para Remember to include a second Font statement to end the scope of the applied character format To locally define a character format use a complete Font statement lt Para lt PgfTag Body gt lt ParaLine lt String You can also format characters by gt lt Font ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 24 MIF Reference lt FTag Emphasis gt Character property statements gt end of Font lt String applying gt lt Font lt FTag gt gt end of Font lt String a locally defined character format gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para Like paragraph formats character formats inherit properties from previously defined character formats Unlike paragraph formats however a character format ends at the close of a Para statement See the sample file charfmt mif for examples of using character formats Creating and formatting tables You can create tables in FrameMaker documents edit them and apply table formats to them Tables can have heading rows body rows and footing rows Each row consists of table cells that contain the actual contents of the table Table 1 Coffee Inventory Title Coffee Bags Status Price per bag 4 Heading row Brazil Santos 50 Prompt 455 00 Celebes Kalossi 29 In Stock 924 00 Body rows Colombian 25 In Stock 474 35 1 853 35 Footing row
364. ring statements lt Para Begin a paragraph lt ParaLine Begin a line within the paragraph lt String Hello World gt The actual text of this document gt End of ParaLine statement gt End of Para statement The Para ParaLine and String statements are the only required statements to import text You could use this example to import a simple document into FrameMaker by placing each paragraph in a Para statement Break the paragraph text into a series of String statements contained in one ParaLine statement It doesn t matter how you break up text lines within a Para statement the MIF interpreter automatically wraps lines when it reads the MIF file Some characters must be represented by backslash sequences in a MIF string For more information see Character set in strings on page 7 Creating a paragraph format Within a FrameMaker document you define a paragraph format by using the Paragraph Designer to specify the paragraph s properties In a MIF file you define a paragraph format by using the Pgf statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 13 MIF Reference The Pgf statement contains a group of substatements that describe all of a paragraph s properties It has the following syntax lt Pgf lt property value gt lt property value gt gt A Pgf statement is quite long so learning how to relate its substatements to the paragraph s properties may take some practice Usually a MIF statement name is similar to the name
365. rm 3 chem 1 0 1 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 gt 12 lt MathFullForm 3 4 chem 1 1 1 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 num 4 pear 1 tensor The tensor expression represents specially formatted tensor notation The first operand describes the position of the tensor indexes subsequent operands define the indexes The leftmost tensor index corresponds to the least significant bit of the first operand in binary format the rightmost index corresponds to the most significant bit 0 is the subscript position 1 is the superscript position The following table shows forms of tensor Example MathFullForm statement 2 lt MathFullForm tensor 2 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt aa 1 lt MathFullForm tensor 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt K2 1 lt MathFullForm X 23 tensor 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 s 23 lt MathFullForm X1 tensor 6 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 s 2 lt MathFullForm X71 3 tensor 2 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 gt 13 lt MathFullForm Xa tensor 5 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 s 210 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 211 Example MathFullForm statement 3 lt MathFullForm X19 tensor 4 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 gt 12 lt MathFullForm X 3 tensor 3 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 gt
366. rmat from the Paragraph Catalog to a paragraph use the PgfTag statement to include the format tag name within the Para statement For example to apply the previously defined format 1Heading to a paragraph use the following statements lt Para lt PgfTag lHeading gt lt ParaLine lt String This line has the format called lHeading gt gt end of ParaLine end of Para To apply a format from the Paragraph Catalog and then locally override some properties use a partial Pgf statement within the Para statement The following MIF example applies the paragraph format IHeading then changes the alignment lt Para lt PgfTag lHeading gt lt Pgf lt PgfAlignment Center gt gt end of Pof lt ParaLine lt String This line is centered gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para To locally define a paragraph format include a complete Pgf statement within the Para statement lt Para lt Pgf lt PgfTag 2Heading gt lt PgfUseNextTag Yes gt lt PgfNextTag Body gt lt PgfAlignment Left gt lt PgfFIndent 0 0 gt lt PgfLIndent 0 0 gt gt end of Pgf lt ParaLine lt String A locally formatted heading gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para For a complete description of Pgf property statements see page 61 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 22 MIF Reference How paragraphs inherit properties Paragraphs can inherit properties from other paragraphs in a MIF file If a Pgf statement does not provide values
367. rom a single conditional document In a condi tional document you use condition tags to differentiate conditional text text that is specific to one version of the document from unconditional text text that is common to all versions of the document In a MIF file you create a conditional document as follows e Create the condition tags to be used in the document and specify their format via ConditionCatalog and Condition statements Apply one or more condition tags to the appropriate sections of the document via Conditional and Uncondi tional statements Show or hide conditional text by using the cstate statement Creating and applying condition tags In MIF all condition tags are defined in a ConditionCatalog statement which contains one or more Condition statements A Condition statement specifies the condition tag name the condition indicators how conditional text appears in the document window a color and a state either hidden or shown For example the following statements create a Condition Catalog with two conditional tags named Summer and Winter lt ConditionCatalog lt Condition lt CTag Summer gt Condition tag name lt CState CHidden gt Condition state now hidden lt CStyle COverline gt Condition indicator lt CColor Blue gt Condition indicator gt end of Condition lt Condition lt CTag Winter gt lt CState CShown gt This condition is shown lt CStyle CUnderline gt lt C
368. roperties are specified in the TableColumn property lt Conditional Specifies that the column is conditional lt InCondition tagstring gt Applies the specified conditional tag to the column gt End of Conditional statement gt End of end of TableColumn statement lt PgfTag tagstring gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt Pgf gt Overrides Paragraph Catalog format as needed see page 61 gt End of Tb1ColumnH statement lt TblColumnBody Default paragraph format for the column s body cells in new tables lt PgfTag tagstring gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt Pgf gt Overrides Paragraph Catalog format as needed see page 61 gt End of Tb1ColumnBody statement lt TblColumnF Default paragraph format for the column s footing cells in new tables lt PgfTag tagstring gt Applies format from Paragraph Catalog lt Pgf gt Overrides Paragraph Catalog format as needed see page 61 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 77 MIF Reference End of Tb1ColumnF statement gt End of Tb1Column statement lt TblColumn gt More Tb1Column statements as needed one per column New table properties lt TblInitNumColumns integer gt Number of columns for new table TblInitNumHRows integer gt A Number of heading rows for new table TblInitNumBodyRows integer gt A Number of body rows for new tables lt TblI
369. ross versions However some MIF statements have changed in version 7 0 of Adobe FrameMaker This appendix lists the MIF statements that are new or have changed in version 7 0 and describes how these statements are treated when an earlier version reads a 7 0 MIF file The appendix also lists changes between versions 7 0 and 6 0 and between earlier version upgrades of FrameMaker MIF statements are listed by feature In general when previous versions of FrameMaker read new MIF statements the new MIF statements are stripped out and ignored For example if version 4 of FrameMaker reads a new 7 0 MIF statement in a 7 0 MIF file FrameMaker ignores the statement Changes between version 12 0 and 2015 release This section describes changes to MIF syntax between versions 12 0 and FrameMaker 2015 release Language support The PgfLanguage property of the Pgf statement now supports Arabic and Hebrew languages Numbering style The following new numbering styles have been added e IndicNumeric e FarsiNumeric e HebrewNumeric e AbjadNumeric e AlifbataNumeric These new numbering styles can be assigned at the paragraph level PgfNumFormat document level or book level At the document level the numbering style is defined in the Document statement The following properties of the Document statement can be configured to use the new numbering styles e VolumeNumStyle ChapterNumStyle DPageNumStyle e SectionNumStyle e SubSection
370. rscript operands are listed after subscript operands The following table contains an example of each indexes form Example MathFullForm statement Xi lt MathFullForm indexes 0 1 char x num 1 1 gt a5 lt MathFullForm indexes 0 2 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt Ki lt MathFullForm indexes 1 0 char x num 1 1 gt x12 lt MathFullForm indexes 2 0 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt 2 lt MathFullForm indexes 1 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt 209 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER Example MathFullForm statement 34 lt MathFullForm X19 indexes 2 2 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 num 4 4 ES MIF Reference chem The chem expression defines pre upper and pre lower indexes subscripts and superscripts Each position can have one expression The following table shows all possible forms of chem Example MathFullForm statement i lt MathFullForm chem 1 0 0 0 char x num 1 1 gt 1 lt MathFullForm chem 0 0 1 0 char x num 1 1 gt XxX 1 lt MathFullForm chem 1 0 1 0 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt 2 2 lt MathFullForm chem 1 1 0 0 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt 2 lt MathFullForm chem 0 0 1 1 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 gt X 1 lt MathFullForm 2 3 chem 1 1 1 0 char x num 1 1 num 2 2 num 3 3 gt 12 lt MathFullFo
371. rving graphics document gt gt lt ParaLine lt String structure and format gt gt gt end of Para Second paragraph of text Macros defined earlier are used here This paragraph inherits the format of the previous one since there s no PgfTag or Pgf statement to override it pr ln You can write programs that convert graphics or documents en ln into a MIF file and then import the MIF file into a FrameMaker en lIn document with the graphics and document formats intact en ep End of MIF File Bar chart example This example shows a bar chart and the MIF file that describes it This example is in the file barchart mif ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference To draw the bar chart you open or import the MIF file in FrameMaker Normally you would create an anchored frame in a document select the frame and then import this file The MIF statements to describe the bar chart can be created by a database publishing application that uses the values in a database to determine the size of the bars Market Shares 100 Ml Brand F Brand I 75 50 25 1986 1987 1988 1989 lt MIFFile 2015 gt Generated by SomeChartPack 1 4 identifies this as a MIF file Chart title in a text line All objects in the chart are grouped so they have the same Group ID lt TextLine lt GroupID 1 gt lt Font lt FFamily Times gt lt FSize 14 gt lt FPlain Yes gt
372. s LOM list of markers LOP list of paragraphs LOT list of tables LR list of references TOC table of contents lt DeriveTag tagstring gt Tags to include in generated file lt DeriveLinks boolean gt Yes automatically creates hypertext links in generated files Book component pagination and numbering properties lt StartPageSide keyword gt The page side on which to start keyword can be one of ReadFromFi le default NextAvailableSide StartLeftSide StartRightSide Volume numbering lt VolumeNumStart integer gt Starting volume number lt VolumeNumStyle keywords Style of volume numbering keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha KanjiNumeric ZenArabic ZenUCAlpha ZenLCAlpha Kanjikazu BusinessKazu Custom lt VolumeNumText string gt When VolumeNumStyle is set to Custom this is the string to use lt VolNumComputeMethod keyword gt Volume numbering keyword can be one of StartNumbering restart numbering ContinueNumbering continue numbering from previous compo nent UseSameNumbering use the same numbering as previous compo nent ReadFromFi le use numbering set for the component s document MIF Reference 149 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER Chapter numbering lt ChapterNumStart integer gt Starting chapter number lt ChapterNumStyle
373. s boolean gt Yes indicates that FrameMaker will create named destinations for all paragraphs and elements in the document this style of marking creates larger PDF files lt DPDFA11Pages boolean gt A statement to indicate whether to use the values in DPDFStart Page and DPDFEndPage to distill a range of pages When set to Yes FrameMaker distills all pages in the document lt DPDFBookmarks boolean gt Yes indicates that FrameMaker will create PDF bookmarks when you save as PDF lt DPDFConvertCMYK boolean gt A setting that determines whether to send CMYK or RGB color values to the Distiller This setting can be made and stored on documents in any platform lt DPDFDestsMarked boolean gt Yes indicates that the paragraphs and elements that are targets of hypertext markers or cross references have been marked according to optimization rules for version 6 0 or later this style of marking makes it unnecessary to use lt DPDFCreateNamedDestina tions Yes gt lt DPDFEndPage string gt A string for the page number for the ending page in the page range _ to use this setting DPDFA11Pages must be set to No lt DPDFJobOptions string gt A string specifying the Distiller job options to use when distilling the document lt DPDFOpenBookmarkLevel number gt A setting to specify at what level of the bookmark hierarchy to close all bookmarks A setting of 0 closes all bookmarks 103
374. s gt lt AsianSpace numerals gt lt Hiragana numerals gt lt Others gt lt BaseCharWithSuper numerals gt lt BaseCharWithRubi numerals gt lt Numeral numerals gt lt UnitSymbol numerals gt lt RomanSpace numerals gt lt RomanChar numerals gt lt ParenBeginWariChu numerals gt lt ParenEndWariChu numerals gt lt Sparel numerals gt lt Spare2 numerals gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 227 MIF Reference lt Spare3 numerals gt lt Spare4 numerals gt lt Spare5 numerals gt gt End of ExtraSpaceTable statement The possible values for numerals are 0 Extra space is allowed 1 Extra space is not allowed 2 Add extra space to the last character of a Roman word 3 Add extra space after a Roman character 4 Add extra space if the adjacent characters are one each of Japanese and Roman characters 5 Delete one of two space characters Note that FrameMaker does not use this action because the Smart Spaces feature performs it automatically 6 This character pair should not have occurred Usage Each statement row in the extra space table includes 25 numerical values one for each character class The values are separated by a space An example of a extra space table is lt ExtraSpaceTable u 5 H m O d G H A O Q Q oO 3 u unu a a Oo 3B 3 do OG o vo AG p U Q nN H U nn E mL oO E S S d o 0 amp amp OA u pov z HM SG Goi
375. s how to space rubi characters for non Japanese oyamoji that is narrower than the rubi text keyword can be Wide Narrow Proportional gt End of the Document statement Example lt Document lt DRubiSize 50 gt lt DRubiOverhang Yes gt lt DRubiAlignAtBounds Yes gt lt DWideSpaceForJapanese Proportional gt 228 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 229 lt DNarrowSpaceForJapanese Proportional gt lt DWideSpaceForOther Narrow gt lt DNarrowSpaceForOther Narrow gt gt end of Document RubiCompositeBegin statement MIF Reference The RubiCompositeBegin statement is always matched with a RubiCompositeEnd statement Between them are the contents of the rubi composite the oyamoji and the rubi text A rubi composite can occur anywhere in a Paraline statement Also anything that can occur within a Paraline except another rubi composite can also occur between the RubiCompositeBegin and RubiCompositeEnd statements In a structured document the rubi composite includes a RubiGroup element and a Rubi element Syntax lt RubiCompositeBegin gt Starts the rubi composite lt Element For structured documents only Defines the RubiGroup element Continue the RubiGroup element specification gt End of the RubiGroup element lt String string gt The oyamoji text lt RubiTextBegin gt Begins the rubi text lt Element For structured documents only Defines the Rubi ele
376. scriptSize percent gt Scaling factor for subscripts expressed as percentage of current font size 102 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt DSmallCapsSize percent gt Scaling factor for small caps expressed as percentage of current font size lt DSuperscriptShift percent gt Baseline offset of superscripts expressed as percentage of current font size lt DSubscriptShift percent gt Baseline offset of subscripts expressed as percentage of current font size lt DSuperscriptStretch percent gt Amount to stretch or compress superscript where 100 means no change lt DSubscriptStretch percent gt Amount to stretch or compress subscript where 100 means no change lt DSmallCapsStretch percent gt Amount to stretch or compress small caps where 100 means no change lt DRubiSize percentage gt The size of the rubi characters proportional to the size of the oyamoji characters see Rubi text on page 227 Reference properties lt DUpdateXRefsOnOpen boolean gt Yes specifies that cross references are automatically updated when the document is opened lt DUpdateTextInsetsOnOpen boolean gt Yes specifies that text insets are automatically updated when the document is opened PDF preferences lt DAcrobatBookmarksincludeTagNames boolean gt Yes specifies that each PDF Bookmark title begins with the name of the paragraph tag lt DPDFAIINamedDestination
377. se MIF files with database publishing applications which allow you to capture changing data from databases and format the data into high quality documents containing both text and graphics information You use the database to enter manipulate sort and select data You use FrameMaker to format the resulting data You use MIF files as the data interchange format between the database and FrameMaker You can also use MIF files to do the following Share documents with earlier versions of FrameMaker e Perform custom document processing Set options for online documents in View Only format These tasks are described in Applications of MIF on page 47 You can use other FrameMaker to perform some of these tasks See Other application tools on page 51 Using this manual This manual Describes the layout of MIF files e Provides a complete description of each MIF statement and its syntax e Provides examples of how to use MIF statements Includes MIF statements for FrameMaker To get the most from this manual you should be familiar with FrameMaker For information about FrameMaker and its features see the documentation for your product In addition if you are using MIF as an interchange format between FrameMaker and another application you should be familiar with the tools needed to create and manip ulate the other application such as a programming language or database query language This chapter provides basic information a
378. se two op codes End of clipping rectangle 0x8B Specification by data type N A Description of data None Size of data in bytes 0 Example 8B 00000000 FrameVector graphic imported within this graphic 0x8C Specification by data type Rectangle byte vector data Description of data Position and size of the bounding rectangle in points rectangle Is the object flipped left right byte 0 no 1 yes FrameVector data vector data Size of data in bytes Variable ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Example 8C 00000046 00670000 004F0000 00130000 003C0000 00 FrameVector data for a FrameVector graphic with the following specifications x position 103 points 0067 y position 79 points 004F width 19 points 0013 height 60 points 003C flipped left right no Note The vector graphic is scaled to the size of the bounding rectangle Sample FrameVector facet The sample FrameVector facet in this section describes the following illustration FRAMEVECTOR GRAPHIC This illustration is composed of the following graphic objects e A rectangle with no border and a gray fill e A polygon defined by three points a black border and no fill e A rectangle with a black border and a white fill e A text line with the text FrameVector Graphic in small caps e A polyline defined by two points and an arrow styl
379. ses numerals gt lt NoLineBeginChar numerals gt lt QuestionBang numerals gt lt CenteredPunct numerals gt lt PeriodComma numerals gt lt NonSeparableChar numerals gt lt PrecedingSymbol numerals gt lt SucceedingSymbol numerals gt lt AsianSpace numerals gt lt Hiragana numerals gt lt Others gt 222 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt BaseCharWithSuper numerals gt lt BaseCharWithRubi numerals gt lt Numeral numerals gt lt UnitSymbol numerals gt lt RomanSpace numerals gt lt RomanChar numerals gt lt ParenBeginWariChu numerals gt lt ParenEndWariChu numerals gt lt Sparel numerals gt lt Spare2 numerals gt lt Spare3 numerals gt lt Spare4 numerals gt lt Spare5 numerals gt gt End of SpreadTable statement The possible values for numerals are SCOMAADNMNPWNK CO 11 12 13 14 15 N n S S S S S C c o spread pread the first character of the pair by 1 2 em pread the second character of the pair by 1 2 em pread the first character of the pair by 1 4 em pread the second character of the pair by 1 4 em pread both characters of the pair by 1 4 em pread the first character by 1 2 em and the second character by 1 4 em Add spread to the first character of an Asian Roman character pair Add spread to the second character of a Roman Asian cha
380. sition of tab stop lt TSType keyword gt Tab stop alignment keyword can be one of Left Center Right Decimal lt TSLeaderStr string gt Tab stop leader string for example lt TSDecimalChar integer gt Align decimal tab around a character by ASCII value in UNIX versions typeman ascii ina UNIX window for a list of characters and their corresponding ASCII values gt End of TabStop statement lt TabStop gt Additional statements as needed Default font properties lt PgfFont gt Default font see page 66 Pagination properties lt PgfPlacement keyword gt Vertical placement of paragraph in text column keyword can be one of Anywhere ColumnTop PageTop LPageTop RPageTop lt PgfPlacementStyle keyword gt Placement of side heads run in heads and paragraphs that straddle text columns keyword can be one of Normal RunIn SideheadTop SideheadFirstBaseline SideheadLastBaseline Straddle StraddleNormalOnly See page 65 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 63 MIF Reference lt PgfRunInDefaultPunct string gt Default punctuation for run in heads lt PgfWithPrev boolean gt Yes keeps paragraph with previous paragraph lt PgfWithNext boolean gt Yes keeps paragraph with next paragraph lt PgfBlockSize integer gt Widow orphan lines Numbering properties lt PgfAutoNum boolean gt Yes turns on autonumbering lt PgfNumFormat string gt
381. ssed boolean gt On means the banner text for the element was created once for this element Off means the banner text was not created for this element lt AttributeDisplay keyword gt Default attribute display setting for element keyword can be one of AllAttributes display all attributes ReqAndSpec display required and specified attributes None don t display attributes lt ElemDir keyword gt Direction of an element keyword can be one of LTR Setthe direction of an element to left to right The element prop agates its direction to all child elements that derive their direction from the parent element object RTL Set the direction of an element to right to left The element prop agates its direction to all child elements that derive their direction from the parent element object INHERITLTR Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to left to right then INHERITLTR is assigned to ElemDir INHERITRTL Derive the direction from the parent object If it resolves to right to left then INHERITRTL is assigned to ElemDir lt Atributes Element s attributes lt Attribute Attribute s name and values lt AttrName string gt Attribute name lt AttrValue string gt Attribute value lt AttrValue string gt Attribute value if attribute allows more than one value gt Endof Attribute statement lt Attribute gt Addition
382. st elements in the element catalog for the book lt BAttributeDisplay keyword gt Default attribute display setting for document keyword can be one of AllAttributes display all attributes ReqAndSpec display required and specified attributes None don t display attributes 182 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt BAttrEditor keyword gt When Edit Attributes dialog box appears for new elements keyword can be one of Never never Always always WhenRequired when it is required lt BUseInitStructure boolean gt Yes means structured FrameMaker inserts initial structure for new elements lt BUseInitStructureRecursively boolean gt True means inserting an element in a structured book will allow its child element or elements with their hierarchy to be inserted as defined in the EDD lt BSGMLAppName string gt The name of the SGML application associated with the document For information on registering SGML applications see the online manual FrameMaker Structure Application Developer s Guide lt BSeparateInclusions boolean gt Yes means structured FrameMaker lists inclusions separately in the element catalog lt BFCLMaximums Upper change list limits Format change lists cannot increment proper ties beyond these values A PgfFIndent dimension gt Maximum first indent allowed in book A PgfLIndent dimension gt Maximum left indent allowed in book A PgfRIndent dim
383. stances in a document are contained in a Tbls statement The Tbls statement contains a list of Tb1 state ments one for each table instance A document can have only one Tbls statement which must occur before any of the table anchors in the text flow The Tb1 statement contains the actual contents of the table cells in a list of MIF substatements Like other MIF state ments this list can be quite long The following is a template for a Tb1 statement lt Tbl lt TbLID gt A unique ID for the table lt TblFormat gt The table format lt TblNumColumns gt Number of columns in this table required lt TblColumnWidth gt Column width one for each column lt TblH The heading omit if no heading lt Row One Row statement for each row lt Cell gt One statement for each cell in the row gt end of Row lt TblBody The body of the table lt Row gt One for each row in body gt end of TblBody lt TblF The footer omit if no footer lt Row gt One for each row in footer gt end of TblF gt end of Tbl The Tb11D statement assigns a unique ID to the table instance The To1 Format statement provides the table format You can use the Tb1Format statement to apply a table format from the Table Catalog apply a format from the catalog and override some of its properties or completely specify the table format locally Because the tables in a document often share similar characteristics you usually store t
384. statement creates a format change list definition The FmtChangeList statement for a named change list must appear in the FmtChangeListCatalog statement The FmtChangeList statement for a unnamed change list must appear in the format rule clause that uses it ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference A change list can specify absolute values or relative values For example it can specify that the paragraph left indent is one inch or it can specify that it is one inch greater than the inherited left indent Alternatively a change list can simply specify a paragraph catalog format to apply to a paragraph If it does this it cant specify changes to any other paragraph properties If a FmtChangeList statement defines a named change list it must include an FclTag statement specifying its name In addition it must contain one statement for each paragraph format property it changes For example if a named change list changes only the first indent by a relative value it contains only FclTag and pgfFIndent Change statements If it changes the space below and the leading with absolute values it contains FclTag PgfSpBefore and PgfLeading statements If a FmtChangeList statement changes a paragraph property to an absolute value the statement it uses is the same as the corresponding paragraph format statement for example PgfLIndent If the change list changes a property with a relative value the statement it uses has the name of the corresponding paragraph forma
385. stom character classes MIF Statement Column Position Description lt CharClass 219 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Statement Column Description Position lt BegParentheses chars gt 1 The characters to use as opening parentheses lt EndParentheses chars gt 2 The characters to use as ending parentheses lt NoLineBeginChar chars gt 3 Characters that cannot start a new line of text lt QuestionBang chars gt 4 Characters for questions and exclamations lt CenteredPunct chars gt 5 Punctuation characters that must be centered between characters lt PeriodComma chars gt 6 Punctuation that is not centered lt NonSeparableChar chars gt 7 Characters that cannot have line breaks between them lt PrecedingSymbol chars gt 8 Characters such as currency symbols or lt SucceedingSymbol chars gt 9 Characters such as or degree lt AsianSpace chars gt 10 Characters for spaces in Asian text lt Hiragana chars gt 11 The set of hiragana characters lt Others gt 12 All characters not assigned to any class automatically belong to lt Others gt lt BaseCharWithSuper chars gt 13 FrameMaker uses this class to allow spreading between the end of a footnote and the next character Do not assign any characters to this class lt BaseCharWithRubi chars gt 14 The rubi block including oyamoji and rubi text This class has to do with Rub
386. string gt Font for Greek characters lt DMathCatalog gt Describes custom math elements see DMathCatalog statement next End of Document statement DMathCatalog statement MIF Reference The DMathCatalog statement describes the custom math elements in a document It must appear in a Document statement Syntax lt DMathCatalog Lists custom math elements lt DMathGreekOverrides tagstring gt Identifies a redefined Greek symbol and forces lookup on reference page tagst ring argument must match the name of reference frame lt DMathGreekOverrides tagstring gt Additional statements as needed lt DMathOpOverrides Identifies built in operator with redefined display properties lt DMathOpName tagstring gt Name of built in operator from reference frame lt DMathOpTLineOverride boolean gt No uses default glyph for operator Yes looks up operator on text line in reference frame lt DMathOpPositionA integer gt Position of first operand expressed as a percentage of equation font size lt DMathOpPositionB integer gt Position of second operand lt DMathOpPositionC integer gt Position of third operand gt End of DMathOpOverrides statement lt DMathNew Defines new math element lt DMathOpName tagstring gt Name of math element from reference frame 190 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MI
387. t End of Document statement Text in structured documents TextLine statement Text lines cannot contain elements ParaLine statement The ParaLine statement defines a line within a paragraph It must appear in a Para statement Syntax lt ParaLine lt ElementBegin gt Begin structural element see page 174 lt ElementEnd tagstring gt End structural element gt Endof ParaLine statement Usage A typical ParaLine statement consists of one or more String Char ATbl AFrame FNote Variable XRef and Marker statements that define the contents of the line of text These statements are interspersed with statements that indicate the scope of document components such as structural elements and conditional text Structured book statements A structured book file contains documents that were created in FrameMaker These documents normally contain structural elements A structured book file has the same book statements that appear in a normal book file plus two additional types of information about structural elements An Element Catalog defined in ElementDefCatalog e A structure tree defined in BookElements ElementDefCatalog statement The ElementDef Catalog statement contains the definitions of all elements in the book file A book file can have only one ElementDefCatalog statement It normally appears near the beginning of the file 181 Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt ElementDefC
388. t use the default formats that FrameMaker provides for new documents The user can always change formats as needed within the FrameMaker document e Ifyouare filtering a document from another application into FrameMaker and then back to the application you may want to import the filter s MIF file into a FrameMaker document save the document as a MIF file and then convert the file back to the original format from the MIF file generated by FrameMaker This technique takes advantage of FrameMaker s syntactically complete MIF statements but allows your filter to write a shorter MIF file e Ifyour filter needs to generate fully formatted MIF files you can minimize the number of formatting statements by creating a template in FrameMaker saving the template as a MIF file and then including the MIF template file in your filter s generated document You must edit the saved MIF template see Including template files on page 44 An advantage of this technique is that you can use the same template for more than one document Define macros to ease the process of generating statements For an example of using macros see Text example on page 231 Database publishing You can use MIF files to import information from an external application such as a database into a FrameMaker document This type of information transfer is often called database publishing For example you can write a C program or a database script to retrieve information
389. t BaseCharWithSuper numerals gt lt BaseCharWithRubi numerals gt lt Numeral numerals gt lt UnitSymbol numerals gt lt RomanSpace numerals gt lt RomanChar numerals gt lt ParenBeginWariChu numerals gt lt ParenEndWariChu numerals gt lt Sparel numerals gt lt Spare2 numerals gt lt Spare3 numerals gt lt Spare4 numerals gt lt Spare5 numerals gt gt End of LineBreakTable statement The possible values for numerals are 0 Line break is allowed 1 Line break is not allowed 2 Break the line according to Roman text rules 3 This character pair should not have occurred Usage MIF Reference Each statement row in the line break table includes 25 numerical values one for each character class The values are separated by a space An example of a line break table is lt LineBreakTable lt BegParentheses lt EndParentheses BegParentheses 1 0 EndParentheses 1 I gt end of LineBreakTable 4 G ps U MOL Ss AE a Oe nMmMA E v 00 M 0 002 On HO Gp 00 do MW Por H U A H Oo 3 00 Zau A toh Sa LL ees See E 4 H ri oO fH O Q G 0 2 Olas E n Ore G qo Nn v Qn wn YW i oC MA LO 4 Ed Go 4 CH O AG oO adv 0 NG n v 0 0 Gn HUL Y U LFB YW YW 0 UHM GQ O H 92 DAH Po 2 aau n monm LL DEE 0 00 00 00 BaseCharWithRubi ak 0 Numeral BH 0 Unit
390. t MathFullForm dangle char x gt dx lt MathFullForm diff char x gt Vex lt MathFullForm diver char x gt lt MathFullForm downbrace char x gt X expx lt MathFullForm exp char x gt Jx lt MathFullForm exists char x gt x lt MathFullForm fact char x gt x lt MathFullForm floor char x gt Vx lt MathFullForm forall char x gt x lt MathFullForm id char x gt x lt MathFullForm id ili char x gt x lt MathFullForm id i2i char x gt imagx lt MathFullForm imag char x gt x lt MathFullForm ket char x gt V2x lt MathFullForm lap char x gt Inx lt MathFullForm ln char x gt x lt MathFullForm lparen char x gt x lt MathFullForm lparen ili char x gt x lt MathFullForm lparen i2i char x gt x lt MathFullForm minus char x gt Fx lt MathFullForm mp char x gt x lt MathFullForm neg char x gt lt MathFullForm norm char x gt ll 203 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Example MathFullForm statement Fa lt MathFullForm overline char x gt Ox lt MathFullForm partial char x gt x lt MathFullForm pm char x gt realx lt MathFullForm real char x gt x lt MathFullForm rparen char x gt x lt MathFullForm rparen ili char x gt x
391. t XRefSrcFile gt File containing source gt end of XRef lt XRefEnd gt String gt gt end of ParaLine gt end of Para ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 38 MIF Reference The format name must exactly match the name ofa format defined in xRefFormats The source text must be unique and must match the string in the MText statement in the corresponding reference point marker The xRefSrcFile statement is only required if the reference source is in a different file from the reference point It must be a valid MIF filename see Device independent pathnames on page 7 You must also supply an XRefEnd statement after the XRef statement How FrameMaker writes cross references When FrameMaker writes a cross reference it provides the actual text that will appear at the reference point This information is not required in a MIF input file The previous example would be written as follows lt XRef lt XRefName Page gt lt XRefSrcText 34126 Heading My Heading gt lt XRefSrcFile gt gt lt String page gt end of XRef The text that appears in the document lt Char HardSpace gt in this case a page number followed a lt String 1 gt hard space and the number 1 lt XRefEnd gt End of cross reference text If you do include the text of the cross reference make sure that the xRef End statement follows the text FrameMaker considers everything between the xRef statement and the xRefEnd statement to be
392. t has no overprint statement in it the overprint setting for that object s color is assumed Paragraph and Character statements In version 5 5 the PgfFont and Font statements can now include the FLanguage statement to define a language for a range of text within a paragraph The PgfFont and Font statements include statements to describe combined fonts For information on combined fonts see Combined Fonts on page 214 The PgfFont and Font statements include a new FEncoding statement to specify the encoding used for the font The keywords for this statement are JISX0208 ShiftJIS BIG5 GB2312 80 EUC or KSC5601 1992 FStretch is a new statement to define the amount to stretch or compress a range of characters ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 259 MIF Reference Text inset statements The TiText and TiTextTable statements respectively include two new statements TiTxtEncoding and TiTxtTblEncoding to specify the text encoding for the source file Both of these new statements can have one of the following keywords TilsoLatin TiASCII TiANSI TiMacASCII TiJIS TiShiftJIS TiEUC TiBig5 TIEUCCNS TiGB TiHZ Or TiKorean Marker statements In FrameMaker users can define named custom markers MTypeName is a new statement to specify the marker name The Type statement is still written out for backward compatibility but FrameMaker reads MTypeName when present Graphic object statements If the overprint statement is not present in a graphic
393. t line begins with op code 87 and can contain combi nations of fonts and text A text line must end with op code 89 Text in text line 0x88 Specification by data type String Description of data Actual text written in text line Size of data in bytes Variable Example 88 00000005 0005 74 65 78 74 00 for the text line text MIF Reference 298 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference End of text line 0x89 Specification by data type N A Description of data None Size of data in bytes 0 Example 89 00000000 Beginning of clipping rectangle 0x8A Specification by data type Rectangle Description of data Position and size of clipping rectangle in points Size of data in bytes 16 Example 8A 00000010 00670000 004F0000 00130000 003C0000 for a clipping rectangle with the following specifications x position 103 points 0067 y position 79 points 004F width 19 points 0013 height 60 points 003C Note Clipping rectangles are unique to the FrameVector format All objects within a clipping rectangle are drawn to the boundaries of the rectangle If an object extends beyond this region the portion that passes the rectangle boundary is not drawn The specification of the start of a clipping rectangle begins with op code 8A and ends with op code 8B All objects within the clipping rectangle must be specified between the
394. t page is left or right page keyword can be one of FirstLeft FirstRight lt DPageRounding keyword gt Method for removing blank pages or modifying total page count before saving or printing keyword can be one of DeleteEmptyPages MakePageCountEven MakePageCountOdd Dont ChangePageCount lt DFrozenPages boolean gt Yes if Freeze Pagination is on Document format properties lt DSmartQuotesOn boolean gt Use curved left and right quotation marks lt DSmartSpacesOn boolean gt Prevents entry of multiple spaces lt DLinebreakChars string gt OK to break lines at these characters lt DPunctuationChars string gt Punctuation characters that FrameMaker does not strip from run in heads these characters override the default punctuation set in PgfRunInDefault Punct see page 63 Conditional text defaults DShowAllConditions boolean gt Shows or hides all conditional text A lt DDisplayOverrides boolean gt Turns format indicators of conditional text on or off Footnote properties lt DFNoteTag string gt Paragraph and reference frame tag for document footnotes lt DFNoteMaxH dimension gt Maximum height allowed for document footnotes lt DFNoteRestart keyword gt Document footnote numbering control by page or text flow keyword can be one of PerPage PerFlow lt FNoteStartNum integer gt First document footnote number ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 91 MIF Reference lt DFNoteNumSty
395. t specifies the action to take for each class In the preceding example a line break does not occur between a character in the BegParentheses class anda character in the EndParentheses class because the value 1 is in the second position which is the column position for the EndParentheses class of characters For more information on the LineBreakTable statement see LineBreakTable statement on page 224 Writing Kumihan tables as MIF FrameMaker only writes out Kumihan tables in MIF when you are running FrameMaker on Asian system software If you are running on an Asian system when you save a document as MIF the Kumihan tables are written out as part of the document This is most critical with the character classes To specify a character class in MIF you must be able to type the character and save it in a text file The standard Western system doesn t include these character sets in its character code page so these characters would appear garbled You need the Asian system to represent the characters in a text file To see an example of a Kumihan table it is best to save a document as MIF open the MIF on an Asian system in a text editor and search for the KumihanCatalog statement Specifying Kumihan tables in MIF The following statements specify the Kumihan catalog and all of its component tables KumihanCatalog statement The KumihanCatalog statement begins the Kumihan table specification for the document Note that the Kumihan c
396. t statement identifies the cross reference source If the source text is in a separate file the xRefs rcFile statement provides a device independent filename You can omit it or give it an empty string argument if the cross reference source is in the same file The xRefEnd statement marks the end of the cross reference Any String or Char statements between the XRef and xRefEnd statements represent the actual text of the cross reference These intermediary statements are optional For an example of a cross reference in MIF see Creating cross references on page 36 The xrefLocked statement is used for text insets that retain formatting information from the source document If the lt xRefLocked Yes gt statement appears in a specific cross reference that cross reference is part of a text inset that retains formatting information from the source document The cross reference is not affected by global formatting performed on the document If the lt xRefLocked No gt statement appears in a specific cross reference that cross reference is not part of a text inset or is part of a text inset that reads formatting information from the current document The cross reference is affected by global formatting performed on the document For more information about text insets see Text insets text imported by reference next Text insets text imported by reference In a FrameMaker document text can be imported by reference from another fi
397. t statement with the word Change appended to it for example PgfLIndent Change Syntax Basic properties lt FmtChangeList Begin format change list lt FclTag tagstring gt Format change list name if the format change list is named A paragraph catalog format to apply Ifthe FmtChange List statement includes this statement it can t include any of the following statements lt FclPgfCatalogRef tagstring gt First line left margin measured from left side of current text column lt PgfFIndent dimension gt lt PgfFIndentChange dimension gt Change to the first line left margin Yes means the first indent is relative to the left indent instead of the left side of the current text column lt PgfFIndentRelative boolean gt A PgfLIndent dimension gt Left margin measured from left side of current text column A PgfLIndentChange dimension gt Change to the left margin A PgfRIndent dimension gt Right margin measured from right side of current text column A PgfRIndentChange dimension gt Change to the right margin A PgfAlignment keyword gt Alignment within the text column keyword can be one of LeftRight Left Center Right A PgfSpBefore dimension gt Space above paragraph A PgfSpBeforeChange dimension gt Change to space above paragraph A PgfSpAfter dimension gt Space below paragraph A PgfSpAfterChan
398. t stored within the Importobject statement Instead a directory path to the file containing the graphic data is recorded in the ImportObject statement Syntax lt ImportObject Generic object statements Information common to all objects see page 111 lt ImportObFile pathname gt Object s UNIX style pathname no longer used but written out by FrameMaker for backward compatibility ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference lt ImportObFileDI pathname gt Object s device independent pathname see page 7 lt ImportHint string gt Record identifying the filter used for graphics imported by reference see Record of the filter used to import graphic by reference on page 123 lt PosterFileDI pathname gt Poster file s pathname A poster file is the default image that appears when the movie is not playing By default either standard icons or the first frame of the movie is used as its poster image lt ShapeRect L T W H gt Position and size of object before rotation in the page or graphic frame coordi nates lt BitMapDpi integer gt Scaling value for bitmap file ignored for FrameVector graphics lt ImportObFixedSize boolean gt Yes inhibits scaling of bitmap file see Size position and angle of imported graphics on page 121 ignored for FrameVector graphics lt FlipLR boolean gt Yes flips object about the vertical axis lt ImportObNameDI pathname gt This contai
399. t valid for example an FFamily statement ina Document statement Unexpected right angle bracket A right angle bracket gt was found where a data value was expected or was found outside a statement Unknown font angle The requested font angle is not available Unknown font family The requested font family is not available Unknown font variation The requested font variation is not available Unknown font weight The requested font weight is not available Unknown PANTONE name string The name specified in the ColorPantoneValue statement is not the name of a valid PANTONE color Value of N out of range M A statement s data value was too large or too small WARNING Circular text flow was found and cut The MIF file defined a set of linked text frames resulting in a circular text flow The last text frame in the flow is linked to the first or to one in the middle The MIF interpreter attempted to solve the problem by disconnecting a text frame WARNING Circular text flow Don t use the document The MIF file defined a set of linked text frames resulting in a circular text flow The last text frame in the flow is linked to the first or to one in the middle The MIF interpreter was unable to solve the problem A FrameMaker document file will open but do not use it MIF Reference 250 251 Chapter 10 MIF Compatibility MIF files are compatible ac
400. t variation for example Narrow Wstringw Font weight for example Bold xmetricx Horizontal kern value ymetricy Vertical kern value MIF Reference When expressions have multiple display formats there is one default format Additional formats are numbered For example the id expression has three display formats Example MathFullForm statement lt MathFullForm id char x gt lt MathFullForm id ili char x gt lt MathFullForm id i2i char x gt 196 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Atomic expressions Atomic expressions are expressions that don t take other expressions as operands They usually act as operands in more complex expressions prompt prompt is a placeholder to show an expression s undefined operands Of the character formatting specifications only kerning values affect the appearance of a prompt Example MathFullForm statement lt MathFullForm prompt gt num num describes a number It always has two operands the first shows the number as used for computations internal precision and the second shows the number as displayed When fewer digits are displayed than are used internally an ellipsis appears after the number Example MathFullForm statement lt MathFullForm num 3 141592653589793 3 1415927 gt 3 1415927 There are two special cases of the num expression Example MathFullForm st
401. tangle Description of data Position and size of rectangle in points Size of data in bytes 166 Example 83 00000010 00670000 004F0000 00130000 003C0000 for a rectangle with the following specifications x position 103 points 0067 y position 79 points 004F width 19 points 0013 height 60 points 003C Rounded rectangle 0x84 Specification by data type Metric rectangle 296 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER Description of data Radius of corners in points metric Position and size of rectangle in points rectangle Size of data in bytes 20 Example 84 00000014 00120000 007E0000 007E0000 00630000 00240000 for a rounded rectangle with the following specifications radius of corners 18 points 0012 x position 126 points 007E y position 126 points 007E width 99 points 0063 height 36 points 0024 Arc 0x85 Specification by data type Rectangle metric metric Description of data Position and size of arc in points rectangle Start angle in degrees metric Length of arc in degrees where positive values correspond to clockwise arcs and negative values correspond to counterclockwise arcs metric Size of data in bytes 24 Example 85 00000018 00490000 00270000 007C0000 008C0000 00000000 005A0000 for an arc with the following specifications x position 73 points 0049 y position
402. tatement x x lt MathFullForm notin char x char x gt xx lt MathFullForm notsubset char x char x gt xOx lt MathFullForm oplus char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm otimes char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm parallel char x char x gt xix lt MathFullForm perp char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm plus char x char x gt x x lt MathFullForm plus char x minus char x gt XxX lt MathFullForm propto char x char x gt x gt x lt MathFullForm rightarrow char x char x gt x gt x lt MathFullForm Rightarrow char x char x gt x Xx lt MathFullForm sim char x char x gt xcx lt MathFullForm subset char x char x gt xox lt MathFullForm subseteq char x char x gt xXDx lt MathFullForm supset char x char x gt xDx lt MathFullForm supseteq char x char x gt xx lt MathFullForm times char x char x gt XVX lt MathFullForm vee char x char x gt x AX lt MathFullForm wedge char x char x gt Large operators Large operator expressions have one primary operand In addition they can have one or two range operands The following table contains an example of each large operator with only one operand with char x asa sample operand Example MathFullForm statement AX lt MathFullForm bigcap char x gt VX lt MathFullForm bigcup char x gt fx
403. tatements as follows lt Document lt DStartPage 1 gt h The indentation is not required in a MIF file although it may make the file easier for you to read A MIF main statement appears at the top level of a file A main statement cannot be nested within other statements Some substatements can only appear within certain main statements The statement descriptions in this manual indicate the valid locations for a substatement by including it in all of the valid main statements Main statements are identified in the statement description for the correct order of main statements see MIF file layout on page 52 MIF data items There are several general types of data items in a MIF statement This manual uses the following terms and symbols to identify data items This term or symbol Means string Left quotation mark zero or more standard ASCII characters you can also include UTF 8 char acters and a straight quotation mark Example ab cdef ghij tagstring A string that names a format tag such as a paragraph format tag A tagst ring value must be unique case is significant A statement that refers to a tagst ring must exactly match the tagstring value A tagst ring value can include any character from the FrameMaker char acter set pathname A string specifying a pathname see Device independent pathnames on page 7 boolean A value of either Yes or No Case is significant integer
404. tax lt EDEndElementRules Begin end element rules any combination of level and context format rules lt LevelFormatRule gt A level format rule see LevelFormatRule statement on page 164 lt ContextFormatRule gt A context format rule see ContextFormatRule statement on page 164 lt ContextFormatRule gt Additional context format rule statements as needed lt LevelFormatRule gt Additional level format rule statements as needed Endof EDEndElementRules statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 164 MIF Reference ContextFormatRule statement The ContextFormatRule statement contains clauses that specify an element s formatting on the basis of the element s parent and sibling elements It contains an If statement and zero or more ElseIf statements It can also contain an Else statement The contextFormatRule statement must appear in a format rules statement such as an EDText FormatRules or EDEndElementRules statement Syntax lt ContextFormatRule Begin context format rule lt li gt An If clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 165 lt Elself gt An Elself clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 165 lt Elself gt Additional statements as needed lt Else gt An optional Else clause see If Elself and Else statements on page 165 gt Endof ContextFormatRule statement LevelFormatRule stat
405. te file and then use a MIF include statement to read the file into FrameMaker ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 246 MIF Reference For example suppose you need to publish a parts catalog Each part has a name a description and a table that gives pricing information A typical record looks like this Valve Box Lids gas and sewer For 5 25 Shaft Buffalo style valve boxes Lids come in three styles water Put the part name and description in a Text Flc statement Put the table in a Tbls statement in a separate file Marking Stock Number Price Water 367 5044 11 36 Sewer 367 5046 10 25 Gas 367 5048 12 49 In the database all the information about each part is associated with its record Due to the structure of MIF however the information must appear in different portions of the MIF file the part name and description belong in the Text Flow statement while the table belongs in the Tb1s statement To accomplish this you can make the following modifications to the design of the database procedure shown in the previous example e At the beginning of the procedure create two text files one for the main MIF file that will contain the MIF file identification line and the main text flow and the other for the Tb1s statement e Usea second include statement to read in the Tb1s statement e As your procedure passes through each record write the data that belongs in the Text Flow statement in th
406. teger data The integer data type stores integer values in a facet For example the fmbitmap program stores the dimensions of the graphic the x coordinate of the hot spot and the y coordinate of the hot spot as integer data in a facet Data facet Si amp 64 amp 64 amp 1 amp 1 Metric data Metric data describes a graphic in terms of units of measurement The following table shows the abbreviations used to denote units within a facet Units Abbreviation Centimeters cm Ciceros cicero cc Didots dd Inches in Millimeters mm Picas pica pi pc Points point pt Graphic insets UNIX versions A graphic inset contains graphic data that can be written by a graphic application and used by FrameMaker to display and print an imported graphic A graphic inset can also specify a live link which associates an imported graphic in a FrameMaker document with the graphic application used to edit the graphic A live link can be set up through FrameServer functions or through an FDK client When a live link is established between an imported graphic and a graphic application users can edit the graphic in a graphic application and directly import the graphic into a FrameMaker document For more information on live links see the FDK Programmer s Guide which is provided with the FDK or the online manual Using FrameServer with Applications and Insets which is provided with the UNIX version of the FDK ADO
407. ters Headers and footers are defined in untagged text flows on the master pages of a document When FrameMaker creates default master pages it automatically provides untagged text flows for headers and footers If you are importing a document that has headers and footers you define additional text frames on the master pages Link an untagged text flow to each additional text frame on the master page The untagged text flow contains the text of the header or footer For an example of a MIF file with a footer see the sample file footers mif Note that the footer text flow contains a variable you can place variables only in untagged text flows on a master page not in tagged flows ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 36 MIF Reference Creating markers A FrameMaker document can contain markers that hold hidden text and mark locations For example you use markers to add index entries cross references and hypertext commands to a document FrameMaker provides both predefined marker types and markers that you can define as needed For more information about markers and marker types see page 135 Within a FrameMaker document you insert a marker by choosing the Marker command from the Special menu In a MIF file you insert a marker by using a Marker statement The Marker statement specifies the marker type and the marker text The following example inserts an index marker lt Para lt ParaLine lt Marker lt MType 2 gt Index marker lt MText Hell
408. the MIF Document statement describes standard formats for equations The equation formatting substatements correspond to settings in the Equations palette Syntax lt Document See Document statement on page 87 Equation sizes lt DMathSmallIntegral dimension gt Size in points of integral symbols in small equations lt DMathMediumIntegral dimension gt Size in points of integral symbols in medium equations lt DMathLargeIntegral dimension gt Size in points of integral symbols in large equations lt DMathSmallSigma dimension gt Size in points of summation and product symbols in small equa tions lt DMathMediumSigma dimension gt Size in points of summation and product symbols in medium equations lt DMathLargeSigma dimension gt Size in points of summation and product symbols in large equa tions lt DMathSmallLevell dimension gt Size in points of level 1 expression normal level in small equations lt DMathMediumLevell dimension gt Size in points of level 1 expression in medium equations lt DMathLargeLevell dimension gt Size in points of level 1 expression in large equations lt DMathSmallLevel2 dimension gt Size in points of level 2 expression first level subscripts and super scripts in small equations lt DMathMediumLevel2 dimension gt Size in points of level 2 expression in medium equations lt DMathLargeLevel2 dimension gt Size i
409. the On Off state of the Track Text Edit option lt DTrackChangesPreviewState integer gt Preserves the preview state of edited text DTrackChangesPreviewState property can have one of the following states Preview Off DTrackChangesPreviewState set with the value No Preview On Final DTrackChangesPreviewState set with the value Al 1 e Preview On Original DTrackChangesPreviewState set with the value Yes WebDAV properties lt WEBDAV lt DocServerUrl st ring gt URL of the MIF document on the WEBDAV Server Any HTTP path is valid Example lt DocServerUrl http mikej xp joewebdav myfile mif gt http mikej xp joewebdav is the path of the server lt DocServerState gt Indicates whether the MIF document is checked in or checked out on the WebDAV server The DocServerState property can contain one of the following values e CheckedOut CheckedIn gt End of WEBDAV Document statement Miscellaneous properties lt DMagicMarker integer gt Type number of the marker used to represent a delete mark lt Document Document properties lt DNextUnique ID gt Refers to the next object witha lt Unique ID gt statement gener ated by FrameMaker and should not be used by filters Window properties lt DViewRect X Y W H gt Position and size of document window based on position and size of the document region within containing window D
410. the document has a custom character tag list lt CustomPgfFlag boolean gt Yes means the document has a custom paragraph formats list lt CustomTblFlag boolean gt Yes means the document has a custom table formats list lt DCustomFontList gt Signifies the start of the custom character tag list in the document This tag is present in the document only when you have created a custom character tag list in the document lt DCustomFontTag string gt Name of the tag in the custom character tag list lt DCustomPgfList gt Signifies the start of the custom paragraph formats list in the docu ment This tag is present in the document only when you have created a custom paragraph formats list in the document lt DCustomPgfTag string gt Name of the paragraph tag in the custom paragraph list lt DCustomTblList gt Signifies the start of the custom table formats list in the document This tag is present in the document only when you have created a custom table formats list in the document lt DCustomTblTag string gt Name of the table tag in the custom table tag ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 95 MIF Reference Math properties For more information see MIF Equation Statements Structure properties For more information see MIF Statements for Structured Docu ments and Books Track Text Edit properties lt DTrackChangesOn boolean gt Preserves
411. the statement see the section TiApiClient statement on page 140 A text flow imported from another FrameMaker document or from a document filtered by FrameMaker is described by the TiFlow substatement For information on the statement see the section TiFlow statement on page 141 e Plain text imported by reference is described by the TiText substatement For information on the statement see the section TiText statement on page 142 Text imported into a tabular format is described by the Ti Text Table substatement For information on the statement see the section TiTextTable statement on page 142 Usage of some of the aspects of the Text Inset statement is described in the following section 138 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 139 MIF Reference Record of the filter used to import text The Text Inset statement contains a record to identify the filter that was used to import text by reference FrameMaker uses the record to find the correct filter to use when updating the text inset The record is specified in the Ti ImportHint statement and uses the following syntax record vers vendor format id platform filter vers filter name Note that the fields in the record are not separated by spaces For example 0001XTNDWDBNMACP0002MS Word 4 5 In this example 0001 is the record version XTND is the vendor WDBN is the format id macp is the platform 0002 is the filter version and ms Word 4 5 is the filter name The rest of this s
412. they only affect tables that the user inserts after the MIF file has been opened in FrameMaker Your filter or application should provide these defaults only for documents that might be edited later For example the following MIF code assigns a paragraph format named Description to body cells in new tables that are given the format called Coffee Table ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 31 MIF Reference lt TblFormat lt TblTag Coffee Table gt lt TblColumn lt TblColumnNum 0 gt lt TblColumnWidth 1 0 gt lt Tb1ColumnBody lt PgfTag Description gt gt end of TblColumnBody gt end of TblColumn gt end of TblFormat Tables inherit properties differently Tables inherit formatting properties somewhat differently than other document components A table without an applied table format does not inherit one from a previously defined table Instead it gets a set of default properties from the MIF interpreter Thus if you apply a named format to a table a following table will not inherit that format Paragraphs in table cells still inherit properties from previously defined paragraph formats If you give a table cella certain paragraph style all subsequent cells inherit the same property unless it is explicitly reset Table cells can inherit paragraph properties from any previously specified paragraph format including other tables paragraphs or even the Paragraph Format catalog Tips To avoid problems when creating tables e Give each
413. ties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer QAS 0 amp Paragraph Tag Numbered Cell Vertical Alignment Top Cell Margins Top From Table Format Plus v Bottom From Table Format Plus v Left From Table Format Plus v Right From Table Format Plus v 0 0pt 0 0 pt 0 0pt 0 0 pt Table cell properties Commands z The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 19 MIF Reference In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfCellAlignment Top gt Cell Vertical Alignment lt PgfCellMargins 0 0 pt 0 0 pt 0 0 pt 0 0 pt gt Cell Margins lt PgfCellTMarginFixed No gt Top lt PgfCellBMarginFixed No gt Bottom lt PgfCellLMarginFixed No gt Left lt PgfCellRMarginFixed No gt Right ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 20 MIF Reference The Direction properties are defined as follows in the Paragraph Designer Paragraph Designer m aA 5 0 H E Paragraph Tag Numbered Commands Update Al Reset Direction properties The following table shows the corresponding MIF statements In MIF file In Paragraph Designer lt PgfDir LTR gt Direction of the paragraph text gt end of Pgf Adding a Paragraph Catalog Ina MIF file you define a Paragraph Catalog by using a PgfCatalog statement The Paragraph Catalog contains one
414. tioning and spacing values Expressions have the following syntax ExpressionName FormatCodes operand operand Where Is ExpressionName The expression name for example abs Format Codes Optional formatting codes for example i2i described next operand Another expression Formatting codes are enclosed within asterisk delimiters If an expression doesn t contain formatting codes it cannot contain asterisks Formatting codes consist of a pair of flags enclosing a numeric value or string except for boolean flags which are a single flag For example the following expression contains formatting codes that select a display format and a boolean flag to set a manual line break point lt MathFullForm id i2i char x gt String values in format codes must be enclosed in straight double quotation marks To include characters in the extended ASCII range above 0x127 use a backslash sequence see Character set in strings on page 7 You can use the following formatting codes which can appear in any order The default for all numeric values is 0 Format code Meaning AintegerA Manual alignment mark in element 0 none 1 right 2 left bmetricb Extra space at bottom of expression corresponds to Spacing values in the Position Settings dialog box BstringB Font angle for example Italic cintegerc Alignment for horizontal lists and matrices 0 baseline 1 top 2
415. to display the book window when it is View Only Syntax lt BViewOnly boolean gt Yes specifies View Only book locked lt BViewOnlyWinBorders boolean gt No suppresses display of scroll bars and border buttons in book window of View Only book lt BViewOnlyWinMenubar boolean gt No suppresses display of book window menu bar in View Only book Unix only lt BViewOnlyPopup boolean gt No suppresses display of book context menus in View Only book lt BViewOnlyNoOp Oxnnn gt Disables a command in a View Only document command is specified by hex function code see page 47 BDisplayText statement The BDisplayText statement defines the type of text to display in the book window next to the book component icons It can appear anywhere in the file but normally appears just after the book s View Only statements Syntax lt BWindowRect X Y W H gt Book window placement on screen lt BDisplayText keyword gt The type of text to display next to component icons in the book window keyword can be one of AsFilename displays the filename of the book component in the book window AsText displays a text snippet from the first paragraph of the component in the book window BookComponent statement The BookComponent statement contains the setup information for a folder group document or generated file in a book The BookComponent statements must precede all other stateme
416. tons in document window of View Only document lt DViewOnlyWinMenubar boolean gt No suppresses display of document window menu bar in View Only document lt DViewOnlyWinPopup boolean gt No suppresses display of document region pop up menus in View Only document The dotted boundary line of a document is the document region lt DViewOnlyWinPalette boolean gt Yes makes window behave as command palette window in View Only document The FrameMaker console is the Command palette window Document default language lt DLanguage keyword gt Hyphenation and spell checking language for text lines for allowed keywords see Pgf Language on page 64 Color printing lt DNoPrintSepColor tagstring gt Tag name of color not to print any color not included here is printed If you have multiple colors you don t want to print use multiple state ments lt DPrintProcessColor tagstring gt Tag name of process color to print as separation lt DPrintSeparations boolean gt Yes prints separations lt DTrapwiseCompatibility boolean gt When printing to a PostScript file Yes generates postscript opti mized for use with the TrapWise application lt DPrintSkipBlankPages boolean gt Yes skips blank pages when printing Superscripts and subscripts lt DSuperscriptSize percent gt Scaling factor for superscripts expressed as percentage of the current font size lt DSub
417. tribute the text in the columns if the TRColumn Balance statement is set to Yes A text frame also contains the specifications for the placement of side heads The width and location of the side head in a text frame are specified by the TRSideheadWidth and TRSideheadPlacement statements The side head area cannot be wider than 50 inches In the TRSideheadPlacement statement the Inside and Outside settings corre spond to the side closer to the binding and the side farther from the binding respectively The spacing between the side head and the text columns in the text frame is specified by the TRSideheadGap statement The spacing cannot exceed 50 inches TRNext indicates the ID of the next text frame in the flow If there is no next Text Rect use a lt TRNext 0 gt statement or omit the entire TRNext statement The text frame is rotated by the value specified in an Angle statement The default angle is 0 Text flows Text flows contain the actual text of a FrameMaker document In a MIF file text flows are contained in Text Flow statements Typically the Text Flow statement consists of a list of embedded Para statements that contain paragraphs special characters table and graphic frame anchors and graphic objects When the MIF interpreter encounters the first Text Flow statement it sets up a default text flow environment The default environment consists of the current text frame current paragraph properties and current font properties Th
418. tring Coffee gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Bags gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String Status gt gt gt gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag CellHeading gt CR Retail and Discount prices are conditional SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt Conditional lt InCondition Retail gt gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt String Price per Bag gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Conditional lt InCondition Discount gt gt lt String Discount Price gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Unconditional gt gt gt gt gt gt gt CR Table Body FIRST RECORD Inventory SEND PACKET vDoc lt TbIBody CR For n 1 Records in selection Inventory Change shading of row depending on inventory status If Inventory Status In stock vFill lt CellFill 6 gt lt CellColor Green gt Else vFill lt CellFill 6 gt lt CellColor Red gt End if Compute discount price vDiscPrice Inventory Price per Bag vDisc RELATE ONE Inventory JName SEND PACKET vDoc lt Row lt RowMaxHeight 14 0 DQ gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt Cell vFill lt CellContent lt Para lt PgfTag Number gt CR SEND PACKET vDoc lt ParaLine lt String String Inventory
419. tronic Publishers Inc Copyright 1997All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1990 Merriam Webster Inc Copyright 1993 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA OCopyright 2004 Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc OCopyright 2004 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA OCopyright 1991 Dr Lluis de Yzaguirre Maura Copyright 1991 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA OCopyright 1990 Munksgaard International Publishers Ltd OCopyright 1990 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1990 Van Dale Lexicografie bv Copyright 1990 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1995 Van Dale Lexicografie bv Copyright 1996 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA Copyright 1990 IDE a s Copyright 1990 All rights reserved Proximity Technology A Division of Franklin Electronic Publishers Inc Burlington New Jersey USA OCopyright 1992 Hachette Franklin Electronic Publishers I
420. ts 007E Polygon 0x81 Specification by data type Long point point Description of data Number of points long Position of each point in points point point Size of data in bytes Variable 295 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Example 81 00000010 00000003 01320000 002E0000 01100000 007E0000 01680000 007D0000 for a polygon with the following specifications number of points 3 x position of point 1 306 points 0132 y position of point 1 46 points 002E x position of point 2 272 points 0110 y position of point 2 126 points 007E x position of point 3 360 points 0168 y position of point 3 125 points 007D Note When smoothed style is on this object is a closed Bezier curve Polyline 0x82 Specification by data type Long point point Description of data Number of points long Position of each point in points point point Size of data in bytes Variable Example 82 0000000C 00000002 00120000 00360000 00FC0000 003F0000 for a polyline with the following specifications number of points 2 00000002 point 1 x position 18 points 0012 point 1 y position 54 points 0036 point 2 x position 252 points 00FC point 2 y position 63 points 003F Note When smoothed style is on this object becomes a Bezier curve Rectangle 0x83 Specification by data type Rec
421. ts master pages and any other formatting and page layout information that your document needs Generally a template contains some sample lines that illustrate each format in the document Save the completed template as a MIF file For more information about creating templates see your user s manual Editing the MIF file You need to edit the resulting MIF file to extract just the formatting and page layout information 1 Delete the MIFFile statement 2 Search for the first body page and locate its TextRect statement To find the first body page search for the first occurrence of lt PageType BodyPage gt Suppose the first body page in your MIF file looks like this lt Page lt Unique 45155 gt lt PageType BodyPage gt lt PageNum 1 gt lt PageSize 8 5 11 0 gt lt PageOrientation Portrait gt lt PageAngle 0 0 gt lt PageBackground Default gt lt TextRect lt ID 7 gt lt Unique 45158 gt lt Pen 15 gt lt Fill 15 gt lt PenWidth 1 0 pt gt lt ObColor Black gt lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle Solid gt gt end of DashedPattern lt Shaperect 12 0 1 0 6 5 9 0 5 lt TRNext 0 gt gt end of TextRect gt end of Page ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 45 MIF Reference The ID for the TextRect on this body page is 7 Remember this ID number If there is more than one TextRect on the body page remember the ID of the first one 3 Locate the text flow associated with the TextRect statement on the first body page an
422. ts that contain a specific feature and saving these documents as MIF files Because FrameMaker writes complete and precise MIF code it is your ultimate source for learning about MIF statements For more information about document components not described in this chapter see the MIF statement descrip tions in MIF Document Statements MIF Book File Statements and MIF Statements for Structured Documents and Books Chapter 3 MIF Document Statements This chapter describes the structure of MIF document files and the MIF statements they can contain Most MIF statements are listed in the order that they appear in a MIF file as described in the following section If you are looking for information about a particular statement use this manual s statement index to locate it If you are looking for information about a type of object such as a table or paragraph use the table of contents to locate the MIF state ments that describe the object MIF file layout The following table lists the main statements in a MIF document file in the order that Adobe FrameMaker writes them You must follow the same order that FrameMaker uses with the exception of the macro statements and control statements which can appear anywhere at the top level of a file Each statement except the MIFFile statement is optional Most main statements use substatements to describe objects and their properties Statement Description
423. tte statement to No in the MIF file before opening it in FrameMaker Using active cross references A locked document automatically has active cross references An active cross reference behaves like a hypertext gotolink command when the user clicks on a cross reference FrameMaker displays the link s destination page By default the destination page is shown in the same document window as the link s source You can use MIF statements to turn off active cross references and to change the type of hypertext link that the cross reference emulates By default cross references emulate the gotol ink behavior To make cross references emulate the openlink command which displays the destination page in a new document window use the following statement lt DViewOnlyXRef OpenBehavior gt Use this setting to allow users to see both the source page and the destination page e To turn off active cross references use the following statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 47 MIF Reference lt DViewOnlyXRef NotActive gt Use this setting to emulate the behavior in earlier FrameMaker versions You can use the DviewOnlySelect statement to control whether active cross references highlight the marker associated with destination text e When cross references are active and lt DViewOnlySelect Yes gt is specified clicking a cross reference in the document highlights the marker associated with the destination text e When cross references are active
424. ty Pages Pages in a MIF file are defined by a Page statement A FrameMaker document can have four types of pages Body pages contain the document s text and graphics e Master pages control the appearance of body pages 107 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference e Reference pages contain boilerplate material or graphic art that is used repeatedly in a document or custom math elements e Hidden pages contain hidden conditional text in a special text flow When FrameMaker writes a MIF file it writes a sequence of numbered body pages When you generate a MIF file you should only define one body page and allow the MIF interpreter to automatically create new body pages as needed For more information about using body pages in a MIF file see Specifying page layout on page 31 Page statement The Page statement adds a new page to the document Page statements must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt Page lt PageType keyword gt Page type keyword can be one of LeftMasterPage RightMasterPage OtherMasterPage ReferencePage BodyPage HiddenPage lt PageNum string gt Page number for additive pages provided for output filters lt PageTag tagstring gt ames master or reference page for a body page specifies a different page number for example a point page to be used instead of the default page number lt Pa
425. tylecatalog statement defines the object styles A document can have only one StyleCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt StyleCatalog lt Style Defines a character format see PgfFont and Font statements next gt End of StyleCatalog statement Style statement The style statement defines the object style properties A document can have only one StyleCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 71 lt Style lt StyleTag string gt The name of the object style lt Pen integer gt Pen pattern for lines and edges see Values for Pen and Fill statements on page 107 lt PenWidth dimension gt Line and edge thickness lt ObTint percentage gt Applies a tint to the object color 100 is equivalent to the pure object color and 0 is equivalent to no color at all lt DashedPattern lt DashedStyle keyword gt Specifies whether object is drawn with a dashed or a solid line keyword can be one of Solid Dashed lt HeadCap keyword gt Type of head cap for lines and arcs keyword can be one of ArrowHead Butt Round Square lt TailCap keyword gt Type of tail cap for lines and arcs keyword can be one of ArrowHead Butt Round Square lt ArrowStyle gt See
426. u In a MIF file you create a cross reference as follows e Create the format of cross references by using xRefFormats and XRefFormat statements Insert a marker at the reference source by using a Marker statement Insert the reference point by using an XRef statement Creating cross reference formats The cross reference formats for a document are defined in one XRef Formats statement A document can have only one XRefFormats statement The xRefFormats statement contains one or more XRefFormat statements that define the cross reference formats A cross reference format consists of a name and a definition ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 37 MIF Reference lt XRefFormats lt XRef Format lt XRefName Page gt lt XRefDef pagelx11 lt pagenum gt gt gt end of XRefFormat gt end of XRefFormats The name can be any string allowed in a MIF file see Character set in strings on page 7 In this example a nonbreaking space x11 appears between the word page and the page number Each cross reference format must have a unique name names are case sensitive The cross reference definition contains text and cross reference building blocks See your user s manual or the online Help system for a list of building blocks Inserting the reference source marker To mark the location of the reference source insert a Marker statement at the beginning of the reference source The following example creates a cross reference to a hea
427. u can write programs that convert graphics or documents into a MIF file and then import the MIF file into a FrameMaker document with the graphics and document formats intact A filter program translated the text file to produce the following MIF file lt MIFFile 2015 gt Identifies this as a MIF file The macros below are used only for the second paragraph of text to illustrate how they can ease the process of MIF generation define pr lt Para define ep gt define ln lt ParaLine lt String define en gt gt First paragraph of text lt Para lt PgfTag gt statement forces a lookup in the document s Paragraph Catalog so you don t have to specify the format in detail here lt PgfTag Body gt 231 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 232 MIF Reference One lt ParaLine gt statement for each line in the paragraph Line breaks don t matter the MIF interpreter adjusts line breaks when the file is opened or imported lt ParaLine lt String MIF Maker Interchange format is a group of gt gt lt ParaLine lt String statements that describe all text and graphics gt gt lt ParaLine lt String understood by FrameMaker in an easily parsed gt gt lt ParaLine lt String readable text file MIF provides a way to exchange gt gt lt ParaLine lt String information between FrameMaker and other gt gt lt ParaLine lt String applications while prese
428. uickDraw PICT WMF Windows MetaFile EPSF Encapsulated PostScript Macintosh ADOBE FRAMEMAKER MIF Reference Code Description EPSI Encapsulated PostScript Interchange EPSB Encapsulated PostScript Binary Windows EPSD Encapsulated PostScript with Desktop Control Separations DCS SNRF Sun Raster File PNTG MacPaint PCX PC Paintbrush TIFF Tag Image File Format XWD X Windows System Window Dump file GIF Graphics Interchange Format CompuServe MIF Maker Interchange Format FRMI Framelmage FRMV FrameVector SRGB SGI RGB CDR CorelDRAW CGM Computer Graphics Metafile DRW Micrografx CAD DXF Autodesk Drawing eXchange file CAD files GEM GEM file Windows HPGL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language IGES Initial Graphics Exchange Specification CAD files WPG WordPerfect Graphics DIB Device independent bitmap Windows OLE Object Linking and Embedding Client Microsoft EMF Enhanced MetaFile Windows Moov QuickTime Movie IMG4 Image to CCITT Group 4 UNIX G4IM CCITT Group 4 to Image SWF Shockwave Flash file U3D U3D file format Note that this is not a comprehensive list of codes Codes may be added to this list by Adobe or by developers at
429. ument window based on position and size of the document region within containing window DViewRect takes precedence over DWindowRect lt DWindowRect X Y W H gt Position and size of document window based on the containing window including the title bar etc lt DViewScale percentage gt Current zoom setting Column properties lt DMargins L T R B gt ot generated by FrameMaker but used by filters to specify text margins ignored unless DColumns is specified lt DColumns integer gt ot generated by FrameMaker but used by filters to specify number of columns lt DColumnGap dimension gt ot generated by FrameMaker but used by filters to specify column gap lt DPageSize W H gt Document s default page size and orientation if W is less than H the document s orientation is portrait otherwise it is landscape Pagination lt DStartPage integer gt Starting page number lt DPageNumStyle keyword gt Page numbering style keyword can be one of IndicNumeric FarsiNumeric HebrewNumeric AbjadNumeric AlifbataNumeric UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha ZenLCAlpha ZenUCAlpha KanjiNumeric KanjiKazu BusinessKazu lt DPagePointStyle keyword gt Point page number style keyword can be one of UCRoman LCRoman UCAlpha LCAlpha lt DTwoSides boolean gt Yes specifies two sided layout ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 90 MIF Reference lt DParity keyword gt Specifies whether firs
430. umns and side heads The pg PlacementStyle statement specifies the placement of a paragraph across text columns and side heads in a text frame e Ifa paragraph spans across all columns and side heads the PgfPlacement Style statement is set to Straddle e Ifa paragraph spans across all columns but not across the side heads in a text frame the PgfPlacementStyle statement is set to StraddleNormal Locked paragraphs and text insets The PgfLocked statement does not correspond to any setting in the Paragraph Designer The statement is used for text insets that retain formatting information from the source document If the lt PgfLocked Yes gt statement appears in a specific paragraph that paragraph is part of a text inset that retains formatting information from the source document The paragraph is not affected by global formatting performed on the document Ifthe lt PgfLocked No gt statement appears in a specific paragraph that paragraph is not part of a text inset or is part of a text inset that reads formatting information from the current document The paragraph is affected by global formatting performed on the document For more information about text insets see Text insets text imported by reference on page 137 Character formats A character format is defined by a PgfFont or a Font statement Character formats can be defined locally or they can be stored in the Character Catalog which is defined by a Font Catalog state
431. use the macro name anywhere that the replacement text is valid For example suppose you define the following macro define Bold lt Font lt FWeight Bold gt gt When you use the macro in MIF statements write lt Bold gt The interpreter replaces lt Bold gt with lt Font lt FWeight Bold gt gt Note that it retains the outer angle brackets in the replacement text Note that when you use a macro in a MIF file you must enclose macro names in brackets to comply with the MIF syntax for example write lt Bold gt instead of Bold The MIF parser requires these brackets to interpret the macro correctly include statement The include statement reads information from other files It is similar to an include statement in a C program When the MIF interpreter reads a MIF file it replaces the include statement with the contents of the included file An include statement can appear anywhere in a MIF file However make sure that the contents of the included file appear in a valid location when they are read into the MIF file Syntax include pathname Reads in a file Usage The pathname argument specifies a UNIX style pathname which uses a slash to separate directory names for example usr doc template mif For the Windows version of FrameMaker use the following guideline for specifying absolute pathnames e For Windows versions start an absolute pathname with the drive name For example to include the file
432. use when saving as PDF pgfPDFStructureLevel has been added to the Pgf statement to assign a structure level to paragraph formats Books and documents can also include arbitrary fields of Document Info information Documents use the PDFDocInfo statement and books use PDFBookInfo 256 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 257 MIF Reference To improve handling of bookmarks hypertext links within and across PDF files FrameMaker now stores reference data within documents PgfReferenced identifies each paragraph that is marked as a named destination Elemen tReferenced similarly identified structure elements If you like you can specify that the Save As PDF function creates a named destination for every paragraph in the document this is done via FP PDFDestsMarked within the Document statement Books Version 6 0 of FrameMaker has brought significant change to books The book window now can display the filename of each book component or a text snippet from the component s document In MIF BDisplayText determines which type of information to display A book can also be view only MIF now includes BviewOnly BViewOnlyWinBorders BViewOnlyWinMenuBar BViewOnlyPopup and BViewOnlyNoop statements to express whether a book is view only and how it should appear Book Components Book components store numbering properties to use when generating a book The following table shows the new MIF statements for managing different types of numbering
433. ween title and table Initial number of rows and columns for new tables with this format end of TblFormat The Tb1Column statement numbers each column and sets its width A table can have more columns than Tb1column statements if a column does not have a specified format the MIF interpreter uses the format of the most recently defined column Note A table instance must have at least one To1Column statement A table can use a format from the Table Catalog that includes a Tb1Column statement or it can include a local Tb1Format statement that supplies the Tolcolumn statement Adding a Table Catalog You can store table formats in a Table Catalog by using a Tb1Catalog statement A document can have only one TblCatalog statement which must occur before the Tbls statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 30 MIF Reference The Tb1catalog statement contains one Tb1Format statement for each format as shown in the following template lt TblCatalog lt TblFormat gt lt TblFormat gt gt end of TblCatalog As with the Paragraph Catalog if your MIF file does not provide a Table Catalog the MIF interpreter supplies a default catalog and formats If you do provide a Table Catalog your defined table formats supersede those in the default Table Catalog You can add a minimal table format to the catalog by simply supplying a table format tag name The MIF interpreter supplies a set of default values to the tables properties when it reads in th
434. when multiple conditional tags are applied to text These colors are identified by their ColorTag which contains the prefix fm gen Syntax lt ColorCatalog lt Color gt Defines a color see Color statement next lt Color gt Additional statements as needed gt End of ColorCatalog statement Color statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 84 MIF Reference The Color statement defines a color It must appear within the Colorcatalog statement Note that MIF version 5 5 and later supports multiple color libraries The ColorPantonevalue statement has been replaced by the ColorFam ilyName and ColorInkName statements Syntax lt Color lt ColorTag tagstring gt Color tag name lt ColorCyan percentage gt Percentage of cyan 0 100 lt ColorMagenta percentage gt Percentage of magenta 0 100 lt ColorYellow percentage gt Percentage of yellow 0 100 lt ColorBlack percentage gt Percentage of black 0 100 lt ColorLibraryFamilyName string gt Color library name lt ColorLibraryInkName string gt Specifies name of the color library pigment Older versions of MIF that use ColorPantoneValue can still be read into MIF 5 5 and later The full ink name must be used lt ColorAttribute keyword gt Identifies a default FrameMaker document color keyword can be one of ColorIsBlack ColorIsWhite ColorIsRed ColorIsGreen ColorIsBlue Colo
435. xcept forced breaks in your source document because the text will be repaginated by the MIF interpreter If the document uses style sheets convert paragraph styles to paragraph formats in a PgfCatalog statement and convert table styles to table formats in a TblCatalog statement Output filters You can write output filters that convert a MIF file to any format you want While you should be familiar with all MIF statements to determine which ones you need to translate a FrameMaker document your output filter doesn t need to convert all the possible MIF statements In most cases a MIF description of a FrameMaker document contains more information than you need Because MIF appears as a series of nested statements your output filter must be able to scan a MIF file for the information it needs and skip over statements that it will not use ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 49 MIF Reference Installing a filter In UNIX versions you can set up FrameMaker to automatically start a script that runs a filter based on the filename suffix The filter can convert a file to a MIF file FrameMaker then interprets the MIF file storing the results in a FrameMaker document For more information about installing your filter see the online manual Customizing FrameMaker Minimizing MIF statements The following tips may help you minimize the number of MIF statements that your filter needs to generate e Ifyou are not concerned about controlling the format of a documen
436. xpr gt Additional filters as required gt End of AttrCondExprCatalog AttrCondExpr statement The attrCondExpr statement is used to define a set of attributes with values Syntax lt AttrCondExpr lt AttrCondExprTag string gt Expression Tag string lt AttrCondExprStr string gt Expression string lt AttrCondState string gt Indicates whether the Att rCondExpr is applied to the document The string must have one of the following values Active Inactive gt End of AttrCondExpr Paragraph formats A paragraph format is defined in a Pgf statement Paragraph formats can be defined locally or stored in the Paragraph Catalog which is defined by a PgfCatalog statement PgfCatalog statement The PgfCatalog statement defines the contents of the Paragraph Catalog A MIF file can have only one PgfCatalog statement which must appear at the top level in the order given in MIF file layout on page 52 Syntax lt PgfCatalog lt Pgf gt Defines a paragraph format see Pgf statement on page 61 lt Pgf gt Additional statements as needed gt End of Pg Catalog statement ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 61 MIF Reference Usage If you don t include a PgfCatalog statement the MIF interpreter uses the paragraph formats defined in NewTem plate For information on defaults specified in templates see page 3 If you include PgfCatalog paragraph formats in the MIF
437. xt is controlled using the BannerText element in the EDD You can control the instructional text you want to display for each of the elements FrameMaker does not treat banner text as real content in the document Banner text is included in FM and MIF output but is not included in XML output Banner text in FrameMaker is governed with the following settings Syntax lt BannerTextBegin gt For Internal use please ignore lt BannerTextEnd gt For Internal use please ignore lt EDBannerText string gt The banner text that appears inside a new element instance lt DBannerTextOn Boolean gt Yes turns on banner text for tags in document window lt BannerTextProcessed boolean gt On means the banner text for the element was created once for this element Off means the banner text was not created for this element Filter By Attribute DefAttrValuesCatalog and AttrCondExprCatalog statements The Filter By Attribute feature in FrameMaker supports filtering a structured document for complex output scenarios based on the value of attributes You define a filter using a Boolean expression containing attribute value pairs You can create multiple filters save them and use them for filtering a document based on different output scenarios The DefattrvaluesCatalog statement and the AttrcondExprCatalog statement store information required for generating the output The DefAttrValuesCatalog statement defines the contents of the d
438. y order It can also contain additional substatements describing standard equation formats See MIF Equation Statements ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 88 MIF Reference Document File Info For versions 7 0 and later FrameMaker stores file information in packets XMP of encoded data This data can be used by applications that support XMP In MIF these data packets are expressed in the lt DocFileInfo gt statement This data is generated by FrameMaker in an encoded form and you should not edit the information Note that this information corresponds to the values of fields in the File Info dialog box It also corresponds to the data in the lt PDFDocInfo gt statement However unlike lt PDFDocInfos gt this XMP data also includes the values of the File Info dialog box default fields for Creator Creation Date and MetaData Date PDF Document Info For versions 6 0 and later FrameMaker stores PDF File Info in the document file FrameMaker automatically supplies values for Creator Creation Date and Metadata Date these Document Info fields do not appear in MIF statements for PDF Document Info However a user can use the File Info dialog box to specify values for Author Title Subject Keywords Copyright Web Statement Job Reference and Marked The values for all these values appear in PDF Document Info A document can also contain arbitrary Document Info fields if they have been entered via an FDK client or by editing a MIF file In MIF each Do
439. y the graphic If the graphic is in black and white no color map is used and this value is set to 0x00000000 If the graphic is in color an RGB color map is used and this value is set to 0x00000001 or 0x00000002 In the example because the graphic is in black and white the value is set to 0x00000000 e The eighth value is the length of the color map in bytes If the graphic is in black and white no color map is used and this value is set to 0x00000000 If the graphic is in color a color map with 256 colors is used described by 768 bytes of information and this value is set to 0x00000300 the hexadecimal representation of the number 768 In the example because the graphic is in black and white the value 0x00000000 is used The Framelmage format is similar to the Sun rasterfile format for bitmap images The following section of code is part of the usr include rasterfile h header file which describes the Sun rasterfile format struct rasterfile IntT ras_magic magic number IntT ras_width width pixels of image IntT ras_height height pixels of image IntT ras depth depth 1 8 or 24 bits of pixel IntT ras_length length bytes of image IntT ras_type type of file see RT_ below IntT ras_maptype type of colormap see RMT_ below IntT ras_maplength length bytes of following map color map follows for ras_maplength bytes followed by image he define RAS
440. y to create PDF bookmarks from paragraph tags the new PgfAcrobatLevel statement has been added This statement specifies the paragraph s level in an outline of bookmarks For more information about the MIF syntax for paragraphs see Pgf statement on page 61 Character statements In version 5 the FDX FDY and FDW statements which specify the horizontal kern value the vertical kern value and the spread of characters now measure in terms of the percentage of an em In previous versions the FDX and FDY statements specified values in points When reading MIF files from previous versions FrameMaker in version 5 will convert points into the percentage of an em Previous versions of FrameMaker generate error messages when reading FDX and FDY statements specifying percentages since these products expect the kerning value in points Table statements In version 5 tables can be aligned along the inside or outside edge in relation to the binding of a book of a text column or text frame As a result of this change the Tb1Alignment statement now supports the additional keywords Inside and Outside In addition the existing Tb1TitleContent statement is now contained in the new TblTitle statement For more information about the MIF syntax for tables see Tbl statement on page 78 Document statements In version 5 the DAcrobatBookmarksIncludeTagNames statement has been added under the Document statement to support the conversion of
441. ynchronized boolean gt Yes aligns baselines of text in adjacent columns lt TFLineSpacing dimension gt Line spacing for synchronized baselines lt TFMinHangHeight dimension gt Maximum character height for synchronization of first line in column if charac ters exceed this height FrameMaker doesn t synchronize the first line lt TFSideheads boolean gt Yes means text flow contains side heads lt TFMaxInterLine dimension gt Maximum interline spacing lt TFMaxInterPgf dimension gt Maximum interparagraph spacing lt Notes gt Defines a footnote see Notes statement next lt Para gt Defines a paragraph see Para statement on page 131 gt End of Text Flow statement Usage Most MIF generators will put all document text in one Text Flow statement However if there are subsequent TextFlow statements the interpreter assumes they have the same settings current paragraph format current font and so forth as the previous text flow To divert the flow into a new unlinked text frame there must be a TextRect ID statement in the first ParaLine statement of the new Text Flow statement see page 132 The TextRect ID statement resets the current text frame definition so subsequent text is placed within the identified text frame this is necessary only if you want to reset the text frame defaults If the text flow contains side heads the TFSideheads statement is set to Yes The Pgf Placement Style st
442. you cannot change the element s type or behavior For example to redefine the built in inverse sine function asin so that it appears as sin add the redefined element to the Math Catalog as follows lt DMathCatalog lt DMathOpOverrides The name of the built in operator as it appears in MIF lt DMathOpName asin gt Forces lookup from the reference page lt DMathOpTLineOverride Yes gt gt end of DMathOpOverrides gt end of DMathCatalog Redefine the appearance of the element in a reference frame as follows lt Page Create a named reference page lt PageType ReferencePage gt lt PageTag FrameMath1 gt Create a named unanchored frame lt Frame lt FrameType NotAnchored gt The name of the built in element as it appears in the Equations palette lt Tag Inverse Sine gt Define the element in the first text line in the frame lt TextLine Apply a new font style and position to change the appearance of the math element lt Font lt FTag lt FWeight Regular gt gt end of Font lt String sin gt VS lt Font 192 lt FTag gt lt FWeight Regular gt ADOBE FRAMEMAKER lt FPosition FSuperscript gt gt end of Font lt String 1 gt gt end of TextLine gt end of Frame gt end of Page MIF Reference When you create the reference frame that specifies the new appearance of the math element you must give the frame the name of the built in e
443. your site 124 ADOBE FRAMEMAKER 125 MIF Reference platformisa code specifying the platform on which the filter was run The code is a string of four characters The following table lists some of the possible codes Code Description WINT Windows NT WIN3 Windows 3 1 WIN4 Windows 95 UNIX Generic X 11 Sun HP filter_versisa string of four characters identifying the version of the filter on that platform For example version 1 0 of a filter is represented by the string 1 0 filter_name is a text string less than 31 characters long that describes the filter Importing a Flash file When a Flash file is imported into a FrameMaker document the filter_id data is rendered as a device independent bitmap DIB You can import a Shockwave Flash SWF file by referencing it from the document or by pasting it into the document In both cases the graphic object is made up of two facets DIB and SWF that are streamed when the document is saved as a MIF file Importing a U3D file When a U3D file is imported into a FrameMaker document the filter id data is rendered as a device independent bitmap DIB You can import a U3D file by referencing it from the document or by pasting it into the document In both cases the graphic object is made up of two facets DIB and U3D that are streamed when the document is saved as a MIF file When you import a U3D file by reference the MIF fil

FrameMaker MIF Reference Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents